Home

R&S FSW-K7 Analog Demodulation User Manual

1. N 276 UNIT n PMETersp POWNErt e cr rnt eere rt rr er nter ir iere i EE ER EC FEDERER payne edi 225 NITSOn PMETersps POWOE RATIO eon coena timc tu epu aet ege need ununi renes oRO ee er Pire tI Ke Eee 225 UNI Tne D 277 Index Symbols user 9 254 A A weighted filter PAN lE ee et e crac met aer ed aat 118 Aborting SWOOD xcci cisci eere ci ete eae eb eee eta se COR ED HERE 108 109 AC DC Coupling ccc 26 54 92 112 122 130 Activating Analog Demodulation measurements remote 182 Active probe Micro BUOM PD 72 Pi 13 AF Auto Scale NEXIS sien 122 134 AF center Demodulation spectrum 0 nen 114 y lol m 12 AP COUDIING cii iter eme b ciet 112 122 130 AF filters Awelglited iina asenna aaan 118 COIR ire oare ive verse nE AEE EAEE DEEN CCITT a GONMPMQUPATION cero rr err ei enn es 116 Deactivalilig en terere sac tracer eret 120 Deemphasis High PASS cesses eet een 117 MICI 118 WEIGHING i err retten ga 118 AF full span Demodulation spectrum sciri 115 AF span Demodulation spectrum sseseeeees 115 Displayed rr rrr eerta t teres 12 Remote control 2 AF SDOCIFUIm iiicri rrr m eere n trenes
2. Manual operation See Relative Unit on page 125 11 4 9 Adjusting Settings Automatically The following remote commands are required to adjust settings automatically in a remote environment The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 5 9 Automatic Settings on page 131 MSRA MSRT operating mode In MSRA MSRT operating mode settings related to data acquisition cannot be adjus ted for Analog Demodulation applications SENS ADIUSHAU ace sever cv cectencedtectine catevevescncves aaa on penta eects eet ns 280 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation eese nennen nenne rere nins 281 SENSe JADJusECONFIgure DURaAtioRIMODI 21 12 2 rre tte rettet ecd aia 281 SENSe JADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWEV ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaaeaaaaeenenenenenes 282 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPEe ececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaeeaeaaaaeeeeneneneeeees 282 SENSe ADJust CONFigure TRIQG eesssssssesssssssssssesene aa eaii 282 ISENSeJADJUSEFPREQGQUUORIQU ieinu a nee aa aaa 283 SENSe JADJuSEEEVel rerit E E AE nswaaeacaalanaers dde 283 SENSe ADJust SCALe Y AUTO CONTinuous eese enne 283 SENSe ADJust ALL This command initiates a measurement to determine and set the ideal settings for the current task automatically only once for the current measurement This includes Center frequency Reference level e Scaling E
3. 108 109 S Sample Tale cec dae eo ee cic Nee endo Digital 1 Q Digital 1 Q remote sssssses 213 214 Samples Performante i ec cote eet ai tirare Hee Rcs 28 Saving Eimit lifigs cet e e e ede rt Ren 159 iiir 50 Scalar reflection measurement External generator ct tote o eR ren 35 Scaling Amplitude range automatically 123 Automatic Y axis Y axis remote control sssseesese 248 ScoreenlayOUL acies onenian trn m ec treo d eere Y NE 10 Search Configuration softkey sss 145 Search settings Markers remote od d dtc ee 330 Secure user mode Storage locatlori iet Ee teres 49 Select Marker 146 Ife M 10 Aborting remote Activating remote Mode remote 294 REMOTE erras uio esed eder eres e aE MOL ae Md 292 Settings Displayed nsn denarna e mein ete 50 Filename isens et re ena ardena r n aeia 49 Isestorinig files rte mieten 50 Storage locatloli rne 49 Settings files Bru Loading Predefined 2 SAVING M Setup files External generator sseni 38 73 74 Shift x limit lies ceste ie beer terere rodent 159 Shift y l ifmit INES 4er b etr eerie esater reae 159 Short circuit reflection measurement Calibration external generator
4. 205 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment DATE sss 206 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope IDN seeseseeeseeeee nennen 206 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope LEDState eeesesessssessssss 206 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope TCPip eeeeeseseseeeeeeeeeeee nen 207 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope VDEVice essen 207 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope VFIRmware sese 207 TRIGger SEQuence OSCilloscope COUPling sese 207 EXPort WAVeform DISPlayoff lt FastExport gt Enables or disables the display update on the oscilloscope during data acquisition with the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 As soon as the R amp S FSW B2000 is activated see B2000 State on page 80 the dis play on the oscilloscope is turned off to improve performance during data export As soon as the R amp S FSW closes the connection to the oscilloscope the display is reacti vated and the oscilloscope can be operated as usual However if the LAN connection is lost for any reason the display of the oscilloscope remains deactivated Use this command to re activate it Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt FastExport gt ON OFF ON Disables the display update for maximum export speed OFF Enables the display update The export is slower RST ON
5. SOUR EXT FREQ DEN 3 Sets a multiplication factor of 4 3 i e the transmit frequency of the generator is 4 3 times the analyzer frequency Manual operation See Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Offset on page 76 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines the frequency offset of the generator with reference to the ana lyzer frequency Select the offset such that the frequency range of the generator is not exceeded if the following formula is applied to the start and stop frequency of the analyzer Source Freq gp ao offset Denominator Parameters Offset numeric value gt specified in Hz kHz MHz or GHz rounded to the nearest Hz RST 0 Hz Example SOUR EXT FREQ OFFS 10HZ Sets an offset of the generator output frequency compared to the analyzer frequency of 10 Hz Manual operation See Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Offset on page 76 SOURce EXTernal POWer LEVel Level This command sets the output power of the selected generator Parameters Level numeric value RST 20 dBm Example SOUR EXT POW 30dBm Sets the generator level to 30 dBm Manual operation See Source Power on page 75 SOURce EXTernal STATe State This command activates or deactivates the connected external generator Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manu
6. ssssusssse 321 Table irte eene 144 Table evaluation method ssssssssss 22 Table remote control 2 921 Type sissi na 142 LOTES 142 Maximizing Windows remote x 1c Ie pde tt 297 Measurement accuracy External generator ieenie treten te 39 Measurement channel Creating remote cene eee 182 183 Deleting remote ririri aiiin 183 Duplicating remote 24 182 Queryihg remote ssie niaire a naaa SE 183 Renaming remote zu 185 Replacing remote 2 ees 183 Measurement examples Analog Demodulation esses 169 Measurement time lt 109 Auto sellirigs 1 5 acoso tore egets 133 Displayed as Effects 28 Power sensor 86 Valu erange onere e meme Adda traen 27 Microbutton RODS nc tdeo ed ac EN Lo dee Minimi icis Marker positioning is Nextime pni lode iene ao needed Mixer Type Exterrial Mixer tate 58 MKR ROY 141 MKR gt cM M 145 146 MKR FUNCT co 148 Modulation Doi T Depth scaling FREQUENCY errientsa MSRA Analysis interval Operating mode Restriction PE M MSRA applications Capture offset remote ssessees 360 MSRA MSRT Analysis iliterVal 2 tert rentem rine 105 MSRT Analysis interval Operating mode
7. O 58 RANE TUBE eec esses ebrio E i uu pd 58 E oia DEC aetate baeo Eaedem cepta aide 58 Bie 0 01 M 59 External Mixer State Activates or deactivates the external mixer for input If activated ExtMix is indicated in the channel bar of the application together with the used band see Band on page 57 Remote command SENSe MIXer STATe on page 191 RF Start RF Stop Displays the start and stop frequency of the selected band read only The frequency range for the user defined band is defined via the harmonics configura tion see Range 1 2 on page 58 For details on available frequency ranges see table 11 2 Remote command SENSe MIXer FREQuency STARt on page 194 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STOP on page 194 Handover Freq Defines the frequency at which the mixer switches from one range to the next if two different ranges are selected The handover frequency can be selected freely within the overlapping frequency range Remote command SENSe MIXer FREQuency HANDover on page 193 Band Defines the waveguide band or user defined band to be used by the mixer The start and stop frequencies of the selected band are displayed in the RF Start and RF Stop fields For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 11 2 The mixer settings for the user defined band can be selected freely The frequency range for the user defined band is d
8. eeeeeeeeeeeee eene 326 Analyzing Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam FRAMe Frame Time CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram FRAMe Frame Time This command positions a marker on a particular frame Parameters Frame Selects a frame directly by the frame number Valid if the time stamp is off The range depends on the history depth Time Selects a frame via its time stamp Valid if the time stamp is on The number is the negative distance to frame 0 in seconds The range depends on the history depth Example CALC MARK SGR FRAM 20 Sets the marker on the 20th frame before the present CALC MARK2 SGR FRAM 2s Sets second marker on the frame 2 seconds ago CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam SARea lt SearchArea gt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram SARea lt SearchArea gt This command defines the marker search area for all spectrogram markers in the mea surement channel lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant Parameters lt SearchArea gt VISible Performs a search within the visible frames Note that the command does not work if the spectrogram is not visible for any reason e g if the display update is off MEMory Performs a search within all frames in the memory RST VISible CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam XY MAXimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK This command moves a mark
9. senes 49 a d E NON RE 49 L Load Standard cesonia E QU 50 L Saye Standarda ai a eaaa EnaA a Aaa a eaan nani 50 L Delete Standard s o neeese esanian saninin ranana patet Riesaateiwidessautecdevpewesdaenenteh 50 L Restore Standard Files trennen 50 Setup Standard Opens a file selection dialog box to select a predefined setup file The predefined set tings are configured in the R amp S FSW Analog Demodulation application This allows for quick and easy configuration for commonly performed measurements Selecting the Storage Location Drive Path Files Setup Standard Select the storage location of the settings file on the instrument or an external drive The Drive indicates the internal C or any connected external drives e g a USB storage device The Path contains the drive and the complete file path to the currently selected folder The Files list contains all subfolders and files of the currently selected path The default storage location for the settings files is C R_S Instr user predefined AdemodPredefined Note Saving instrument settings in secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device
10. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee enn 324 CALOCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram XY MlNimum PEAK eee 324 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MAXimum ABOWVe sse 325 CALOCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOWVe eseseseeeeeeeen 325 CALOCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MAXimum BELOW eeeeeeeeeneeeenen n 325 CALOCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELOW eese 325 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimUM NEXT c cceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaeaeeeaeeeenenenenes 325 CALOCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT sss 325 CALOCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK eese 325 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum PEAK eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 325 CALOCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MINimum ABOWVe eese 325 CALOCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MINimum ABOWVe eeeeeeeeeeen 325 CALOCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MINimum BELOW eeeeeeeeeeene nennen 326 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELoOw eese 326 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MINimum NEXT ssssseseseseeeee ener 326 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT esee 326 CALOCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MlINimum PEAK eese 326 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MINimum PEAKT
11. sssss 78 Signal ID Exterhi lMIXGr ssion iisen recenti ea EEA External Mixer Remote control Signal source acm 190 Signialto noise ratio 2 22er retro eren 26 Signal to noise and distortion see SINAD is ett rentre a ete t netos SINAD onere Querying remote he Treubleshootlfhig 2 nre retten Single sweep SOfIKGy eite ede a E ted eoe 108 SNIE ZOOM iet enn tore Pete era FR run 159 Slope Power s nsot trigger sssi sinirinin 88 pc 103 259 Trigger Power sensor sisstin tasi 88 Softkey Calibrate Reflection Open remote control Calibrate Reflection Short remote control Calibrate Transmission remote control ES Normalize remote control sesesssse Softkeys AF Auto Scale cette rerit AF Center AF Filter Config AF Full Span AF Span Manual m AR cr S AF cjrojo p All Functions Off AM Offline 101 Amplitude Contig 2 2 rtm ntt mm 88 Auto All x 192 Auto Freg nen eret oe e Per aigna 132 Auto level 1 laer sees eaire an 90 95 133 BB POWet 1 neret tette e rp R 100 Capture Offs t cce ace ete 107 COMER E 96 116 Continue Single Sweep nee 109 Contindous SWeGD eren reete ether peret 108 Demod BW pieni tenia 106 116 Demod Config eiie ciere Cep dee 110
12. IReStrictiOEi oo rait ee rto eos MSRT applications Capture offset Capture offset remote Multiple Measurement channels ssssseesss 10 Multiple ZOOmm ctr etre 159 N n dB down Delt Value rca tse eic ce ca to ana e cae 153 MAIK6Gr cuiii otii esp ta sanhedetasevansigaesadeacossesvensts 153 Remote Control sisseseade aaiae 340 Name Limit lines Next Minimum ix Marker positlonihig erred sentent rotta etnies 148 Next Peak enim irae den atas nsa ec ea Ld Ede Ea de 147 Marker POSITIONING 2 cr eset tti rin tna toos 147 Noise EIN prem Marker SOUPCO NOR External generator cent 39 44 Normalization Approximate external generator ss 39 External generator mssins nadani 39 78 Number of Readings Power SCNSOP crisis cas Ed edd dra b cu edad 87 Numerator Frequencies external generator 42 76 O Offset Analysis interVal oct treo E Oe iR 107 Reference level ier tcrra dero 90 94 Open circuit reflection measurement Calibration external generator 78 Options Electronic attenuation sssesssssesssss 91 Highi pass TER iecit eire te tct 55 189 Preamplifi amp r sia ierant re rr netten ins 92 Oscilloscope IAddtess iim c tice ita ese a kia ad adi Qaeda 81
13. Generator type TTL support Generator type TTL support SMA100A6 X SMR20B11 9 X SMB100A1 X SMR27 X SMB100A12 X SMR27B11 X SMB100A2 X SMR30 X SMB100A20 x SMR30B11 2 X SMB100A3 X SMR40 X SMB100A40 X SMR40B11 X SMBV100A3 x SMR50 X SMBV100A6 X SMR50B11 X SMC100A1 SMR60 X SMC100A3 SMR60B11 2 X SME02 x SMT02 SME03 X SMTO03 SME06 X SMTO06 SMF100A X SMUO2 X SMF22 X SMUO2B31 X SMF22B2 X SMUO3 X SMF43 X SMUO3B31 X SMF43B2 x SMU04 X SMG SMU04B31 2 X SMGL SMUO6 X SMGU z SMUO6B31 2 X SMH SMVO03 SMHU SMWO03 x SMIQO2 X SMWO06 xo SMIQO2B X SMW20 x SMIQO2E SMW40 x SMIQOS3 X SMX SMIQO3B X SMY01 1 Requires firmware version V2 10 x or higher on the signal generator 2 Requires firmware version V1 10 x or higher on the signal generator 3 Requires the option SMR B11 on the signal generator 4 Requires firmware version V3 20 200 or higher on the signal generator Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output 4 7 4 3 4 7 4 4 Generator type TTL support Generator type TTL support SMIQO3E SMY02 SMIQ04B X HP8254A SMIQO6B X HP8257D SMJ03 X HP8340A SMJ06 X HP8648 SMLO1 HP ESG A Series 1000A 2000A 3000A 4000A SMLO2 HP ESG B Series SMLO3 SMP02 X 1 Requires firmware version V2 10 x or higher on the signal generator 2 Requires firmware version V1 10 x or higher on the signal generator
14. Oscilloscopes Alignment 181 Connections B2000 5 81 Remote commands B2000 sess 204 Output Analog Demodulation ssssssse 129 130 Analog Demodulation remote 238 239 Configuration creber rotten repe ee 127 Noise source 45 127 Parameters eere reno eera ads 30 Settings oir be cete ter pd tt dreii 127 Ec det 104 128 Overload External generator eere eren then 39 RF UNDUE p M 30 RE input Femole i t tte eei tetas brenda 188 Overloading External generator eene betta ne teen 45 Overview Configuration K7 i ci OVLD External Generator sic eie entretenir 39 P Parameters Inputsignal iste oet ener Ho te orent ni niter cn et id 30 QUID UE p TERRE 30 Peak excuESiOn 2 x o conten tct cea auto ase pnis 146 152 Peak list COmMMQUIING sse t ae needs eei nha ct tane i ene 151 BIETe Cie Evaluation method FX POMUUAG tpe Marker numbers eerte cicer eadeni d Maximum number of peaks Peak excUrsiOn sinan tsiaren Remote control actir ioter biet cen a dd Sort mode TE SAG as Peak search Gy Ai uonc dn a e tese o rti oet 147 MOG tis sere 146 Reference marker etti inania 144 Peaks Marker positioning tissid nansa n 147 ND 147 SO UKOV oco ic t oe ec ed
15. certet eet eren einn eene rre eere Eee eeu 50 5 3 Input and Frontend Settings eeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeee nennen nnn 52 5 4 Trigger Configuration eti 97 5 5 Da ta Acguisiti i seeria esanean RETI 105 56 Demodulation Display rtt rette rette ENEE 110 5 7 Demodulatlon nire ten EE eee ense AEAEE 110 5 8 Output Settings nre EHI EEEN EEEREN 127 5 9 Automatic Settings eere EE EEEN NEARE AEAN ERENER ESEE 131 6 Analysis 135 6 1 Trace Settings eame ENANAR EE RRES 135 6 2 Trace Data Export Configuration ececccsesseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneeseeeeeseenseeneeeeneens 139 User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 3 R amp S9FSW K7 Contents 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 7 1 7 2 10 11 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 11 8 11 9 11 10 11 11 A 1 A 2 Working with Markers in the R amp S FSW Analog Demodulation application 140 Limit Line Settings and Functions eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeenenennnnnennnnnen nnn 153 Lnulit hsonc ce 159 Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode eee nennen nenne nennen 160 I Q Data Import and Export sssseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeee 162 Import Export F nctlons retener nieto tnra binnen RR RR utet ERR DER XY RRRRRRRnR RR 162 How to Export and Import I Q Data ueeseseeeee
16. 74 Power range external generator 74 Setup files external generator 38 73 74 Supported external generator ssssss 36 GPIB Address External generator sssssssss 74 External generator TTL synchronization External generator 73 H Handover frequency External Mixer 21r ie e RR eens 57 External Mixer Remote control 193 Hardware settings Displayed cues cite cebat eee OD RR qt 11 Harmonics Gonversionloss table eerte ette 64 External Mixer Remote control 195 196 Order External Mixer Type External Mixer High pass filter fgeilli icr 117 High pass filter cine 189 ISECIDDUES cic e vereor ea clie nacre ce inel heces atas 55 Hold Tace Seting cic Pe caves minc n ete room emus 137 Hysteresis Lower A to level n eet eene 133 Trigger s Trigger Power sensor esee 88 Upper Auto level etta 133 l 1 Q data Export file binary data description 373 Export file parameter description i 800 EXpOrliRlg ener erts ete 164 Exporting remote 962 Exporting Importing 164 IMPON em 163 Importing remote entrepris 362 IMPOMING EXPOMING u s dee tercii ee ter n tend 162 1 Q Power TEIgger a iacit re ttes Trigger level remote I
17. DiglConf 5158 renclllom e 100 Display GCohflg re treten trees Expott ie Export config EXtertfial i2 iic rere ede Des ever de voco ten eid eaae D FM Offline x Free pin Frequericy Config 2 114 VQ Power 99 IF Power 99 Import 163 Input Source Config 4 52 IQ Export rniii 164 IQ IfmpOrt i eet rr err tres 163 Line Config rennen rtr rhe tee ce 153 Lower Level Hysteresis nee 133 Marker Config 141 143 Marker to Wace oia rie dee er ce n 143 Meas Time 106 109 Meastime Aulo uite Loue eas 133 Meastime Manual ssseeseseeenennes 133 Mita eR abe shoe a A o a ie i 147 Next MID e ee TRA 148 Next Peak nero ed eet arate 147 Norm DEA 2er ertet eese dete ludens 142 Outputs Config ad27 Overview aL 50 Peak se citi dee ice enced edu ds etre ae 147 PM Ome oieee ssa e e Vect ede oera 101 POWeLSOhSOF x evel test cet c edi E ach e veda s 101 Power Sensor Config 2 OS aic 92 Ref Level m 89 93 Ref Level Offset e asd se 90 94 ISeff6Shi tice iet om ete Cen tier e vereda s sl E RF Offline RF Atten Auto RF Atten Manual 2 ettet enis 91 RF Power Scale Config Search Config Select Marker Single Sweep Span Manual SWOGD COUFIL 2 oru Aidean eh Tite ons Trace 1 2 3 4 Trace Config
18. eese 304 SENSe JADEMod n AM ABSolute TDOMain TYPE esent 286 SENSe JADEMod n FM AFSPectrum RESUIE eeseseseeseeeseeee eene nre 304 SENSe ADEModsn FM AF SPectrum TYPE retten tn terrere oen 286 SENSe JADEMod n FM OFFSet 2 911 SENSe JADEMod n FM TDOMain RESUIt eese enne 304 SENSe ADEMods n FM E TDOMain E TYPE ertt tin tr t terri eet ero 286 SENSe JADEMoasri MTIMS ioo e iie ipa eu tk tri tr E cp EX bd endi centum ves bebe a 249 SENSe JADEMod n PM AFSPectrum RESUIt eese nennen ener rennen 304 SENSe JADEMod lt n PM AFSPectrum T YPE iste tret aii ire ret our ie dag SENSe JADEModsri PMERPOInI Xii uoo ene tete vr co E sa te co xcv b OUS c Oe Ede RECO RE PNE HE US SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PM TDOMain RESult SENSe ADEMods n PM TDOMain T YPE iut rriti iii SENSe JADEModsn PRESSERESTOFe iore rre ead ada cie PO a cci ENSE LI Ne SENSe ADEMods n PRESSES TORS rre ttr etate eren Ye ay KERN sss CY Rn ka ERE Re ESN SENSe ADEModsn PRESet STANdard 5 ttr nte ei i SENSe JADEModsn REENGIU oi iet ets EU che E 250 SENSE Ap oeil p SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SPEC SPAN ZOOM SENSe JADEMod n SPECtrum BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution eene 251 SENSe ADEMods n SPECtrum RESU E
19. 125 Phase Unit Rad Deg Sets the phase unit to rad or deg for displaying PM signals Remote command UNIT n ANGLe on page 276 5 7 6 Demodulation THD Unit DB Sets the unit to percent or DB for the calculation of the THD in the Result Summary Remote command UNIT lt n gt THD on page 277 Relative Unit Defines the unit for relative demodulation results see chapter 5 7 6 Result Table Set tings on page 125 Remote command CONFigure ADEMod RESults UNIT on page 279 Result Table Settings Access Overview gt Demod Settings gt Result Table or Meas Setup gt Demod gt Result Table tab The demodulation results are displayed in the Result Summary table see also Result Summary on page 21 The detectors used to determine the results can be config ured In addition to common absolute demodulation the R amp S FSW Analog Demodulation application also provides demodulation results relative to user defined or measured reference values in the Result Summary The settings for the Result Summary can be defined individually for the different modu lation types FM AM PM For each modulation a separate tab is provided in the dia log box Bree Dm 125 MOUB isi deti o Ro veo e bc pep vere diae it e tuba gd Vased ve dva 125 I EMEND TON TT TU TL UTE 126 Reference Valie 4 eris diet eot rone tet io dr erige se cr ERE RR RR Ra pd E RE ERE ARen Ea Eaa 126 Meas Reference ee ee
20. cccccccccsssceceecececeececessseecessceecaacesessseeseeeeeecagecessaseesanees 294 INI Fate p SEQuencerREFReSsh DALLE 4 ei ertet re dar ae aa mies 295 SYS Tem SEQUENCES 5 oce soir ER ERE ER oreer isi RUP DM PSP ERPaI PR URE Pa ES 295 ABORt This command aborts the measurement in the current measurement channel and resets the trigger system To prevent overlapping execution of the subsequent command before the measure ment has been aborted successfully use the OPC or wAT command after ABOR and before the next command For details see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual To abort a sequence of measurements by the Sequencer use the INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt command Note on blocked remote control programs If a sequential command cannot be completed for example because a triggered sweep never receives a trigger the remote control program will never finish and the remote channel to the R amp S FSW is blocked for further commands In this case you must inter rupt processing on the remote channel first in order to abort the measurement To do so send a Device Clear command from the control instrument to the R amp S FSW on a parallel channel to clear all currently active remote channels Depend ing on the used interface and protocol send the following commands e Visa viClear e GPIB ibcir e RSIB RSDLLibclr Now you can send the ABORt command on the remote ch
21. ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaeaaeaaeeenenenes 272 SEN Se IMLTEr nA QI nio tir rtt EEA ia a e gue Eee Renee taa 272 SENSe FIL Ter n DEMPhasis TCONStant essere nennen rne 272 SENSe FILTer n DEMPhasis STATE iiics ieii sv uc cn en etae 273 SENSe FIL Ter n HPASs FREQuency ABSolute isse 273 SENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs FREQuency MANUAl cccceeeeeeeee cece ee eaeee eee eeeeeeeeteteeeeeneees 273 SENSE JFILT Er n gt HPASS KS TA T6 ets ac ad re aetema edere eani os Geet alias 274 SENSe FIL Ter n L PASs FREQuency ABSolute esses 274 SENSe FIL Ter n L PASs FREQuency MANUal cessisse enne nnne nnn 274 SENSe FIL Ter n L PASs FREQuency RELative sese 275 SENSe FIETersns E PASS STATe eiii Leo i aE a iD RRNUS 275 SENSe FILTer lt n gt AWEighted STATe State This command activates deactivates the A weighting filter for the specified evalua tion For details on weighting filters see Weighting on page 118 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT AWE ON Activates the A weighting filter Manual operation See Weighting on page 118 SENSe FILTer lt n gt AOFF This command switches all AF filters for the selected evaluation off Usage Setting only Manual operation See Deactivating all AF Filters on page 120 Configuring the Measure
22. eterne erepti nn e t PER EXE tere a aerate EENet CALGulates n gt MARKersmb X iii concrete rerit a err or eR TEENI SATSATA ER EXKL Ea RESEAL LITSEN 316 CALC latesn MARKE MA X SSIZB uc erroe E AnS SEE ENS RR PENES EXX AEN VERE SEXE EX EX TEN HEURE PEERS 321 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe CAL Culat lt n gt iMSRA ALING SHOW coreene sanaa anaE EOE ANEAN TEENE T ETO EAEN REET GALGulate sn MSRA ALINS VALue tron tnt t t rer tp Fu te ern ti ea er Pe nep 360 GALCulatesn MSRA WINDowsn IMAL es irit trennt tr reet ntn n enr seidadbecouteveedesbaeess 360 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative STATe s CALCulate n PMETer p RELative MAGNItude eese 219 CALCulate n PMETer p RELative MAGNitude AUTO ONCE esesseeeeneeneneenne 220 CAL Gulatespn2 REMS ALINS SEIOW cette ratae CRF eR EE S Pe RE Hp ek xa PERS Ber xXRE RE CURIE PESE E 0a OEN ATEI nE CALCulate lt n gt RTMS ALINe VALue GAL Culatesn s RTMS WINDOWSnRP VAIS us orco ratore eren eaneioagsaunestueacsseestagsgeeeanaey conesttedeagecumeianneneaseensaeens 362 CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer CALibration AlQ HATiming STATe CALibration PMETersp gt ZERO AUTO ON CEs vcccccveancesecneenecs nasstsaencenteneeseaedacraiveus AaS NOE TE ETENEE ENORET 219 CONFigure ADEMod RESults AM DETector det MODE sess 279 CONFigure
23. iiie ett rarae rr ir tte reete re rrr n e RR EE 304 SENSe JADEMod n SPECtrum SPAN MAXimum eese nennen nennen 270 SENSe JADEModsn SPECtrmm TYPE iet trt ee re pesa ead ae toe Peer be hehe OR INED 287 SENSe ADEModsn S QUelch LEVel 2 trennen ttc near ehh t rtr RE tn e eee EE Fo AS RA easi 266 SENSe ADEModsn SQUE STATE iniii ienai einni Ee teneo rii tere n ERR 266 SENSe ADEModsri SRAT S sinet i t EU che OA EPIO DELI TRETEN CE DECRE TH EUH eee avsatenteiae 252 SENSe ADEModxn ZOONMELENGIh ioo o reete teni tnn eto rni ce e hana nra reae PER ae adn 267 SENSe ADEMod n 7 ZOOMELENGIFi MODE 2 it rentur ttr ra err eee Rn the PR Pene EP ERE nt 267 SENSe JADEModsri ZOOM S TAE is tievendisevin sic ic trea e tiepesseer acad n vec i Sates ux tbe CODE aoe SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM STATe SENSE SPHIFE S i G SENSe ADJ st CONFigure DUPRGliOI iic ci or eru io rere ea acide ints sas Coe ENE SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE nor enne ttn rn t netta adn 281 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYS Teresis LOWer cette rtr r pn aen rh rh Ren ER nena 282 SENSe ADJust CONFigure H YS Tleresis UPPer i rro reap err v ER aE 282 SENSe 3ADJUSECONEigUresTIRIG ieor dee reete rr ye EEE E E EAEE EEE 282 SENSe ADJust F REQuency SENSE JADIS LEV Gl nj ee pem carere ie E a e IEEE iii SENSe ADJust SCALe Y AUTO CONTinuous
24. The following functions set the currently selected marker to the result of a peak search or set other characteristic values to the current marker value Select Malkar vienan rr br te n c Eae e enr t b etl ties B ER 146 Peak Sears iisicciiiisciarstisudeeienadedevadandvadasaty a Poe beu Pesaro PIE LE Pe anes 147 Search Next Peak uento tete dele ore ete nad E utt aa c petra Duce de Pose de vuv Cem URN 147 Sear mMM REESE TTE CODD TESTES 147 Search Next MIDFOUITE 2 1 os dicts pce r2 ae resi E aevi acea e EI A Se VE MG sedo XR E REUS 148 Select Marker The Select Marker function opens a dialog box to select and activate or deactivate one or more markers quickly Working with Markers in the R amp S FSW Analog Demodulation application Selected State Selected State Selected State mmm Detae Mos aa oe Boos Rn Ss 6 sa Remote command Marker selected via suffix lt m gt in remote commands Peak Search Sets the selected marker delta marker to the maximum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK on page 331 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK on page 333 Search Next Peak Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next lower maximum of the assigned trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 331 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt
25. eeeeeeeeeneeeneneenn enne 283 SENSe AVERagesn CO NL cire bre cca eee nh tte vest ge ce e BEY e tpa eee odds SENSe TAVERagesTi TYPE re ecard adenine nlite nde E C E ER PRORA SENSE AVERa gesn ESTATES E cence SENSe BANDwidth RESOlutiofi ccr rtr re erp ainada SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod TYPE esseseeeseneeenee nennen ennt 252 SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuUire 1 nto tet tnter tp cene ten eene teh ines 234 SENSe ICORR6GcIiOR CVIEBANI unii eter re yep rece Ere op e b Eee gc Evo Red 198 SENSE CORRection Ob Eds c 198 SENSe CGORRection CVL CATALOG recie esce ettet ge dee edet doped hie 199 SENSe CORRection CVIE CLEA critic et aeree e Erie HER ne YE ERE cid bez ER ERE VR SENSe CORRection CVL COMMent SENSe GORRSsctlion C VIE DATA ccrte e er a ee a den Hee EE Dd s tel SENSe CORR ction CVE HARMORIGC 1 potiuntur treni hr terre rr tht trece rc ror En Ed a SENSE GORRECtION CVI MIRC P M n SENSe CORRSsction C VIE PORTS cicer cct retrieve t c rac EL rut iva cc Pee dta EE SENSe CORR6 ction VE SEL6CL rr reet ba trt ert irent n EIE Ere EE PEE SENSe GORRection VI SNUMBALF n cocoa tomi peat EY EEE TEO EErEE EAEEREN SENSe CORRSCtionMETEIOG itte te tt tp er acervi dut sta ea e p des SENSe CORRSction REGall iuit ve ri deci e ae ri er reb a E its ab E C EE ERU SENSe GO
26. Remote command SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 192 Auto ID Threshold Defines the maximum permissible level difference between test sweep and reference sweep to be corrected during automatic comparison Auto ID on page 60 function The input range is between 0 1 dB and 100 dB Values of about 10 dB i e default set ting generally yield satisfactory results Remote command SENSe MIXer THReshold on page 193 Input and Frontend Settings Bias Settings Define the bias current for each range which is required to set the mixer to its optimum operating point It corresponds to the short circuit current The bias current can range from 10 mA to 10 mA The actual bias current is lower because of the forward voltage of the mixer diode s The trace is adapted to the settings immediately so you can check the results To store the bias setting in the currently selected conversion loss table select the Write to lt CVL table name gt button Remote command SENSe MIXer BIAS LOW on page 192 SENSe MIXer BIAS HIGH on page 191 Write to lt CVL table name gt Bias Settings Stores the bias setting in the currently selected Conversion loss table for the range see Managing Conversion Loss Tables on page 61 If no conversion loss table is selected yet this function is not available CVL Table not selected Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS on page 198 Managing Conversion Loss Tables Access
27. For details on general I Q data processing in the R amp S FSW refer to the reference part of the I Q Analysis remote control description in the R amp S FSW User Manual Demodulation Process Software demodulator Trace RF spectrum mx pct Les Bee AF spectrum x nen trace aaa modulation t _ AF trigger calculation frequency i lowpass carrier AM demodulator PX power LL vero T Trace Inter Trace RF power Arithmetic polation Detector trace Mn modulation frequency Q data Trece Inter Trace peak peak AM 1 2 pk pk Detectors rms amp modulation Counter depth modulation frequency lowpa carrier i frequency FM demodulator Quen Coupling Trace Inter Trace Fein e fr ones f FM vaco peak FM k Detectors 1 2 pk pk amp ms pude modulation frequency Trace Inter Trace Arithmetic Detector gt PM trace TL peak PM peak Detectors 1 pk pk amp rms Counter modulation frequency Fig 4 1 Block diagram of software demodulator Demodulation Bandwidth The AM DC FM DC and PM DC raw data of the demodulators is fed into the Trace Arithmetic block that combines consecutive data sets Possible trace modes are Clear Write Max Hold Min Hold and Average The output data of the Trace Arith metic block can be read via remote control SENS ADEM lt evaluation gt RES see SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AM ABSolute TDOMain RESult on page 304 The collected measur
28. For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual File Name Setup Standard Contains the name of the data file without the path or extension For details on the file name and location see the Data Management topic in the R amp S FSW User Manual Note Saving instrument settings in secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Configuration Overview Load Standard Setup Standard Loads the selected measurement settings file Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PRESet STANdard on page 186 Save Standard Setup Standard Saves the current measurement settings for a specific standard as a file with the defined name Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PRESet STORe on page 187 Delete Standard Setup Standard Deletes the selected standard Standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz can also be deleted A confirmation query is displayed to avoid unintentional deletion of the stand ard Note
29. Remote command SENSe ADEMod n AF SPAN FULL on page 269 RF Evaluation Access Overview Demod Settings Spectrum or Meas Setup Demod Spectrum tab These settings are only available for RF evaluation both in time and frequency domain Note that for RF data the center frequency and demodulation bandwidth corre spond to the settings defined in the Input and Data Acquisition configuration Demod Spectrum Scaling Unit Center 13 25 GHz Span Demodulation Bandwidth 5 0 MHz RF Full Span DBW ITer Telifs Eieui 6 RF Time Domain E 5 7 3 Demodulation Center frequency Defines the center frequency of the signal in Hertz The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 SPAN pin 2 lt fcenter lt fmax x SPAN pin 2 fmax and span depend on the instrument and are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 240 Span Defines the frequency span The center frequency is kept constant The following range is allowed span 0 0 Hz span gt 0 Spanmi S f span S f max and fmax DBW 2 fmax and Spanmin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe ADEMod n SPECtrum SPAN MAXimum on page 270 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SPEC SPAN ZOOM on page 270 Demodulation Bandwidth Defines the demodulation bandwidth of the measurement The demodulation band width determin
30. The allowed range is from 100 Hz to 10 GHz Remote command INPut DIQ SRATe on page 213 INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO on page 214 Full Scale Level The Full Scale Level defines the level and unit that should correspond to an I Q sam ple with the magnitude 1 Input and Frontend Settings If Auto is selected the level is automatically set to the value provided by the connec ted device Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer on page 213 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT on page 213 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO on page 212 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level If enabled the reference level is adjusted to the full scale level automatically if any change occurs Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling on page 213 Connected Instrument Displays the status of the Digital Baseband Interface connection If an instrument is connected the following information is displayed Name and serial number of the instrument connected to the Digital Baseband Inter face Used port e Sample rate of the data currently being transferred via the Digital Baseband Inter face e Level and unit that corresponds to an I Q sample with the magnitude 1 Full Scale Level if provided by connected instrument Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 211 DiglConf Starts the optional R amp S DiglConf application This function is available in the In Output menu but only if the optional software is installed Note that R amp S
31. 6 4 Limit Line Settings and Functions Marker n dB down N dB Down Value CE down Marker SUAS sis o estie etate toc eene dcos leta pesce e dre pvo dea kun 153 i adas dowm Delta Value i ier elo c ee teca debet o eb eee a tee Co deba 153 n dB down Marker State Activates or deactivates the special n dB down marker function Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown STATe on page 342 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown RESult on page 341 n dB down Delta Value Defines the delta level from the reference marker 1 used to determine the bandwidth or time span Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuency on page 340 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown TIME on page 342 Deactivating All Marker Functions Access Overview gt Analysis gt Marker Functions gt All Functions Off or MKR FUNC gt All Functions Off All special marker functions can be deactivated in one step Limit Line Settings and Functions Access Overview gt Analysis gt Lines or LINES gt Line Config Up to 8 limit lines can be displayed simultaneously in the R amp S FSW Many more can be stored on the instrument Stored limit line settings When storing and recalling limit line settings consider the information provided in the Data Management chapter of the R amp S FSW User Manual e Limit Line Mamnagelmielit
32. COUT SUAS os va ELM 111 Sguelch Level Em 112 AE S o ET E TE AE E T EA 112 Selected NEC 112 Time Domain DOT acsi eene eat RE a aa XXERARSS RSEN TUE SEE aE 112 BEE e AA E E EE Fy esa aim O duda ccs ut UM ee 112 A E EN AEE T T 113 L Legien A A 113 BELL is 1517 DNO MT 113 Zero Phase Reference Position PM Time Domain only eeeeees 113 Phase Wrap On Off PM Time Domain only eesseeseeeeneeeeeennnnn 113 Squelch State Activates the squelch function i e if the signal falls below a defined threshold the demodulated data is automatically set to 0 This is useful for example to avoid demodulation noise during transmission breaks Remote command SENSe ADEMod n SQUelch STATe on page 266 G Yl User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 1 Demodulation Squelch Level Defines the level threshold below which the demodulated data is set to 0 if squelching is enabled The squelch level is an absolute value Remote command SENSe ADEMod n SQUelch LEVel on page 266 AF Coupling Controls the automatic correction of the frequency offset and phase offset of the input signal This function is only available for FM or PM time domai
33. If a measurement is configured to wait for an external trigger signal in a remote control program remote control is blocked until the trigger is received and the program can continue Make sure this situation is avoided in your remote control programs Parameters lt Source gt Configuring the Measurement IMMediate Free Run EXTernal Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector If the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 is installed and active this parameter activates the CH3 input con nector on the oscilloscope Then the R amp S FSW triggers when the signal fed into the CH3 input connector on the oscilloscope meets or exceeds the specified trigger level Note In previous firmware versions the external trigger was connected to the CH2 input on the oscilloscope As of firmware version R amp S FSW 2 30 the CH3 input on the oscilloscope must be used EXT2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input EXT3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input RFPower First intermediate frequency Not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Inter face or the optional Analog Baseband Interface IFPower Second intermediate frequency Not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Inter face For input from the optional Analog Baseband Interface this parameter
34. RST 200 Default unit dBm Manual operation See Threshold on page 157 Analyzing Results 11 8 2 2 Managing Limit Lines Useful commands for managing limit lines described in the R amp S FSW User Manual MMEM SEL ITEM LIN ALL MMEM STOR TYPE MMEM LOAD TYPE Remote commands exclusive to managing limit lines GALOulate n LIMIteks AGCTIVe iita tte ea ne nere Ree E E a EAA N aa 352 CAL CGulatesmsiMtSRSSO OP scatto eec tenue ix aede ibd eed natu to eia t ted eben tee thru 352 GAEGulate mssIMIESKSTDELGIe 1 12 10 2 3 R near oos EH ES eee Fossa CEPR Rv O ed RE 352 GALOulate n LIMIEeko iSTATOe iacet sentar nnda tete a n carr Rege n RR Enina ROM AR GEI rAdS 353 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt TRACe lt t gt CHECK ccccccccccsssceceeecceceseeeeseseeteeceeesageeesseseesaeeees 353 mu mE CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACTive This command queries the names of all active limit lines lt n gt lt k gt are irrelevant Return values lt LimitLines gt String containing the names of all active limit lines in alphabeti cal order Example CALC LIM ACT Queries the names of all active limit lines Usage Query only Manual operation See Visibility on page 155 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt COPY lt Line gt This command copies a limit line Parameters lt Line gt 1 to8 number of the new limit line lt name gt String cont
35. This command links delta marker m to marker 1 If you change the horizontal position x value of marker 1 delta marker m changes its horizontal position to the same value Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 LINK ON Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 143 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt State This command links delta marker m1 to any active normal marker m2 If you change the horizontal position of marker m2 delta marker m1 changes its horizontal position to the same value Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT4 LINK TO MARK2 ON Links the delta marker 4 to the marker 2 Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 143 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MODE lt Mode gt This command defines whether the position of a delta marker is provided as an abso lute value or relative to a reference marker for all delta markers m is irrelevant Note that when the position of a delta marker is queried the result is always an abso lute value see CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 320 Analyzing Results Parameters lt Mode gt ABSolute Delta marker position in absolute terms RELative Delta marker position in relation to a reference marker RST RELative Example CALC DELT MODE ABS Absolute delta marker position CALCulate lt n gt
36. 3 Requires the option SMR B11 on the signal generator 4 Requires firmware version V3 20 200 or higher on the signal generator Generator Setup Files For each signal generator type to be controlled by the R amp S FSW a generator setup file must be configured and stored on the R amp S FSW The setup file defines the frequency and power ranges supported by the generator as well as information required for com munication For the signal generators listed in chapter 4 7 4 2 Overview of Supported Generators on page 36 default setup files are provided If necessary these files can be edited or duplicated for varying measurement setups or other instruments The existing setup files can be displayed in an editor in read only mode directly from the External Generator configuration dialog box From there they can be edited and stored under a different name and are then available on the R amp S FSW For details see the R amp S FSW User Manual Calibration Mechanism A common measurement setup includes a signal generator a device under test DUT and a signal and spectrum analyzer Therefore it is useful to measure the attenuation or gain caused by the cables and connectors from the signal generator and the signal analyzer in advance The known level offsets can then be removed from the measure ment results in order to obtain accurate information on the DUT Calculating the difference between the currently measured power and a r
37. External reference frequency In order to enhance measurement accuracy a common reference frequency should be used for both the R amp S FSW and the generator If no independent 10 MHz reference frequency is available it is recommended that you connect the reference output of the generator with the reference input of the R amp S FSW and that you enable usage of the external reference on the R amp S FSW via SETUP gt Reference gt External Refer ence For more information on external references see the Instrument Setup section in the R amp S FSW User Manual Connection errors If no external generator is connected if the connection address is not correct or the generator is not ready for operation an error message is displayed e g Ext Genera tor TCPIP Handshake Error see chapter 4 7 4 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 44 4 7 4 2 Overview of Supported Generators Generator type TTL support Generator type TTL support SGS100A6 SMP03 X SGS100A12 SMP04 X SMAO1A X SMP22 X SMA100A3 x SMR20 1 Requires firmware version V2 10 x or higher on the signal generator 2 Requires firmware version V1 10 x or higher on the signal generator 3 Requires the option SMR B11 on the signal generator 4 Requires firmware version V3 20 200 or higher on the signal generator Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output
38. Interface Configuration Source Calibration Galibrate TTalsmils Sil o citri em ra eer aeta eo t c Maken ate tl ee d ies 78 Calibrate Reflection Shott i irre tret sicci a 78 Calibrate Reflection Open ssssssssseesseeeeene nennen nnne 78 Source Calibration Normalize 5 reca eee ee Dc t e rt Dt a e re 78 RePEc a MEME EHE EINEN 78 Save AS Trd FACION EET TE PETER 79 Reference POSION pannan a decernere ce t rio ca idea dre e n d airi a da da 79 Reference Value iret eee tcr sette ute kat anas ee eee e decr end epu eee t aeta pe esevd 79 Input and Frontend Settings Calibrate Transmission Starts a transmission type measurement to determine a reference trace This trace is used to calculate the difference for the normalized values For details see chapter 4 7 4 4 Calibration Mechanism on page 38 Remote command SENSe CORRection METHod on page 234 Calibrate Reflection Short Starts a short circuit reflection type measurement to determine a reference trace for calibration If both calibrations open circuit short circuit are carried out the calibration trace is calculated by averaging the two measurements The order of the two calibration mea surements is irrelevant Remote command SENSe CORRection METHod on page 234 Selects the reflection method SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire on page 234 Starts the sweep for short circuit calibration Calibrate Reflection Op
39. MMEMory STORe lt n gt PEAK on page 339 chapter 11 8 1 4 Marker Search Settings on page 330 Remote commands exclusive to peak lists CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks ANNotation LABel S TATe 337 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks COUNt cccccscccccescecessseecseceeeeseeeaeees 337 CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks IMMediate eese 337 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks LIST SIZE ccccccscccessseeceeceeeceseeseneees 338 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT cccccccccsscecsseseeceseeeceneeesseseeeeeees 338 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks STATE ccccccecccessseeceeceseceaceeeseseeeeaeeees 338 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPE akS X ccccccccccesccesssseceesecesesecesseeeeeaneeees 338 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPE aks Y cccccccccceesccessseeeeeecceseeneeesseeeeeaeeeees 339 MMEMon STORGS WISI cR 339 MMEWMory STORexn PEAK eese nnne eaeaeaeaaaaaaaaaaaaaeceeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaned 339 Analyzing Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks ANNotation LABel STATe lt State gt This command turns labels for peaks found during a peak search on and off The labels correspond to the marker number in the marker peak list Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example CALC MARK
40. Parameters lt Mode gt DB PCT RST DB Example UNIT THD PCT Manual operation See THD Unit DB on page 125 Relative Demodulation Results The following commands are required to obtain relative demodulation results CONFigure ADEMod RESults AM DETector det REFerence sese 277 CONFigure ADEMod RESults FM DETector lt det gt REFerence cecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeananaes 277 CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector det REFerence esses 277 CONFigure ADEMod RESults AM DETector det STATe essen 278 CONFigure ADEMod RESults FM DETector lt det gt STAT cceceeeeeceeeceeeeeeeaeaeaeeaeeaenenenes 278 CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector det STATe essen 278 CONFigure ADEMOd RESults AM DETector det REFerence MEAStoref sss 279 CONFigure ADEMod RESults FM DETector det REFerence MEAStoref ssssss 279 CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector det REFerence MEAStoref 279 CONFigure ADEMod RESults AM DETector det MODE eese 279 CONFigure ADEMod RESults FM DETector lt det gt MODE ecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesanananaaaes 279 CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector det MODE eese 279 GONFigure ADEMod RESults D NET 222a oie aiaa ako cene duas 279 CONFigure ADEMod RESults AM DETector lt det gt REFerence lt RefValue gt CONFigure ADEMo
41. RMS Root mean square value Example CALC FEED XTIM PM TDOM Switches on the PM time domain result display DISP TRAC ON Switches on the trace CALC MARK FUNC ADEM PM PPE Queries the peak value of the demodulated PM trace Usage Query only Manual operation See Result Summary on page 21 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod CARRier RESult This command queries the carrier power which is determined from the Clr Write data lt m gt is irrelevant Return values lt CPower gt Power of the carrier without modulation in dBm Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod FERRor RESult lt t gt This command queries the carrier offset frequency error for FM and PM demodula tion The carrier offset is determined from the current measurement data CLR WRITE The modulation is removed using low pass filtering The offset thus determined differs from that calculated in the SENSe ADEMod lt n gt FM OFFSet command which uses averaging to determine the frequency deviation lt m gt is irrelevant Return values lt CarrOffset gt The deviation of the calculated carrier frequency to the ideal car rier frequency in Hz Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod SINad RESult lt t gt This command queries the result of the signal to noise and distortion SINAD mea surement in the specified window for the specified
42. T Input Source Power Sensor External Generator Probes B2000 Settings B2000 State TCPIP Address or Computer name The required connections between the R amp S FSW and the oscilloscope are illustrated in the dialog box Oscilloscope D FSW Rear Panel 9 E B2000 State Activates the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 Note Manual operation on the connected oscilloscope or remote operation other than by the R amp S FSW is not possible while the B2000 option is active Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope STATe on page 205 User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 80 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration TCPIP Address or Computer name When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 the entire measurement via the IF OUT 2 GHZ connector and an oscilloscope as well as both instruments are controlled by the R amp S FSW Thus the instruments must be connected via LAN and the TCPIP address or computer name of the oscilloscope must be defined on the R amp S FSW By default the TCPIP address is expected To enter the computer name toggle the 423 ABC button to ABC As soon as a name or address is entered the R amp S FSW attempts to establish a con nection to the oscilloscope If it is detected the oscilloscope s identity string is queried and displayed in the dialog box The alignment status is also displayed see Align ment on pag
43. The input signal must be between 500 MHz and 8 GHz Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV RFP 30dBm Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 102 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel AM RELative lt Level gt The command sets the level when AM modulated signals are used as trigger source For triggering to be successful the measurement time must cover at least 5 periods of the audio signal Parameters lt Level gt Range 100 to 100 RST 0 Default unit Example TRIG LEV AM REL 20 Sets the AM trigger threshold to 20 Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 102 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel AM ABSolute lt Level gt The command sets the level when RF power signals are used as trigger source For triggering to be successful the measurement time must cover at least 5 periods of the audio signal Parameters lt Level gt Range 100 to 30 RST 20 dBm Default unit dBm Example TRIG LEV AM 30 dBm Sets the RF power signal trigger threshold to 30 dBm Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 102 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel FM lt Level gt The command sets the level when FM modulated signals are used as trigger source Configuring the Measurement For triggering to be successful the measurement time must cover at least 5 periods of the audio signal Parameters lt
44. This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 191 Parameters BiasSetting RST 0 0A Default unit A Manual operation See Bias Settings on page 61 SENSe MIXer LOPower Level This command specifies the LO level of the external mixer s LO port Parameters Level numeric value Range 13 0 dBm to 17 0 dBm Increment 0 1 dB RST 15 5 dBm Example MIX LOP 16 0dBm Manual operation See LO Level on page 60 SENSe MIXer SIGNal State This command specifies whether automatic signal detection is active or not Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that per form frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the I Q Analyzer for instance Parameters State OFF ON AUTO ALL OFF No automatic signal detection is active ON Automatic signal detection Signal ID is active AUTO Automatic signal detection Auto ID is active ALL Both automatic signal detection functions Signal ID Auto ID are active RST OFF Manual operation See Signal ID on page 60 See Auto ID on page 60 Configuring the Measurement SENSe MIXer THReshold lt Value gt This command defines the maximum permissible level difference between test sweep and reference sweep to be corrected during automatic comparison see SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 192 Parameters Value numeric value Range 0 1 dB to
45. Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 264 Analog Demodulation Output Settings Access Overview 2 Output gt Analog Demod The demodulated signal in time domain results can be output to the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector on the R amp S FSW Output is not possible if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active The following settings and functions are available to configure the output in the Analog Demodulation application Note that the audio frequency AF filter settings used for demodulation also apply to the online output However a maximum of two high pass low pass or deemphasis fil ters can be active at the same time if analog demodulation output is active See chapter 5 7 3 AF Filter on page 116 Output DigitalIQ Analog Demod Online Demod Output Output Selection on G AC Cutoff Frequency 100 0 Hz Phones Output Online Demodulation Output State 2 ire eee esi ivinss iidvagaeetiveaieeiieeads 130 UUE Seo en s 130 aeos e E E E E E A EE
46. can also be selected instead of another marker Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MREF on page 319 Working with Markers in the R amp S FSW Analog Demodulation application Linking to Another Marker Links the current marker to the marker selected from the list of active markers If the x axis value of the inital marker is changed the linked marker follows on the same x position Linking is off by default Using this function you can set two markers on different traces to measure the differ ence e g between a max hold trace and a min hold trace or between a measurement and a reference trace Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt on page 316 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt on page 318 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK on page 318 Assigning the Marker to a Trace The Trace setting assigns the selected marker to an active trace The trace deter mines which value the marker shows at the marker position If the marker was previ ously assigned to a different trace the marker remains on the previous frequency or time but indicates the value of the new trace The marker can also be assigned to the currently active trace using the Marker to Trace softkey in the Marker menu If a trace is turned off the assigned markers and marker functions are also deactiva ted Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m TR
47. e or pete pe tr remp WERE EDU REFP alpen 154 e amit ne Delsll6 i cerecocc nere eot Fora eth Re aaa aa ka eroe ande eT ee nare QE nee 156 R amp SS9FSW K7 Analysis 6 4 4 Limit Line Management Access Overview gt Analysis gt Lines gt Limit Lines or LINES gt Line Config gt Limit Lines pedei o Limit Lines Display Lines Unit Compatible Visible Check Traces MULTISTATUS 1 MULTISTATUS 2 MULTISTATUS 5 REMI Y Offset REMS E 0 0 dB Comment View Filter Show compatible oo Show all Show Lines for All Modes For the limit line overview the R amp S FSW searches for all stored limit lines with the file extension LIN in the limits subfolder of the main installation folder The overview allows you to determine which limit lines are available and can be used for the current measurement For details on settings for individual lines see chapter 6 4 2 Limit Line Details on page 156 PANG oio E ET DH C a co rre Ce ET INTE 154 M c 155 genesi 155 VISIDUIEU isis Creer eee crant eei ved cia toos erg reduc vend edad rao etd pid En vvv edu 155 Traces to be Cliecked uc etre rre ra otav eo eran ed ERES en Y E 155 D ISI METTI DID 155 Included Lines in Overview View Filter eese nns 155 L Show lines for all modes 155 poor D EEEE E A E EEEE EE E E 155 We OHSS
48. i ue Reus 22 ui ell ee e 23 Result frequency External generator entretenir re 77 Result Summary Demodulation spectrum 2 115 Eval ation method 2 1 tance ae 21 Retrieving values remote 908 RSUIIS 2 icto bebe nite ese Nats wee aaah Maven 13 AnalyZing eterni eene erp dre red 135 Data format remote 905 307 308 Exporttlirig n wel OO Retrieving remote control 24309 Stability otra m ee torpet 28 Updating the display 109 Updating the display remote ssssse 293 Reverse sweep External generator i e 2 etc tene 43 76 RF Offline SOflKGy irm eee nete ees 101 RF attenuation AUTO P 91 Manual p 91 RF full span 116 aizHl ig N 53 Analog Baseband connector ssssssssss 31 Connector remote 188 Overload protectiori oit eret rns 30 Overload protection remote ssssssssss 188 REMOS MERERETUR ET 187 190 RF overrange External MIXET soniers dennit ea 57 197 RF OVLD External Generator tr eerte 44 RF Power Trigger Jae Trigger level remote RF Spectrum Evaluation method Tioubleshootingy 5 tree trn RF Time Domain Evaluation method trt tete 19 Rising Slope Power sensor sn 88 RUN CONT Mc T 108 RUN SINGLE GY tats
49. 2 cir 268 e BE Byaliallol nee aiaa teo etn inde ta Ue ru uu eR N e ceu nd RIAM E Oda i rus 270 AF evaluation These settings are only available for AF Spectrum evaluations not in the time domain SENSe JADEMod lt n gt AF CENTEV cccecececeeeeeeeeeeeececaeaeaaaaaaeaaeaaeececeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeaeaeea 268 SENSE ADEMOd SNAAR SPAN 22x turre rende tae cop de xar ax ean y rete eh rere Rea Re teas 269 SENS amp JIADEModsn s AF SPAN E ULL 32 2 2 2 0 rrr e pa o eee ponere u co pe pr ee Php R rixcr cach 269 ISENSeJADEMoedgsn AES DAID ieiuna ete RI aee E CQe E UI Ee suena E RA RE AE 269 BENSE ADEMOd NAAF STOP euet cies aana er stadende cr paene np Seine te onem ERE kPa DS 270 SENSe JADEMod lt n gt AF CENTer Frequency This command sets the center frequency for AF spectrum result display Configuring the Measurement lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Frequency gt RST 1 25 MHz Manual operation See AF Center on page 114 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF SPAN Span This command sets the span around the center frequency for AF spectrum result dis play The span is limited to DBW 2 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 252 lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Span gt RST 9 MHz Example ADEM AF SPAN 200 kHz Sets the AF span to 200 kHz Manual operation See AF Span on page 115 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF SPAN FULL This command sets the maxi
50. Absolute filters are indicated by the 3 dB cutoff frequency The 3 kHz 15 kHz and 23 kHz filters are designed as 5th order Butterworth filters 30 dB octave The 150 kHz filter is designed as 8th order Butterworth filter 48 dB octave The absolute low pass filters are active in the following demodulation bandwidth range Filter type Demodulation bandwidth 3 kHz 6 4 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 MHz 15 kHz 50 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 8 MHz 23 kHz 50 kHz s demodulation bandwidth lt 18 MHz 150 kHz 400 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 8 MHz Manual A low pass filter with the manually defined frequency is used Note If online demodulation output is active the predefined fixed filters are not avail able In this case the frequency for the low pass filter must be defined manually see also chapter 5 8 2 Analog Demodulation Output Settings on page 129 If a filter was already configured when online demodulation output is activated it is replaced by a manual filter that provides corresponding results if possible e Relative low pass filters Relative filters 3 dB can be selected in of the demodulation bandwidth The fil ters are designed as 5th order Butterworth filter 30 dB octave and active for all demodulation bandwidths e None deactivates the AF low pass filter default Remote command SENSe FILTer n LPASs STATe on page 275 SENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs F
51. Defines LC LIM3 LC LIM3 LC LIM3 Shifts t LC LIM3 LC LIM3 LC LIM3 LOW MODE REL a relative vertical scale for limit line 3 UNIT DB CONT 1 MHz 50MHz 100 MHz 150MHz 200MHz 5 horizontal definition points for limit line 3 LOW 90 60 40 60 90 5 definition points relative to the reference level for limit line 3 LOW SHIF 2 he limit line 3 by 2dB LOW OFFS 3 an additional 3 dB offset for limit line 3 LOW THR 200DBM a power threshold of 200dBm that must be exceeded for limit to be checked LOW MARG 5dB an area of 5dB around limit line 3 where limit check violations are still tolerated see Storing the limit lines MMEM SEL CHAN LIN ALL ON MMEM STOR TYPE CHAN MMEM STOR STAT 1 LimitLines FM1 FM3 Analyzing Results Example Performing a Limit Check This example demonstrates how to perform a limit check during a basic frequency sweep measurement in a remote environment The limit lines configured in Example Configuring Limit Lines on page 354 are assumed to exist and be active a Preparing the instrument RST Resets the instrument INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep mode FREQ CENT 100MHz Defines the center frequency FREQ SPAN 200MHz Sets the span to 100 MHz on either side of the center frequency SENS SWE COUN 10 Defines 10 sweeps to be performed in each measurement DISP TRAC1 Y RLEV OdBm Sets the ref
52. Detector on page 137 SENSe WINDow lt n gt DETector lt t gt FUNCtion AUTO State This command couples and decouples the detector to the trace mode Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example DET AUTO OFF The selection of the detector is not coupled to the trace mode Manual operation See Detector on page 137 11 5 Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps MSRA MSRT operating mode Note that in MSRA MSRT operating mode capturing data is only possible for the MSRA MSRT Master channel In Analog Demodulation application channels the sweep configuration commands define the analysis interval Be sure to select the cor rect measurement channel before using these commands PAB ORT ie MS 291 INITiate sm CONMAZGS esee ssnsennevetsanessdecadaneeanssstatusacesnsenaseetsdaedeccdasisteaeassiveaceceavese 291 INI TIatesnes CONTIQDUDNS acteur entier aae ree ee eue pex enean ane cox meets 292 INIWiate lt n gt IMMediate i i scv descceetes se eeevias 292 INiTiate s REFRE S orina a apetito c eter aeo c aienasiedieeuaveddadsecclatecsihennedsageeeesdss seeks 293 Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps IN Tigte lt n SEQUENCEMABORE iic sche cadence terae eerte dence uae aa daaar aT EEA 293 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMeCiate cccccscceceececessseeceacececeaeecesseeeceaceeeseseeseeseeeeaneeeeas 294 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer MODE
53. FUNC FPE ANN LAB STAT OFF Removes the peak labels from the diagram Manual operation See Displaying Marker Numbers on page 152 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks COUNt This command queries the number of peaks that have been found during a peak search The actual number of peaks that have been found may differ from the number of peaks you have set to be found because of the peak excursion lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant Return values lt NumberOfPeaks gt Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE COUN Queries the number of peaks Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks IMMediate Peaks This command initiates a peak search Parameters lt Peaks gt This parameter defines the number of peaks to find during the search Note that the actual number of peaks found during the search also depends on the peak excursion you have set with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCursion Range 1 to 200 Example CALC MARK PEXC 5 Defines a peak excursion of 5 dB i e peaks must be at least 5 dB apart to be detected as a peak CALC MARK FUNC FPE 10 Initiates a search for 10 peaks on the current trace Analyzing Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks LIST SIZE lt MaxNoPeaks gt This command defines the maximum number of peaks that the R amp S FSW looks for during a peak search Parameters lt MaxNoPeaks gt Maximum number of pe
54. INP SEL AIQ see INPut SELect on page 190 Suffix lt p gt Return values lt State gt Usage 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I DETected NDETected RST NDETected Query only SENSe PROBe p SETup TYPE Queries the type of the probe 11 4 2 7 Configuring the Measurement Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values lt Type gt String containing one of the following values None no probe detected active differential active single ended Usage Query only Working with Power Sensors The following commands describe how to work with power sensors e Configuring Power Sensors ssssssesseeee nennen enne nnne nennen nnns 217 e Configuring Power Sensor Measurements sess 219 e Triggering with Power SOrSOrs c iore Ye cr erecta ep hte terr e 225 Configuring Power Sensors SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer p CONFigure AUTO STATe 217 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer COUNFE esesesssssssssssssseseeeenenen nennen 217 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer lt p gt DEFine cccccececeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeees 21
55. Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Conver sion Loss Table or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Conversion Loss Table In this tab you configure and manage conversion loss tables Conversion loss tables consist of value pairs that describe the correction values for conversion loss at certain frequencies The correction values for frequencies between the reference points are obtained via interpolation The currently selected table for each range is displayed at the top of the dialog box All conversion loss tables found in the instrument s C r_s instr user cv1 direc tory are listed in the Modify Tables list Input and Frontend Settings Frequency Basic Settings Mixer Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer IEEE T endl a a a a a aia a 62 Edit TAD a oe a a a AN 62 Delete 0 gt nannaa TR TE 62 liso iE o CE 62 New Table Opens the Edit Conversion loss table dialog box to configure a new conversion loss table For details on table configuration see Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables on page 63 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 201 Edit Table Opens the Edit Conversion loss table dialog box to edit the selected conversion loss table For details on table configuration see Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables on page 63 Note that only common conversion loss
56. PM Time Domain Displays the phase deviations of the demodulated PM signal in rad or versus time User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 15 R amp S FSW K7 Measurements and Result Displays 1 PM Time Domain e iAP Clrw Ref 0 00 rad AC CF 100 0 MHz 1001 pts Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIM PM See on page 298 AM Spectrum Displays the modulation depth of the demodulated AM signal in or dB versus AF span The spectrum is calculated from the demodulated AM signal in the time domain via FFT User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 16 R amp S FSW K7 Measurements and Result Displays 2 AM Spectrum e1AP Clrw Ref 100 00 96 AF CF 1 25 MHz 1001 pts AF Span 2 5 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIMe AM REL AFSPectruml see L on page 298 FM Spectrum Displays the frequency deviations of the demodulated FM signal in Hz or dB versus AF span The spectrum is calculated from the demodulated AM signal in the time domain via FFT User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 17 R amp S FSW K7 Measurements and Result Displays 2 FM Spectrum e1AP Clrw Ref 250 00 kHz AF CF 1 25 MHz 1001 pts AF Span 2 5 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIMe FM AFSPectruml see on page 298 PM Spectrum Displays the phase deviations of the demodulated PM signal in rad or dB versus AF span The spectrum is calculated from the demodulated AM signal in the time domain via FFT User Manual 1173 9240 02 21
57. R amp S FSW so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Note however that the internal reference level used to adjust the hardware settings to the expected signal optimally ignores any Reference Level Offset Thus it is impor tant to keep in mind the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle and not to rely on the displayed reference level internal reference level displayed reference level offset Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 243 Unit Reference Level The R amp S FSW measures the signal voltage at the RF input In the default state the level is displayed at a power of 1 mW dBm Via the known input impedance 50 Q or 75 Q see Impedance on page 54 conversion to other units is possible The following units are available and directly convertible dBm dBmV dByV dBpA dBpW Volt Ampere Watt Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 190 CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer on page 242 5 3 4 Input and Frontend Settings Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Reference Level Automatically determines a reference level which ensures that no overload occurs at the R amp S FSW for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the full scale le
58. RDEV OSC LEDS Result GREEN Usage Query only Configuring the Measurement SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope TCPip lt Address gt Defines the TCPIP address or computer name of the oscilloscope connected to the R amp S FSW via LAN Note The IP address is maintained after a PRESET and is transferred between appli cations Parameters lt Address gt computer name or IP address Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC TCP 192 0 2 0 Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC TCP FSW43 12345 Manual operation See TCPIP Address or Computer name on page 81 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope VDEVice Queries whether the connected instrument is supported by the 2 GHz bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B2000 For details see the 2 GHz bandwidth extension basics chapter in the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual Return values State ON 1 Instrument is supported OFF 0 Instrument is not supported Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC VDEV Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope VFIRmware Queries whether the firmware on the connected oscilloscope is supported by the 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 option Return values lt State gt ON 1 Firmware is supported OFF 0 Firmware is not supported Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC VFIR Usage Query only TRIGger SEQuence OSCilloscope COUPling lt CoupType gt Configures the
59. Remote command SENSe PHETer p TRIGger HOLDoff on page 226 Drop Out Time Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again Slope Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command SENSe PHETer p TRIGger SLOPe on page 227 Amplitude The amplitude is configured in the Amplitude tab of the Input Frontend dialog box Amplitude settings are identical to the base unit For background information on amplitude settings see the R amp S FSW User Manual gt To display this dialog box do one of the following e Selectthe Input Frontend button in the Analog Demodulation Overview and Switch to the Amplitude tab e Select the AMPT key and then the Amplitude Config softkey Amplitude settings for input from the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B71 are described in chapter 5 3 3 2 Amplitude Settings for Analog Baseband Input on page 93 Amplitude Settings for RF Input Amplitude settings can be configured via the AMPT key or in the Amplitude dialog box To display the Amplitude dialog box do one of the following Select Amplitude from the Overview e Select the AMPT key and then the Amplitude Config softkey Input and Frontend Settings The remote commands required to define these
60. Source Frequency Coupling on page 76 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor DENominator Value This command defines the denominator of the factor with which the analyzer frequency is multiplied in order to obtain the transmit frequency of the selected generator Select the multiplication factor such that the frequency range of the generator is not exceeded if the following formula is applied to the start and stop frequency of the ana lyzer Numerator Offset Denominator Source Freq RF Parameters Value numeric value RST 1 Example SOUR EXT FREQ NUM 4 SOUR EXT FREQ DEN 3 Sets a multiplication factor of 4 3 i e the transmit frequency of the generator is 4 3 times the analyzer frequency Manual operation See Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Offset on page 76 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor NUMerator Value This command defines the numerator of the factor with which the analyzer frequency is multiplied in order to obtain the transmit frequency of the selected generator Select the multiplication factor such that the frequency range of the generator is not exceeded if the following formula is applied to the start and stop frequency of the ana lyzer Numerator Source Freq RF Offset Denominator Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt Value gt lt numeric value gt RST 1 Example SOUR EXT FREQ NUM 4
61. TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME lt Offset gt Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep Parameters lt Offset gt RST Os Example TRIG HOLD 500us Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 102 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff lt Period gt This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event Note that this command can be used for any trigger source not just IF Power despite the legacy keyword Note If you perform gated measurements in combination with the IF Power trigger the R amp S FSW ignores the holding time for frequency sweep FFT sweep zero span and l Q data measurements Parameters Period Range Os to 10s RST 0s Example TRIG SOUR EXT Sets an external trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 103 Configuring the Measurement TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis which is only available for IF Power trig ger sources Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range 3 dB to 50 dB RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 102 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower Level This command sets the level of the baseband power trigger This command is available for the optional Di
62. TTL connection for an R amp S SMU generator In figure 4 5 the connection for an R amp S SMW is shown User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 34 R amp S FSW K7 Measurement Basics R amp S SMW rear panel FSW B10 AUX CONTROL R amp S FSW rear panel Fig 4 5 TTL connection for an R amp S SMW generator The external generator can be used to calibrate the data source by performing either transmission or reflection measurements Transmission Measurement This measurement yields the transmission characteristics of a two port network The external generator is used as a signal source It is connected to the input connector of the DUT The input of the R amp S FSW is fed from the output of the DUT A calibration can be carried out to compensate for the effects of the test setup e g frequency response of connecting cables GEN OUTPUT DUT RF INPUT Fig 4 6 Test setup for transmission measurement Reflection Measurement Scalar reflection measurements can be carried out using a reflection coefficient mea surement bridge User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 35 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output GEN OUTPUT Bridge RF INPUT DUT Fig 4 7 Test setup for reflection measurement Generated signal input In order to use the functions of the external generator an appropriate generator must be connected and configured correctly In particular the generator output must be con nected to the RF input of the R amp S FSW
63. The number is the distance to frame 0 in seconds The range depends on the history depth Example CALC DELT4 SGR FRAM 20 Sets fourth deltamarker 20 frames below marker 1 CALC DELT4 SGR FRAM 2 s Sets fourth deltamarker 2 seconds above the position of marker 1 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements P J ae S CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam SARea lt SearchArea gt CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram SARea lt SearchArea gt This command defines the marker search area for all spectrogram markers in the mea surement channel lt n gt and lt m gt are irrelevant Parameters lt SearchArea gt VISible Performs a search within the visible frames Note that the command does not work if the spectrogram is not visible for any reason e g if the display update is off MEMory Performs a search within all frames in the memory RST VISible CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam XY MAXimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level of the spectrogram over all fre quencies Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam XY MINimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram XY MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level of
64. This command defines a threshold for relative limit lines The R amp S FSW uses the threshold for the limit check if the limit line violates the thresh old lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Threshold Numeric value The unit depends on CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UNIT on page 349 RST 200 dBm Analyzing Results Manual operation See Threshold on page 157 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt NAME lt Name gt This command selects a limit line that already exists or defines a name for a new limit line Parameters lt Name gt String containing the limit line name RST REM1 to REM8 for lines 1 to 8 Manual operation See Name on page 157 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UNIT lt Unit gt This command defines the unit of a limit line lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Unit gt If you select dB as the limit line unit the command automatically turns the limit line into a relative limit line RST DBM Manual operation See Y Axis on page 158 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer DATA lt LimitLinePoints gt This command defines the vertical definition points of an upper limit line lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt LimitLinePoints gt Variable number of level values Note that the number of vertical values has to be the same as the number of horizontal values set with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA If not the R amp S FSW either adds missing valu
65. WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe PDlVision eeeeeeeeeeeeeee ene 248 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition seen 248 DISPlay WINDow n TRAGCe t Y SPAQCing ciii eer tese sii seda aco oaa a E az dV n 248 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe Range This command defines the display range of the y axis for all traces t is irrelevant Parameters Range If the y axis shows the power the unit is dB with a range from 10 dB to 200 dB If the y axis shows the frequency the unit is Hz with a variable range RST 100 dB frequency domain 500 kHz time domain Example DISP TRAC Y 110dB Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Range on page 123 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE Automatic scaling of the y axis is performed once then switched off again for all traces t is irrelevant Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Auto Scale Once on page 123 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE Mode This command selects the type of scaling of the y axis for all traces t is irrelevant When the display update during remote control is off this command has no immediate effect Parameters Mode ABSolute absolute scaling of the y axis RELative relative scaling of the y axis RST ABSolute Example DISP TRAC Y MODE REL Manual operation See Scaling on page 1
66. both general online demodulation output see Online Demodulation Output State on page 130 and Phones Output adjust the volume setting using the rotary knob on the front panel Remote command OUTPut ADEMod ONLine PHONes on page 239 5 9 Automatic Settings Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FSW automatically according to the current measurement settings To activate the automatic adjustment of a setting select the corresponding function in the AUTO SET menu or in the configuration dialog box for the setting where available MSRA MSRT operating mode In MSRA MSRT operating mode settings related to data acquisition cannot be adjus ted for Analog Demodulation applications Automatic Settings When you select an auto adjust function a measurement is performed to determine the optimal settings If you select an auto adjust function for a triggered measurement you are asked how the R amp S FSW should behave e default The measurement for adjustment waits for the next trigger o Adjusting settings automatically during triggered measurements The measurement for adjustment is performed without waiting for a trigger The trigger source is temporarily set to Free Run After the measurement is com pleted the original trigger source is restored The trigger level is adjusted as fol lows For IF Power and RF Power triggers Trigger Level Reference Level 15 dB For Video trigger Trigger Level
67. determines the number of averaging procedures MAXHold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace mem ory only if the new value is greater than the previous one MINHold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one VIEW The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and dis played BLANk Hides the selected trace RST Trace 1 WRITe Trace 2 6 BLANk Example INIT CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE WRIT Selects clear write mode for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the measure ment Manual operation See Trace Mode on page 136 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE HCONtinuous State This command turns an automatic reset of a trace on and off after a parameter has changed The reset works for trace modes min hold max hold and average Note that the command has no effect if critical parameters like the span have been changed to avoid invalid measurement results Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt State gt ON The automatic reset is off OFF The automatic reset is on RST OFF Example DISP WIND TRAC3 MODE HCON ON Switches off the reset function Man
68. marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker vertically to the minimum level for the current fre quency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker If the marker hasn t been active yet the command first looks for the peak level in the whole spectrogram and moves the marker vertically to the minimum level Usage Event 11 8 1 4 Marker Search Settings The following commands define criteria for searches GAL GUulate sn MARKef mPEXCHUP SION 2 2er cadiz a snus Fea ac Cuv ra ak tevinaaas tenuate 330 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCursion Excursion This command defines the peak excursion for all markers in all windows m n are irrelevant The peak excursion sets the requirements for a peak to be detected during a peak search The unit depends on the measurement Application Result display Unit Spectrum dB ADEMOD RF dB ADEMOD AM PCT ADEMOD FM kHz ADEMOD PM RAD Parameters Excursion The excursion is the distance to a trace maximum that must be attained before a new maximum is recognized or the distance to a trace minimum that must be attained before a new minimum is recognized RST 5 PCT in AM displays 50 kHz in FM displays 0 5 RAD in PM displays Analyzing R
69. n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MlINimum BELoOw essen CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MlINimum NEXT sessi CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum PEAK CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram FRAMe essent ennemi CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram SARea essent nenne CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK eene 328 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram XY MINimum PEAK esee 328 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOVe CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELoOw esee 328 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT essen 329 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum PEAK eene 329 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum ABOVe CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MlINimum BELoOw eese CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT essent CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum PEAK GALGulate n DELTamarkersm TRAGe rnt terere ba Rh ro tc ertt hr ie oat n Eae rh CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X GALCulate n DELTamarker m X RELative uiior torret rnnt enr rne x eeit CALCulate lt n gt DEL Tama
70. setting or the Reference Value setting Remote command UNIT lt n gt PMETer lt p gt POWer on page 225 UNIT lt n gt PMETer lt p gt POWer RATio on page 225 Meas Time Average Selects the measurement time or switches to manual averaging mode In general results are more precise with longer measurement times The following settings are recommended for different signal types to obtain stable and precise results Short Stationary signals with high power gt 40dBm because they require only a short measurement time and short measurement time provides the highest repetition rates Normal Signals with lower power or modulated signals Long Signals at the lower end of the measurement range lt 50 dBm or Signals with lower power to minimize the influence of noise Manual Manual averaging mode The average count is set with the Average Count Number of Readings setting Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe on page 222 SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe AVERage STATe on page 223 Setting the Reference Level from the Measurement Meas gt Ref Sets the currently measured power as a reference value for the relative display The reference value can also be set manually via the Reference Value setting Remote command CALCulate n PMETer p RELative MAGNitude AUTO ONCE on page 220 Reference Value Defines the reference value for relative measurements in the unit dBm Remote command CALCulate n PM
71. 0 Querying boolean parameters When you query boolean parameters the system returns either the value 1 ON or the value 0 OFF Example Setting DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe ON Query DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe would return 1 Common Suffixes 11 1 6 3 Character Data Character data follows the syntactic rules of keywords You can enter text using a short or a long form For more information see chapter 11 1 2 Long and Short Form on page 178 Querying text parameters When you query text parameters the system returns its short form Example Setting SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE NORMal Query SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE would return NORM 11 1 6 4 Character Strings Strings are alphanumeric characters They have to be in straight quotation marks You can use a single quotation mark or a double quotation mark Example INSTRument DELete Spectrum 11 1 6 5 Block Data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 follow ing digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the trans mission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted 0 specifies a data block of indefinite lengt
72. 114 AF start Demodulation spectrum sisisi 114 AF stop Demodulation spectrum scissionisti 115 figlio iC 27 28 Alignment PAUUO 81 Al Functions Off meer rns 153 AM Offline ll cM E M 101 AM Spectrum Evaluation Method cresien tiarna 16 AM Time Domain EValUAation Method ec rer rare ene 13 Amplitude Analog Baseband Interface B71 settings 93 Configuration Softkey fe uj Analog Baseband Amiplit de settings erae rcr ner 93 eot e 55 Input settings cr or eren nene eene 69 Analog Baseband B71 Full scale level cont rtr rennes 95 VO MOJE m 69 Input type remote control eessesss 209 Analog Baseband connector RANU C 31 Analog Baseband Interface B71 Amplitude Settings enpirismoa 93 NputSettNJS 2 retener erre nre 69 Analog Demodulation Measurement examples sisirin 169 9 or m i eate 130 Output settings riot rtr 129 Analysis Marker functions n creme 149 Remote control 914 Eo E X 135 Analysis interval Configuration MSRA remote 359 361 MSRA MSRT 5 iacere cerns ce 105 249 ANALYSIS ING Configuration Configuration MSRA remote 359 361 APX External generator 5n ies 39 44
73. 86 F ro M 85 Preamplifier i re M 92 SOfIKGy eene exe et e Poen eren 92 Preset Bands External Mixer remote control 194 External MIXet eie terret ertet 58 Presetting elo 52 Pretriggel ccm periere i Pee eene eene 102 Probes MICFODULtOEI 22e nenne rti neun 72 iure re Erea 71 Programming examples External MIXGE cernit rre 202 Stalisti6S 35 ridet eee sie cerea terea os 354 356 Protection RF INDU op M 30 RE inp t remole 2 teda ette tte 188 Q Quick Config MACE Se io tee mt eee oec mee n eden 138 R R amp S DiglGOhf etit eite e p e edendi cen 68 R amp S EX IQ BOX DIGIGOIN iei 68 R amp S SMA External generator i ent tee emn co eias 36 R amp S SMW Ext rinal generator uisi cai none xcii een 36 Range T SCAN seks sus PET RBW M A Displayed Remote Contiol 2 5 caccia as aaisen 251 Recalling Calibration settings external generator 78 Reference Reference frequency External generator 2 eese 36 74 Reference level 12 2 x cle 89 93 Auto level 90 95 133 Digital QE ss oerte ev chere re a Pero Synt 68 Displayed 2411 External generator icit tentent t ree 40 OffSet eee 90 94 Offset Power sensor 87 Offset displayed zd Position 123 POWE
74. AQT see Measurement time rre terne 11 ASCII trace export ES AttenuatiOM M puro P Displayed l Teiroro e Mana EI Option ProtecliVe nre rene eerte ree Protective remote 255r cci 188 Audio demodulation Volume remote control eese 240 Audio frequency SOGIAP ecu 13 Auto adjustment Triggered measurermient cnet 282 Auto all ge Auto frequehy virare error tenere rre 132 Auto ID External MIX6t eir etr eren 60 External Mixer Remote control 192 Threshold External Mixer remote control 193 Threshold External Mixer esses 60 Auto level VEI Reference level hs SOMKEY centeno nae Auto scaling Auto settings Meastime JAU LO screen ce renean zinc Meastime Manual sessseeseseernnenes 133 Automatic coupling Frequencies external generator 42 76 AUX control TTL synchronization external generator 33 Average COUNT 2 cisci tie recae xev tee euet Pci da 109 138 Power SeFSOE 1 n n ein tere ra succes AE esa aes 87 Average mode Hr c 137 Averaging Traces remote control pessier 289 B B2000 Activating Deactivating
75. Binary File on page 373 The following data types are allowed int8 8 bit signed integer data int16 16 bit signed integer data int32 32 bit signed integer data float32 32 bit floating point data IEEE 754 float64 64 bit floating point data IEEE 754 ScalingFactor Optional describes how the binary data can be transformed into values in the unit Volt The binary I Q data itself has no unit To get an I Q sample in the unit Volt the saved samples have to be multiplied by the value of the ScalingFactor For polar data only the magnitude value has to be multiplied For multi channel signals the ScalingFactor must be applied to all channels The attribute unit must be set to v The ScalingFactor must be gt 0 If the ScalingFactor element is not defined a value of 1 V is assumed NumberOfChan nels Optional specifies the number of channels e g of a MIMO signal contained in the I Q data binary file For multi channels the I DQ samples of the channels are expected to be interleaved within the I Q data file see chapter A 2 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 373 If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is assumed DataFilename Contains the filename of the I Q data binary file that is part of the iq tar file It is recommended that the filename uses the following convention lt xyz gt lt Format gt lt Channels gt ch lt Type gt e xyz a valid Windows file name e
76. CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks LIST SIZE on page 338 Peak Excursion Defines the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it will be identified as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions Entries from 0 dB to 80 dB are allowed the resolution is 0 1 dB The default setting for the peak excursion is 6 dB Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCursion on page 330 Displaying Marker Numbers By default the marker numbers are indicated in the diagram so you can find the peaks from the list However for large numbers of peaks the marker numbers may decrease readability in this case deactivate the marker number display Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks ANNotation LABel STATe on page 337 Exporting the Peak List The peak list can be exported to an ASCII file DAT for analysis in an external appli cation Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt PEAK on page 339 FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 307 6 3 4 3 ndB Down Marker Access Overview gt Analysis gt Marker Functions gt n dB down gt n dB Down Config Access Overview gt Analysis gt Marker Functions gt n dB down gt n dB down Config or MKR FUNC gt Select Marker Function gt n dB down gt n dB down Config A special marker can be defined to determine a characteristic bandwidth or time span in a measured signal 6 3 4 4
77. E EEE E E 130 AC Cutoff ErequeriGy ue EE ert eddie eh nea ie ieee a 130 Phones OOUE eM MR 131 Output Settings Online Demodulation Output State Enables or disables online demodulation output If enabled the demodulated audio fre quencies are output to the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW Optionally you can output the demodulated signal to the PHONES connector on the front panel see Phones Output on page 131 Remote command OUTPut ADEMod ONLine STATe on page 238 SYSTem SPEaker VOLume on page 240 Output Selection Selects the result display whose results are output Only time domain results can be selected All currently active time domain result displays are listed Current Focus dynamically switches to the currently selected window Thus you can easily change the output signal simply by selecting the windows in the display If a win dow is selected that does not contain a time domain result display the selection is ignored and the previous setting is maintained The result display currently used for output is indicated by a Demod Out label in the window title bar Remote command OUTPut ADEMod ONLine SOURce on page 239 AF Coupling Controls the automatic correction of the frequency offset and phase offset of the input signal This function is only available for FM or PM time domain evaluations e FM time evaluation If DC is selected the absolute frequ
78. Format complex polar or real see Format element e Channels Number of channels see NumberOfChannels element e Type float32 float64 int8 int16 int32 or int64 see DataType element Examples xyz complex 1ch float32 e xyz polar 1ch float64 e xyz eal 1ch int16 xyz complex 16ch int8 Q Data File Format iq tar Element UserData Description Optional contains user application or device specific XML data which is not part of the iq tar specification This element can be used to store additional information e g the hardware configuration User data must be valid XML content PreviewData Optional contains further XML elements that provide a preview of the I Q data The preview data is determined by the routine that saves an iq tar file e g R amp S FSW For the definition of this element refer to the RsIqTar xsd schema Note that the preview can be only displayed by current web browsers that have JavaScript enabled and if the XSLT stylesheet open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt is available Example ScalingFactor Data stored as in t16 and a desired full scale voltage of 1 V ScalingFactor 1 V maximum int16 value 1 V 215 3 0517578125e 5 V Scaling Factor Numerical value Numerical value x ScalingFac tor Minimum negative int16 value 215 32768 1V Maximum positive int16 value 215 1 32767 0 999969482421875 V Example Pre
79. IMMediate The current measurement results are used to calculate the FM offset AVERage The measurement results that were averaged over the given number of measurements are used to calculate the FM offset If no average measurement was active during the last measure ment sequence only the SENSe ADEMod n FM OFFSet IMMediate command will return a correct result data to calcu late the offset are taken from the last measured data set SENSe ADEMod lt n gt FM OFFSet AVERage Will cause a query error in this case Retrieving Results Example DEM SET 8MHz 32000 EXT POS 500 30 ets up demodulator parameters to execute 30 measurements DEM FM AVER OFF OFF elects FM results to perform averaging NIT WAI tarts measurement and waits for sync DEM FM OFFS IMM eads FM offset of last measurement of the sequence of 30 DEM FM OFFS AVER Reads FM offset averaged over 30 measurements HNP gt ZI Usage Query only 11 7 4 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format When trace data is retrieved using the TRAC DATA or TRAC IQ DATA command the data is returned in the format defined using the FORMat DATA The possible for mats are described here e ASCII Format FORMat ASCII The data is stored as a list of comma separated values CSV of the measured val ues in floating point format e Binary Format FORMat REAL 32 The data is stored as binary da
80. INP DIQ CDEV Result 1 SMW200A 101190 BBMM 1 OUT 100000000 200000000 Passed Passed 1 1 4QNAN Manual operation See Connected Instrument on page 68 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer AUTO State If enabled the digital input full scale level is automatically set to the value provided by the connected device if available This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband interface is installed Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 67 Configuring the Measurement INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling lt State gt If enabled the reference level for digital input is adjusted to the full scale level automat ically if the full scale level changes This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level on page 68 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer lt Level gt Defines or queries the Full Scale Level i e the level that corresponds to an I Q sam ple with the magnitude 1 This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters lt Level gt lt numeric value gt Range 1 UV to 7 071 V RST 1V Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 67 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT Unit Defines the unit of the full scale level see Full Scale Level on page 67 The availa
81. MIX HARM LOW 6 SENS MIX LOSS LOW 20dB SENS MIX HARM HIGH 8 SENS MIX LOSS HIGH 30dB Configuring the Measurement fees Activating automatic signal identification functions Activate both automatic signal identification functions SENS MIX SIGN ALL Use auto ID threshold of 8 dB SENS MIX THR 8dB Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a basic frequency sweep and wait until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Return the trace data for the input signal without distortions default screen configuration TRAC DATA TRACE3 Configuring a conversion loss table for a user defined band i a aa aa a Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Activate the use of the connected external mixer SENS MIX ON 53e c22scsc 2 t Configuring a new conversion loss table Define cvl table for range 1 of band as described in previous example extended V band SENS CORR CVL SEL UserTable SENS CORR CVL COMM User defined conversion loss table for USER band SENS CO SENS CO R RR CVL BAND USER R SENS COR R R R CVL HARM 6 CVL BIAS 1mA SENS CO SENS CO SENS CO CVL MIX FS Z260 CVL SNUM 123 4567 R CVL PORT 3 DH DH HD HF N Conversion loss is linear from 55 GHz to 75 GHz SENS CORR CVL DATA 55GHZ 20DB 75GHZ 30DB al Configuring the mixer and band settings Use user defined band and assign new cvl
82. Market to Trae roit e c dietas 143 Markers Assigned trace er er re deeds 143 Basic settifigs 2 rte erre retten 141 Configuration 141 143 Configuration remote control ssss 315 DGACHIVALING eere ennt re en tnn 143 Delta MAPK lS ncn ties 142 Fixed reference remote control 321 334 Function configuration rne 148 Linked in AF spectrum display Linked in time domain linking cbe MINIMUM cio ota Minimum remote control n dB down ues n dB down remote control 940 Next minimum 148 Next minimum remote control eGo Next peak rrt t ta rer Eee 147 Next peak remote control 3 991 NO SE 148 aTe EE EE A tentes cde sep r d ecue de edite 147 Peak remote control 991 Peak list remote control 936 Phase noise measurement we 149 Phase noise measurement remote control 343 POSIIOM secon ducehes sel oh darani Sis we 142 Positioning 146 Positioning remote control 225915 Querying position remote 917 Remote control 1 915 Search settings remote 330 Setting up remote control Spectrograms remote control State Step SIZE sects 2 c we 144 Step size remote control
83. Measurement lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Time gt 0 s to measurement time RST 0s Example ADEM PM RPO 500us Sets the position where the phase to 0 rad setting to 500 us Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Zero Phase Reference Position PM Time Domain only on page 113 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SQuelch STATe State This command activates the squelch function i e if the signal falls below a defined threshold see SENSe AbEMod n 8QUelch LEVel on page 266 the demodu lated data is automatically set to 0 lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example DEM SQU ON Signals below the level threshold are squelched Manual operation See Squelch State on page 111 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SQuelch LEVel Threshold This command defines the level threshold below which the demodulated data is set to 0 if squelching is enabled see SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SQUelch STATe on page 266 lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Threshold gt numeric value The absolute threshold level Range 150 dBm to 30 dBm RST 40 dBm Example DEM SQU LEV 80 If the signal drops below 80 dBm the demodulated data is set to 0 Manual operation See Squelch Level on page 112 Configuring the Measurement 11 4 8 2 Time Domain Zoom Settings Using the time domain zoom the demodulated data for a particular time span is extrac ted and dis
84. Measurement SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PM TDOMain TYPE SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PM AFSPectrum TYPE SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SPECtrum TYPE lt TraceMode1 gt lt TraceMode2 gt lt TraceMode3 gt lt TraceMode4 gt lt TraceMode5S gt lt TraceMode6 gt This command selects the trace modes of the evaluated signal to be measured simul taneously For each of the six available traces a mode can be defined The trace modes are configured identically for all windows with a specific evaluation lt n gt is irrelevant The following table indicates which command syntax refers to which evaluation method Command syntax Evaluation method AMEABSolute TDOMain RF time domain AM RELative TDOMain AM time domain AM RELative AFSPectrum AM spectrum SPECtrum FM TDOMain FM time domain FM AFSPectrum FM spectrum PM TDOMain PM time domain PM AFSPectrum PM spectrum RF spectrum Note The trace modes for each trace and each window can also be configured individ ually using the DISP TRAC MODE command see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 284 Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt TraceMode gt WRITe Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting AVERage The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Average Count determines the number of averag ing procedures MAXHold The maximum value is
85. NEW ADEM FMDemodulation Activate an Analog Demodulation measurement channel named FMDemodulation ADEM MTIM ims Set the measurement time to 1 ms 10 periods SENS ADJ SCAL Y AUTO ON Optimize the scaling of the y axis for the current measurement continuously BAND DEM 400 kHz Set the demodulation bandwidth to 400 kHz TRIG SOUR FM Use offline FM trigger TRIG LEV FM 500MHz Trigger when signal reaches 500 MHz LAY ADD WIND 1 BEL XTIM FM AFSP Add an FM Spectrum result display below FM Time Domain ADEM FM AFSP WRIT AVER OFF OFF OFF OFF Defines two traces in the FM Spectrum 1 Clear write 2 average Programming Example ADEM SET 8MHz 32000 FM POS 500 30 Set analog demodulator to execute 30 sweeps with 32000 samples each at a sample rate of 8 MHz use FM trigger trigger on positive slope with a pretrigger offset of 500 samples INIT CONT OFF Stop continuous sweep INIT WAI Start a new measurement with 30 sweeps and wait for the end CALC MARK FUNC ADEM CARR Queries the carrier power Result 10 37 dBm CALC2 MARK FUNC ADEM SIN RES Queries the signal to noise and distortion ratio from the FM Spectrum Result 65 026 dB CALC2 MARK FUNC ADEM THD RES Queries the total harmonic distortion of the demodulated signal from the FM Spectrum Result 66 413 dB CALC MARK FUNC ADEM FERR Queries the FM carrier offset frequency err
86. Next trace in same window Data section for individual window Window 2 Data section for individual trace Name of next window Trace 1 First trace 11 8 Analyzing Results The following remote commands are required to configure general result analysis set tings concerning the trace markers lines etc in a remote environment They are iden tical to the analysis functions in the base unit except for some special marker functions and spectrograms which are not available in the Analog Demodulation application More details are described for manual operation in chapter 6 Analysis on page 135 11 8 1 11 8 1 1 Analyzing Results e Working with Markers Remotely ici scenes era direi dd ea 315 e JDefbigbimit CIIBGKS ceret Ern rna E e Rs 344 e ZOOMING into the DISPLAY eeu cere retta ten ente kkne rtp Ie E En sn te ERE nara duca 357 e Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only 359 e Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRT mode only 361 Working with Markers Remotely In the Analog Demodulation application up to 16 markers or delta markers can be acti vated for each window simultaneously More details are described for manual operation in chapter 6 3 4 Marker Function Configuration on page 148 e Seting Up Individual MarKers cocer ii nor ed ever et p d erc 315 e General Marker Seluhgs ue e re E e
87. Other windows are still active in the background SMALI Reduces the size of the selected window to its original size If more than one measurement window was displayed originally these are visible again RST SMALI Example DISP WIND2 LARG 11 6 2 Working with Windows in the Display The following commands are required to change the evaluation type and rearrange the screen layout for a measurement channel as you do using the SmartGrid in manual operation Since the available evaluation types depend on the selected application some parameters for the following commands also depend on the selected measure ment channel Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect on page 185 LAYOouUtADDEMWINDONW acne euentu vacate tenebo etia rea pe Eo Rue Er aa adriana 298 LA Y oUEGATalog WIN DOW ccn ei eoa ce cena tet dre tc e re re Eva 299 LAYoutTIDENty WINBOW 1i ioi o eaae ta eot ee t abeo eet dide pu EA Ore yv EP opc Naa 299 LAYouEREMoveD WINDOW irren ntur rho nt ean retiro heces trek a a Ea 300 LAYout REPLace WINDOwW eeeeeeeenen enne enne i aiaiai ene aAa reir nins 300 LAYOUTS PIM e M PR 300 LAY cut WINDOW SAP ADD iiia a M tue Ex ERR ERRARE E xa Ea 302 LAYoutWINDow n IDEMtify 12 ucc ceret raptae kn pna mace iaaii 302 LAY out WINDOWS REMOVE ccc tiit root tt er reti d entl
88. PEAK on page 334 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt on page 334 Remote commands exclusive to spectrogram markers CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam FRAMG cccccececeeeeeeeecaeaeaeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeseeeeeeeees 327 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram FRAMe sss eene 327 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam SARG8Q ececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaeaeaaaeaeeeenenenenes 328 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram SAReoa seen 328 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam XY MAXimum PEAK eeeeeeeseeeenee 328 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK cesses 328 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam XY MINimum PEAK eeeeeeeeeeeenne 328 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram XY MlINimum PEAK esusss 328 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum ABOWVe sse 328 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOWVe sees 328 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum BELOw eeeeeeeeeeeee 328 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELOW eene 328 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum NEXT cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeneneeeees 329 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT essen 329 CALOCulate
89. POE 228 11 4 2 1 RF Input INPUEATTenuaton PROTeclion RESGL iit creta acs Dora ce eodd eet coercet sepan cue 188 INPUtEGCONNOGGIOR 2 torti rni Ree eoe ede e Nee i cec ra E pa o dDas ERN gern aiaa 188 UPC OPIS EE 188 PNP UE DP Wise 189 INPut FIE Tei HPASSESTATe iore cai naa a teet eie rez a anenai nane 189 I Put FIETer VIO STATE scis tuer ro aE xu rote Ebo ano etes ren 189 INieut I MISSBA ROB ccce diccre ase ec suce sunt shuddnccasganend irte o a aa AA E NOI Er alea La aeaa 190 des ie mic TC 190 Configuring the Measurement INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet This command resets the attenuator and reconnects the RF input with the input mixer after an overload condition occured and the protection mechanism intervened The error status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register and the INPUT OVLD message in the status bar are cleared For details on the status register see the R amp S FSW User Manual The command works only if the overload condition has been eliminated first Usage Event INPut CONNector lt ConnType gt Determines whether the RF input data is taken from the RF input connector or the optional Analog Baseband connector This command is only available if the Analog Baseband interface R amp S FSW B71 is installed and active for input It is not available for the R amp S FSW67 or R amp S FSW85 For more in
90. Parameters lt Attenuation gt attenuation in dB Range see data sheet Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB OFF Example INP EATT AUTO OFF INP EATT 10 dB Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 91 INPut EATT AUTO State This command turns automatic selection of the electronic attenuation on and off If on electronic attenuation reduces the mechanical attenuation whenever possible This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option It is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active Parameters State 110 ON OFF 1 ON 0 OFF RST 1 Example INP EATT AUTO OFF Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 91 INPut EATT STATe State This command turns the electronic attenuator on and off This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option It is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active Parameters State 110 ON OFF 1 ON 0 OFF RST 0 Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 91 Configuring the Measurement 11 4 5 3 Configuring a Preamplifier hgnse Bap m MR 246 INiPut GAIN VAL nisi cx dette se ce tree eerta da tod oda cene teer vu aa exu darn 246 INPut GAIN STATe State This command turns the preamplifier on a
91. Q parameter XML file The XML elements and attrib utes are explained in the following sections Sample I Q parameter XML file xyz xml lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt xml stylesheet type text xsl href open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt RS IQ TAR FileFormat fileFormatVersion 1 xsi noNamespaceSchemaLocation RsIqTar xsd xmlns xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance lt Name gt FSV K10 lt Name gt lt Comment gt Here is a comment lt Comment gt lt DateTime gt 2011 01 24T14 02 49 lt DateTime gt lt Samples gt 68751 lt Samples gt lt Clock unit Hz gt 6 5e 006 lt Clock gt lt Format gt complex lt Format gt lt DataType gt float32 lt DataType gt lt ScalingFactor unit V gt 1 lt ScalingFactor gt lt NumberOfChannels gt 1 lt NumberOfChannels gt DataFilename xyz complex float32 DataFilename lt UserData gt lt UserDefinedElement gt Example lt UserDefinedElement gt lt UserData gt lt PreviewData gt lt PreviewData gt lt RS_IQ TAR FileFormat gt Element Description RS IQ TAR File The root element of the XML file It must contain the attribute ileFormatVersion Format that contains the number of the file format definition Currently fileFormatVersion 2 is used Name Optional describes the device or application that created the file Comment Optional contains text that further describes the contents of the file DateTime Contain
92. RF SHEUN iumenta rre net 115 Scaling 116 120 Settings six 110 SDOCIFUIi iieri nr nette 114 Spectrum Result Summary 237115 Units ito orc eee Heer tree 124 Demodulation bandwidth 106 116 COMGIONS ED 26 Deemphasis filter 2 119 Displayed cbs orania eraa andanan iis 11 MAKI o REPRE e ce a re etre mean 27 Remote control wu 252 Troubleshooting 5 2 metti cetaeteavetedineesstes 175 Denominator Frequencies external generator 42 76 Detectors Relative demodulation sssussssss 279 Relative demodulation remote 278 Remote control uuss 278 289 lici P 137 Dev per division elo n 120 Deviation Scaling eer Diagram footer information Differential input Analog Baseband B71 remote control Analog Baseband B71 see DiglConf see also RES DiglGont reet is 68 Digital Baseband Interface Input settings treten Input status remote Digital 1 Q Enhanced mode eere eene tne Input connection information Input settings us Bere gn EEE E A T Digital input Gonnection information 2 rtt rt 68 Digital standards Configuration VSA measurements Direct path Input config ratior iir rer rts 54 REMOTE eet ei a ee decr dudes 189 Display configuration SOMKCY 2
93. Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 281 Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual This function allows you to change the measurement duration for automatic setting adjustments Enter the value in seconds Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE on page 281 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 281 Upper Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last mea surement before the reference level is adapted automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer on page 282 Lower Level Hysteresis When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the Auto Level function the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last mea surement before the reference level is adapted automatically Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer on page 282 Automatic Settings AF Auto Scale Activates automatic scaling of
94. Restoring predefined standard files The standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of delivery can be restored using the Restore Stand ards function see Restore Standard Files on page 50 Restore Standard Files Setup Standard Restores the standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of deliv ery Note that this function will overwrite customized standards that have the same name as predefined standards Remote command SENSe ADEMod n PRESet RESTore on page 187 5 2 Configuration Overview Throughout the measurement configuration an overview of the most important cur rently defined settings is provided in the Overview The Overview is displayed when you select the Overview icon which is available at the bottom of all softkey menus Overview Configuration Overview Xm Analog Demod Input Ref Level Level Offset Trigger Out In addition to the main measurement settings the Overview provides quick access to the main settings dialog boxes Thus you can easily configure an entire Analog Demodulation measurement channel from input over processing to output and analysis by stepping through the dialog boxes as indicated in the Overview In particular the Overview provides quick access to the following configuration dialog boxes listed in the recommended order of processing 1 Input Frontend See chapter 5 3 Input and Frontend Setting
95. SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA mode not for the MSRA Master It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements Parameters lt Offset gt This parameter defines the time offset between the capture buf fer start and the start of the extracted application data The off set must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is contained in the capture buffer Range 0 to lt Record length gt RST 0 Manual operation See Capture Offset on page 107 Analyzing Results 11 8 5 Configuring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRT mode only In MSRT operating mode only the MSRT Master actually captures data the MSRT applications define an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the analysis interval The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRT applica tions For the Analog Demodulation application the commands to define tha analysis interval are the same as those used to define the actual data acquisition see chapter 11 4 6 Configuring Data Acquisition on page 249 Be sure to select the correct measure ment channel before executing these commands In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the analysis interval for the Analog Demodulation measurement Useful commands related to MSRT mode described elsewhere INITiate lt n gt REF
96. Setup Access Overview gt Analysis gt Marker gt Markers or Marker gt Markers tab In the Analog Demodulation application up to 17 markers or delta markers can be acti vated for each window simultaneously Markers Marker Settings Search Settings ef Selected Stimulus r Trace a 20 0 MHz mm g 3 696 MHz 73 317 MHz JOH B S g The markers are distributed among 3 tabs for a better overview By default the first marker is defined as a normal marker whereas all others are defined as delta markers with reference to the first marker All markers are assigned to trace 1 but only the first marker is active Selected A e aie E iet ie rer ieee dern e e edax 142 IET TESTI EE TROC CRI DOT N e SEE 142 Marker Postion X valuQ uc occae tine epe ete teret etc eet vo sedeo eda 142 EI cuo 142 Reference MARKO voice order teneo e Coetu enin eo e RE Pes ene cau sue oe Exe One pue re Rec A Ta D e TRUE RUEEEEN 142 Working with Markers in the R amp S FSW Analog Demodulation application Linking to Another MAKO a uade dre etes Pre rto adel a dante 143 Assigning the Mark r to a TEBGB cioe rie ror ER e E RARO RE 143 Pius M E 143 Selected Marker Marker name The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange Remote command Marker selected via suffix m in remote commands Marker State Activates or deactivates the mark
97. Table Edit Table or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Conversion Loss Table New Table Edit Table Conversion loss tables can be newly defined and edited A preview pane displays the current configuration of the conversion loss function as described by the position value entries File Name USERTABLE Comment User defined conversion loss table for USER band Band Settings Band USER Mixer Name FS Z60 Harmonic o 0 LE S N 123 4567 Value Position 55 00000000000 GHz 20 00 dB y 75 00000000000 GHz 30 00 dB N 54 00 GHz 76 00 GHz Input and Frontend Settings PIG NaM dc oid e e irt i rd dura eda c Deere De tet ba et n cates ra Da vase 64 H sS ETE 64 BIN MUT EDT 64 Hatmonie Edel oe cree reta tnb cbe e cec re tet e t a c d Y d 64 Lr rc T o EMT 65 Mixer INGUIN GS si ica ree terre a rra trek a creo da d E era Y FE S SE EVE ER ANAE 65 PR d ERIT s 65 DM 65 Foston ale onnaa aa a a 65 ARE I E E A A AE IIE ET A E A ETE 66 BUTTER ENERO an a a aa e aiaa 66 ISP SERI UI a IU 66 IMIG E E rot nie ren f d te v cu utn er E ER se uat und me 66 ON EMPEDOCLES 66 File Name Defines the name under which the table is stored in the C r_s instr user cvl directory on the instrument The name of the table is identical with the name of the file with
98. The results for any other applications remain unchanged The application channel must be selected before this command can be executed see INSTrument SELect on page 185 The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler NIT CONT OFF witches to single sweep mode NIT WAI tarts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the weep NST SEL IQ ANALYZER elects the IQ Analyzer channel NIT REFR Refreshes the display for the I Q Analyzer channel Q0 nutu H n H Usage Event Manual operation See Refresh MSRA MSRT only on page 109 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt This command stops the currently active sequence of measurements The Sequencer itself is not deactivated so you can start a new sequence immediately using INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate on page 294 To deactivate the Sequencer use SYSTem SEQuencer on page 295 Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Usage Event INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate This command starts a new sequence of measurements by the Sequencer Its effect is similar to the INITiate lt n gt IMMediate command used for a single measurement Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 295 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode
99. Trigger Offset Upper Level Hysteresis nene 133 Sort mode Peak drj M 151 Source offset External Generator treni tee 75 Source power External Jenerator rers 75 Span is Bisplayed om rre tret reed torte 12 Manual T tenes 116 Speaker Remote Control is uie rete eiga 240 Specifics for GOMIQUIATION ceri etri t e mee tree Eee 52 Spectrograms Markers remote control sess 323 Spectrum De rmodu lati m scriutas iuas sia eda 114 Squelch E E E E E E ENS 111 LOVEl E 4 112 Remote control 24200 SIal8 1 tuc rac Erbe EG edito Het mats 111 Standards Predefined cuo ibt e stu ie Presetting see Digital standards Statistics Programming example osiris idiei 354 356 Status bar Error messages external generator 44 Status registers STAT QUESPOW tlie esset rer derent 188 Step size Markos tuit ente eo e ed es dea Markers remote control Storage location Secure USEF mode 2 ore erts 49 Settings Suffixes COMMON cias eet ite S cds Remote commands Sweep Aborting Count Points Settings Sweep points Displayed 2 tret rr ner eben 12 Sweeps Performing remote Reverse external generator T TCP IP Address External generator sesssss 74 Externalgenerator voient beer ec onte cidem 73 TH
100. UNIT oir rp inepta enki ra Fee ee mun EINE nn Rer E Ei nE E EEEa ENE INPULEDIQES yup EEN E H INPOC DIQ SRATS gro E Ha INPut DPATh ls zio aro gu o INPUTIEATTAUT O s c INPUEEATTISTATG crociera heit aee neos d exper et pc eI AE EER YE PEOR EENE TRA EFE STR reU E S NEUREA INPubEIETeC HPASSES ATO t yer aaa Cep eed ppt e e OR TN INPUUFILTerYIGESTA TC e EM NPU GAIN STAT Epas C UEG ES CE INPUutGAINEMALU s iret rene ett te ree PER ares e en arama reve geo pun hanc O INPUEI BALANCE EE INPut IQ EULESoCale AUTO usce rire te ten Eve eer aec etr xe yt eterne E ex ed pe s P a INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel MINN FU GT atest G INPUUSELCGt RT o INSTrument CREate DUPU ICAL vite siii t ceteri tee reo ttr icto o arr Sse iia ineo EISE INSTr ament CREate REPLEACO erret ertet eost EREE EN a e TESA INSTr ment CREate NEW oett her ere ntn eet ere re cee nne rep hte a INS Tr meht DELE6l G uiti tn c Ete ne d Cn cen ei Ede ree eben aa eL Rr EYE INSTrument LIST INS gau Iso aio sls i INSTr ment SELect ir terrere rrr n erre soeaeentuanisnabenevecesdeaachenerivscebevecrsiiatdaase
101. a remote environ ment e Example Configuring Limit DINGS ici ete irren eene 354 e Example Performing a Limit ClYgck cette ttes 356 Example Configuring Limit Lines This example demonstrates how to configure 2 limit lines an upper and a lower limit for a measurement in a remote environment Configuing the limit lines CALC LIM1 NAME FM1 Names limit line 1 FM1 CALC LIM1 CONT MODE ABS Selects CA CA Selects CA Selects CA CA LC LIM Defines LC LIM LC LIM LC LIM Defines LC LIM Defines Analyzing Results absolute scaling for the horizontal axis CONT 1 MHz 50MHz 100 MHz 150MHz 200MHz 5 horizontal definition points for limit line 1 UPP MODE ABS an absolute vertical scale for limit line 1 UNIT DBM the unit dBm for limit line 1 SUPP 10 25 0 5 10 5 definition points for limit line 1 UPP MARG 5dB an area of 5 dB around limit line 1 where limit check violations are still tolerated CA LO LIMI UPP SHIF LODB Shifts the limit line 1 by 10 dB CA CA Defines LC LIM1 LC LIM3 UPP OFFS 3dB an additional 3 dB offset for limit line 1 NAME FM3 Names limit line 3 FM3 CA LC LIM3 Selects CA CA CA CA CA CA CA LC LIM3 Defines Defines Defines Defines
102. also define the bias interactively while a preview of the trace with the changed setting is displayed see Bias Settings on page 61 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS on page 198 Mixer Name Specifies the name of the external mixer for which the table is to be applied This set ting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL MIXer on page 200 Mixer S N Specifies the serial number of the external mixer for which the table is to be applied The specified number is checked against the currently connected mixer number before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SNUMber on page 201 Mixer Type Specifies whether the external mixer for which the table is to be applied is a two port or three port type This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL PORTs on page 201 Position Value Each position value pair defines the correction value for conversion loss for a specific frequency The reference values must be entered in order of increasing frequencies A maximum of 50 reference values can be entered To enter a new value pair select an empty space in the Position Value table or select the Insert Value button Correction values for frequencies between the reference values are obtained
103. average over 10 sweeps is performed Range 0 to 200000 RST 0 Configuring the Measurement Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Sweep Average Count on page 109 See Average Count on page 138 SENSe AVERage lt n gt STATe lt t gt State This command turns averaging for a particular trace in a particular window on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF Usage SCPI confirmed SENSe JAVERage lt n gt TYPE lt Mode gt This command selects the trace averaging mode Parameters lt Mode gt viDeo The logarithmic power values are averaged LiNear The power values are averaged before they are converted to logarithmic values POWer The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to averaging After the averaging the data is converted back into its original unit RST ViDeo Example AVER TYPE LIN Switches to linear average calculation Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Average Mode on page 137 SENSe WINDow lt n gt DETector lt t gt FUNCtion lt Detector gt Defines the trace detector to be used for trace analysis Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps Parameters lt Detector gt APEak Autopeak NEGative Negative peak POSitive Positive peak SAMPle First value detected per trace point RMS RMS value AVERage Average RST APEak Example DET POS Sets the detector to positive peak Manual operation See
104. bility of units depends on the measurement application you are using This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters Level VOLT DBM DBPW WATT DBMV DBUV DBUA AMPere RST Volt Manual operation See Full Scale Level on page 67 INPut DIQ SRATe lt SampleRate gt This command specifies or queries the sample rate of the input signal from the optional Digital Baseband Interface see Input Sample Rate on page 67 Parameters lt SampleRate gt Range 1 Hz to 10 GHz RST 32 MHz Example INP DIQ SRAT 200 MHz Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 67 11 4 2 6 Configuring the Measurement INPut DIQ SRATe AUTO lt State gt If enabled the sample rate of the digital I Q input signal is set automatically by the con nected device This command is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Input Sample Rate on page 67 Setting up Probes Probes can be connected to the optional BASEBAND INPUT connectors if the Analog Baseband interface option R amp S FSW B71 is installed ISENS amp eTPROBESps SETupi CMOPISel 2 nte ne oett er tete rete redactae ouo 214 SENSe PROBe amp p ID PARTnu mber 1 c riore eire eate dazu co una pa dum aasia 215 SENSeJPROBe sp ID SRNumbe6t 2 ortae roro hehe rente ortae xe xe tenen gna
105. command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital I Q input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface For details see the section Interface Status Information for the optional Digital Base band Interface in the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer User Manual Return values ConnState Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected lt DeviceName gt Device ID of the connected device lt SerialNumber gt Serial number of the connected device lt PortName gt Port name used by the connected device Configuring the Measurement lt SampleRate gt Maximum or currently used sample rate of the connected device in Hz depends on the used connection protocol version indica ted by lt SampleRateType gt parameter lt MaxTransferRate gt Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz lt ConnProtState gt State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the connected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt PRBSTestState gt State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt SampleRateType gt 0 Maximum sample rate is displayed 1 Current sample rate is displayed lt FullScaleLevel gt The level in dBm that should correspond to an I Q sample with the magnitude 1 if transferred from connected device If not available 1 ONAN not a number is returned Example
106. command queries the position of the peaks on the y axis The order depends on the sort order that has been set with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant Return values lt PeakPosition gt Position of the peaks on the y axis The unit depends on the measurement Usage Query only MMEMory STORe lt n gt LIST lt FileName gt This command exports the SEM and spurious emission list evaluation to a file The file format is dat Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR LIST test Stores the current list evaluation results in the test dat file MMEMory STORe lt n gt PEAK lt FileName gt This command exports the marker peak list to a file Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occ
107. control Message Description Ext Generator GPIB Handshake Error Connection to the generator is not possible e g due to a Ext Generator TCPIP Handshake Error Ext Generator TTL Handshake Error cable damage or loose connection or wrong address Ext Generator Limits Exceeded The allowed frequency or power ranges for the generator were exceeded Reverse Sweep via min Ext Generator Fre Reverse sweep is performed frequencies are reduced to quency the minimum frequency then increased again see Reverse sweep on page 43 Ext Generator File Syntax Error Syntax error in the generator setup file see chap ter 4 7 4 3 Generator Setup Files on page 38 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output Message Description Ext Generator Command Error Missing or wrong command in the generator setup file see chapter 4 7 4 3 Generator Setup Files on page 38 Ext Generator Visa Error Error with Visa driver provided with installation very unlikely Overloading At a reference level of 10 dBm and at a external generator output level of the same value the R amp S FSW operates without overrange reserve That means the R amp S FSW is in danger of being overloaded if a signal is applied whose amplitude is higher than the reference line In this case either the message RF OVLD for overload or IF OVLD for exceeded display range clipping of the trace at t
108. coupling of the external trigger to the oscilloscope 11 4 2 4 Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt CoupType gt Coupling type DC Direct connection with 50 O termination passes both DC and AC components of the trigger signal CDLimit Direct connection with 1 MO termination passes both DC and AC components of the trigger signal AC Connection through capacitor removes unwanted DC and very low frequency components RST DC Manual operation See Coupling on page 103 Configuring Input via the Optional Analog Baseband Interface The following commands are required to control the optional Analog Baseband Inter face in a remote environment They are only available if this option is installed For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface see the R amp S FSW I Q Ana lyzer User Manual Useful commands for Analog Baseband data described elsewhere INP SEL AIQ see INPut SELect on page 190 SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 240 Commands for the Analog Baseband calibration signal are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote commands exclusive to Analog Baseband data input and output INPut IG BALancegdE STATS totae eda ur ett t rotat eerte eee entente haac 208 INPut IO F LLEscale AUTO oriente rio ioter trei tee ada Gaiaa cocus aci aiiin 209 INPURIO FULESe ale WEN CI 209 UIP IO TYPE aoc cela twee P 209 CALibrauon AQ HATImInSS TATS cti otia cta tre dn h
109. dat to the specified file and directory The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row For details on the file format see chapter 11 7 5 Reference ASCII File Export For mat on page 312 Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 306 Trace Export Configuration Export Opens the Traces dialog box to configure the trace and data export settings See chapter 6 2 Trace Data Export Configuration on page 139 7 2 How to Export and Import I Q Data I Q Export Export Opens a file selection dialog box to select an export file to which the IQ data will be stored This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process I Q data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memor
110. defined shift width as opposed to an additive offset defined for the entire limit line see X Offset on page 155 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol SHIFt on page 346 Shift y Shifts the y value of each data point vertically by the defined shift width as opposed to an additive offset defined for the entire limit line see Y Offset on page 156 Remote command CALCulate n LIMit k LOWer SHIFt on page 347 CALCulate n LIMit k UPPer SHIFt on page 350 Save Saves the currently edited limit line under the name defined in the Name field Zoom Functions Access Zoom icons in toolbar For details on the zoom functions see the R amp S FSW User Manual SINGIS ZOOM E 159 DUNG OO m A 159 Restore Original DISDIay 2 ricis redet npe e eder ee cet re ei eer e 160 X Deactivating Zoom Selection MOde ssscsccsssesssssssssecsesesesesssseeseseeseseseseseseees 160 Single Zoom R A single zoom replaces the current diagram by a new diagram which displays an enlarged extract of the trace This function can be used repetitively until the required details are visible Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 358 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA on page 357 Multiple Zoom Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode In multiple Zoom mode you can enlarge several different areas of the trace simultane ously An overview window indicates the
111. determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace mem ory only if the new value is greater than the previous one MINHold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one VIEW The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and dis played OFF Hides the selected trace RST WRITe OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Example ADEM AM AVER MAXH MINH OFF OFF OFF Determines average max hold and min hold values simultane ously for the traces 1 3 of the RF time domain evaluation ADEM AM WRIT OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Determines only the current measurement values for trace 1 ADEM AM OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Switches AM demodulation off SENSe JAVERage lt n gt COUNt lt AverageCount gt This command defines the number of sweeps that the application uses to average traces for all windows lt n gt is irrelevant In case of continuous sweep mode the application calculates the moving average over the average count In case of single sweep mode the application stops the measurement and calculates the average after the average count has been reached Parameters lt AverageCount gt If you set a average count of 0 or 1 the application performs one single sweep in single sweep mode In continuous sweep mode if the average count is set to 0 a moving
112. ec enam decree Eee EVA pe dap Ere sand Lol Ie e TS Rage ian LEBER emer ei p 126 Detector Detector type for demodulation results Peak Positive peak Peak Negative peak Peak Autopeak RMS Root mean square Remote command The detector is specified by the DETector det suffix in CONFigure RELative AM FM PM DETector det commands Mode Defines the mode with which the demodulation result is determined The modes are similar to those for the entire trace see Trace Mode on page 136 Demodulation Clear Write Overwrite mode the detector value is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FSW saves each result only if the new value is greater than the previous one Average The average result is determined over all sweeps Remote command CONFigure ADEMod RESults AM DETector det MODE on page 279 CONFigure ADEMod RESults FM DETector det MODE on page 279 CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector lt det gt MODE on page 279 State Activates relative demodulation for the selected detector If activated the demodulated result is set in relation to the Reference Value Remote command CONFigure ADEMod RESults AM DETector det STATe on page 278 CONFigure ADEMod RESults FM DETector det STATe on page 278 CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector det STATe on page 278 Refe
113. eddie up ebd usus 85 Remote control 240 Seltlngs aine rere e ennt hene e re dee der ga nn 95 Cr 116 Frequency coupling Automatic external generator ssssssss 42 External generator 41 76 Reverse sweep external generator 43 TTL synchronization external generator 43 Frequency denominator External gehetator soniri as 76 Frequency numerator External Generator 5 nnne enne 76 Frequency offset External generator nsus 42 76 Frequency range Calibration sweep external generator 42 7T Frequency converting measurements External generator Frontend Settirigs citier mre tnn einen FRQ External generator rennes 44 Full scale level Analog Baseband B71 remote control 209 Analog Baseband B71 sss 95 Digital VQ Jie tanen te ro ta 67 Digital I Q remote 4 212 213 Unit digital I Q remote eeeseseess 213 G Generator Frequencies external generator Frequency coupling external generator Frequency offset external generator Output power external generator Generator type External Generator aia co I eere rine ean 73 Generators Frequency range external generator
114. eeseeeeessess 80 Alignment i COMMECUHONS eR 81 Remote commands isisa sisian vaidai 204 Settings m ici EE Band Conversion loss table a niente 64 External MIXer ssenarini isisisi 57 58 External Mixer Remote control 194 Bandwidth Settings srs aoni ntt ettet ttes 105 BB Power Tifigger SOfIKGy i eee etse diete 100 Bias Conversion loss table sssessssssss 61 65 External MIXED 225 ietesdene re t vestre et cien an eve see 61 External Mixer Remote control 191 192 C Calibration External generato inertio rne tiner e eene External generator remote ssssssssss Normalization external generator Reference trace external generator 39 Reflection open measurement external generator 78 Reflection short measurement external generator 78 Restoring settings external generator 40 78 Storing results external generator 39 Transmission measurement external generator 78 Capture offset MSRA MSRT applications sess 107 MSRT applications REMOTE i uccisi ld ta bona na RT A Rea 360 362 Sc Mm 107 Capturing I Q data remote inneren 290 Carrier OFSET saties 22 26 xe m ET 22 CCIR filter AE fill amp rS tbe eredi 118 CCITT filter AE TIGIS xenon o onem ete
115. esdred esci od ed 147 Performance IMPROVING t 28 Performing Analog Demodulation measurement 167 Phase BIS MET 26 Deviation Scalirig noinine roit 120 B e 124 Phase noise measurement Activating Deactivating esee 150 DeactlValilig cct cete hr seven rere n s nnn 151 Marker RRemote Corttol us o ana tere ie needs 343 Phase Wrap ACUVALING ec cei eode oreet circi cadent D 113 PM Offline leid 101 PM Spectrum Evaluation method cts 2 2 ettet 18 PM Time Domain Evaluation method issie rete 15 Ports External Mixer Remote control 197 Position Limit line values 158 POWEr SENSOMS M ein 52 Activating Deactivating 84 Average count 87 Configuration 83 Configuration softkey 83 Continuous Value Update sssssssssss 85 DULY Cycl amp ere reet Ern es 87 External power trigger sssesssenesese 87 External trigger level retten 87 FREQUENCY T M 85 Frequency Coupling 2 2 ein etc 86 Measurement time riisist 86 Number of readings ssis sitiena 87 Reference level sessi 86 Reference levelloffset isineun inan 87 SEIS CAG RP 85 iuro rd 83 Trigger mode 3101 Unit SCale nitide reete doeet et petet
116. established connec tions for the other are disconnected When the second input is deactivated connec tions to the first are re established This may cause a short delay in data transfer after switching the input source External mixers are not supported in MSRA MSRT mode e Rado Frequency InpUt 2 e er exeo rear ries dr ratu bend 53 e External Mixer Settlligs iciecuiecess edente tinent enne rn Exin La ne e d enki RR ne anaa 56 Digtal Ollmput SENOS icici nasties ir ce ete bare t reto tenete nne de 66 e Analog Baseband Input Setllinijs dea te Rie te s 69 e Probe S95 2 enin dite OXIDE REDIERE ane ER XXKRUE SEQ eau Be Dae PX ened 71 e External Generator Control Settings sss 72 e Settings for 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 80 Radio Frequency Input Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Source gt Radio Frequency or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Radio Frequency The default input source for the R amp S FSW is Radio Frequency i e the signal at the RF INPUT connector of the R amp S FSW If no additional options are installed this is the only available input source Input Source Radio Frequency Input Coupling Impedance Direct Path High Pass Filter 1 to 3 GHz YIG Preselector Input Connector Radio Frequency State ssssssssssssssseseeesesesenen nennen tnn entren nnns seinen nn 54 Tgiers
117. is interpreted as BBPower for compatibility reasons IQPower Magnitude of sampled I Q data For applications that process I Q data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications Not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Inter face or the optional Analog Baseband Interface TIME Time interval BBPower Baseband power for digital input via the optional Digital Base band Interface Baseband power for digital input via the optional Digital Base band Interface or the optional Analog Baseband interface PSEN External power sensor AF AF power signal FM Example Manual operation Configuring the Measurement FM power signal AM corresponds to the RF power signal AMRelative corresponds to the AM signal PM PM power signal GPO GP1 GP2 GP3 GP4 GP5 For applications that process I Q data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications and only if the optional Digital Base band Interface is available Defines triggering of the measurement directly via the LVDS connector The parameter specifies which general purpose bit 0 to 5 will provide the trigger data The assignment of the general purpose bits used by the Digital IQ trigger to the LVDS connector pins is provided in Digital Q on page 100 RST IMMediate TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal See Using the power sensor as an external trigger on page 87 See Trigge
118. lt Level gt Power level that has been measured by a power sensor The unit is either dBm absolute measurements or dB relative measurements Usage Query only READ PMETer lt p gt This command initiates a power sensor measurement and queries the results Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Usage Query only SENSe PMETer lt p gt DCYCle STATe lt State gt This command turns the duty cycle correction on and off Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example PMET2 DCYC STAT ON Manual operation See Duty Cycle on page 87 SENSe PMETer lt p gt DCYCle VALue lt Percentage gt This command defines the duty cycle for the correction of pulse signals The power sensor uses the duty cycle in combination with the mean power to calculate the power of the pulse Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor Parameters lt Percentage gt Range 0 001 to 99 999 RST 99 999 Default unit Example PMET2 DCYC STAT ON Activates the duty cycle correction PMET2 DCYC VAL 0 5 Sets the correction value to 0 5 Configuring the Measurement Manual operation See Duty Cycle on page 87 SENSe PMETer lt p gt FREQuency lt Frequency gt This command defines the frequency of the power sensor Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Frequency gt The available value range is specified in the data sheet of the powe
119. lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude lt RefValue gt This command defines the reference value for relative measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt RefValue gt Range 200 dBm to 200 dBm RST 0 Configuring the Measurement Example CALC PMET2 REL 30 Sets the reference value for relative measurements to 30 dBm for power sensor 2 Manual operation See Reference Value on page 86 This command sets the current measurement result as the reference level for relative measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters ONCE Example CALC PMET2 REL AUTO ONCE Takes the current measurement value as reference value for rel ative measurements for power sensor 2 Usage Event Manual operation See Setting the Reference Level from the Measurement Meas gt Ref on page 86 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative STATe lt State gt This command turns relative power sensor measurements on and off Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC PMET2 REL STAT ON Activates the relative display of the measured value for power sensor 2 FETCh PMETer lt p gt This command queries the results of power sensor measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Configuring the Measurement Return values
120. m gt MAXimum RIGHt on page 332 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 331 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum NEXT on page 333 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum RIGHt on page 333 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum LEFT on page 333 I Search Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the minimum of the trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK on page 332 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum PEAK on page 334 6 3 3 6 3 4 Working with Markers in the R amp S FSW Analog Demodulation application Search Next Minimum Sets the selected marker delta marker to the next higher minimum of the selected trace If no marker is active marker 1 is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 332 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT on page 332 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt on page 332 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum NEXT on page 334 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum LEFT on page 333 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum RIGHt on page 334 Measuring Phase Noise Access Overview Analysis Marker Functions Phase Noise or MKR FUNC gt Select Marker Function gt Phase Noise Phase noise is unintentional modulation of a carrier it creates frequencies next to the
121. measurement The spectrum of the modulated signal to be evaluated is determined by the demodulation bandwidth However it can be restricted to a limited span AF Span if only part of the signal is of interest Furthermore the time base for evaluations in the time domain can be restricted to analyze a smaller extract in more detail see chapter 4 6 Time Domain Zoom on page 29 AM MME BOMA 2 cedar eee oa tk uma eaa Sato CR Nonne en TEEER ee HE Coi neret un lr a Tet gn it e rer Ru aas 13 EM TIO DOMA ucciso rn doctr ee tet ei ere e ete ae e ve oaa e c e dod 14 PM HNEDOM eese EP a a 15 AM SOC TUM c S a 16 EM PEC a E E PUR dE RR wwe vada ease PUR Tue esas taunts 17 PIM SpOCI a ente cer deett bec ep toc ee det v nra to ee tiec ee dio e aoreet 18 RF Time Domai aranin ITLLLILMEIMT 19 BRP cg E 20 Rasull SUMMI ntc trt certet O t qc ad qu oc ttd epo td 21 ISI As IM E Is ett 22 Marker Peak isl iret ceret E IR NT E Same TER EE OU eT VERE TS a TRNUE 23 AM Time Domain Displays the modulation depth of the demodulated AM signal in versus time R amp S FSW K7 Measurements and Result Displays CF 100 0 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIM AM REL See on page 298 FM Time Domain Displays the frequency spectrum of the demodulated FM signal versus time User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 14 R amp S FSW K7 Measurements and Result Displays CF 100 0 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIM FM See on page 298
122. n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK cesse 329 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum PEAK eeessssss 329 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MINimum ABOWVe eeesesseeenen 329 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINiMUM ABOV6 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 329 CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MlINimum BELOW eese 329 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELOwW nenne 329 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MlNimum NEXT sseseseeeenennennnenn 329 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT eese 329 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MlINimum PEAK eeeeeeeeeeeee 330 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum PEAK 22 eceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 330 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam FRAMe Frame Time CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram FRAMe Frame Time This command positions a delta marker on a particular frame The frame is relative to the position of marker 1 The command is available for the spectrogram Parameters Frame Selects a frame directly by the frame number Valid if the time stamp is off The range depends on the history depth Time Selects a frame via its time stamp Valid if the time stamp is on
123. n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Mode gt ABSolute Limit line is defined by absolute physical values Hz or s RELative Limit line is defined by relative values related to the center fre quency frequency domain or the left diagram border time domain RST ABSolute CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol OFFSet Offset This command defines an offset for a complete limit line Analyzing Results Compared to shifting the limit line an offset does not actually change the limit line defi nition points lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Offset gt Numeric value The unit depends on the scale of the x axis RST 0 Manual operation See X Offset on page 155 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol SHIFt lt Distance gt This command moves a complete limit line horizontally Compared to defining an offset this command actually changes the limit line definition points by the value you define lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Distance gt Numeric value The unit depends on the scale of the x axis Manual operation See Shift x on page 159 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol SPACing lt InterpolMode gt This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of limit lines from one horizontal point to the next Parameters lt InterpolMode gt LINear LOGarithmic RST LIN Example CALC LIM CONT SPAC LIN CALCulate n LIMit k LOWer DA
124. of positive and negative peaks RMS Root Mean Square value User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 21 R amp S9FSW K7 Measurements and Result Displays R r u EE tqq et Label Description Mod Freq Modulation frequency SINAD Signal to noise and distortion Calculated only if AF Spectrum is displayed Measures the ratio of the total power to the power of noise and harmonic distortions The noise and harmonic power is calculated inside the AF spectrum span The DC offset is removed before the calculation SINAD a5 20 E total power noise distortion power THD Total harmonic distortion The ratio of the harmonics to the fundamental and harmonics All harmonics inside the AF spectrum span are considered up to the tenth harmonic Calculated only if AF Spectrum is displayed oo Yu 1 THD aB 20 1og Note Relative demodulation results Optionally the demodulation results in relation to user defined or measured reference values are determined See chapter 5 7 6 Result Table Settings on page 125 In addition the following general information for the input signal is provided Carrier Power the power of the carrier without modulation e Carrier Offset the deviation of the calculated carrier frequency to the ideal carrier frequency e Modulation Depth AM or RF Time Domain only the difference in amplitude the carrier si
125. of the diagram is decreased Thus the display of the extracted time span becomes more precise 1 FM Time Domain CF 1 0 GHz 1 FM Time Domain Time per DIVISION Start 0 0 Fig 4 3 FM time domain measurement with time domain zoom 2 0 ms per division The time domain zoom area affects not only the diagram display but the entire evalua tion for the current window um PEL S Ic C NN NUUS User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 29 4 7 4 7 1 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output In contrast to the time domain zoom the graphical zoom is available for all diagram evaluations However the graphical zoom is useful only if more measured values than trace points are available The time span represented by each measurement point remains the same 7 t _ _ 4 45 5 4 45 5 Time domain zoom Graphical zoom Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output The R amp S FSW can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals RF Input Protection The RF input connector of the R amp S FSW must be protected against signal levels that exceed the ranges specified in the data sheet Therefore the R amp S FSW is equipped with an overload protection mechanism This mechanism becomes active as soon as the power at the input mixer exceeds the specified limit It ensures that the connection between RF input and input mixer is
126. of the instrument Parameters lt Source gt INTernal the internal reference is used EXTernal the external reference is used if none is available an error flag is displayed in the status bar RST INT Example SOUR EXT ROSC EXT Switches to external reference oscillator Manual operation See Reference on page 74 Configuring the Measurement SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB RDEVice GENerator ADDRess lt Number gt Changes the IEC IEEE bus address of the external generator Parameters lt Number gt Range 0 to 30 RST 28 Example SYST COMM GPIB RDEV GEN ADDR 15 Manual operation See GPIB Address TCP IP Address on page 74 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator INTerface Type Defines the interface used for the connection to the external generator This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 230 Parameters Type GPIB TCPip RST GPIB Example SYST COMM RDEV GEN INT TCP Manual operation See Interface on page 73 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator LINK Type This command selects the link type of the external generator if the GPIB interface is used The difference between the two GPIB operating modes is the execution speed While during GPIB operation each frequency to be set is transmitted to the generator sepa rately a whole frequency list can be programmed in one go if the TTL interface is also
127. on page 17 See PM Spectrum on page 18 See RF Time Domain on page 19 See RF Spectrum on page 20 See Result Summary on page 21 See Marker Table on page 22 See Marker Peak List on page 23 Table 11 3 lt WindowType gt parameter values for AnalogDemod application Parameter value Window type MTABle Marker table PEAKIist Marker peak list RSUMmary Result summary XTIM AM RF Time Domain RF power XTIM AM RELative AM Time Domain Configuring the Result Display Parameter value Window type XTIM AM RELative AFSPec AM Spectrum trum XTIM FM FM Time Domain XTIM FM AFSPectrum FM Spectrum XTIM PM PM Time Domain XTIM PM AFSPectrum PM Spectrum XTIM SPECtrum RF Spectrum LAYout CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of all active windows in the active mea surement channel from top left to bottom right The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syntax lt WindowName_1 gt lt Windowlndex_1 gt lt WindowName_n gt lt Windowlndex_n gt Return values lt WindowName gt string Name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Windowlndex numeric value Index of the window Example LAY CAT Result zt gg EN yD Two windows are displayed named 2 at the top or left and 1 at the bottom or right Usage Query only LAYout IDENtify WINDow l
128. page 145 2 Marker Peak List No Sti Tip To navigate within long marker peak lists simply scroll through the entries with your finger on the touchscreen Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PEAK see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 298 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 316 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 317 User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 23 Demodulation Process 4 Measurement Basics Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in Analog Demodula tion measurements is provided here for a better understanding of the required configu ration settings 4 1 Deraodulaton PIOGESS e A 24 Demodulation Bandwidth escis erectis takes bpx re Fee ope o tita PER Rad nbaa 26 Sample Rate and Demodulation Bandwidth eene 27 AF ITIQISES ie n rie tnum etai Ex edes aderat sia dante Ru ddee eiui EE 28 gal M E 29 Tire DOMAIN ZOOM ere accanto mta bt xg o bea t Pe vd d 29 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output 30 Analog Demodulation in MSRA MSRT Operating Mode ssssesss 46 Demodulation Process The demodulation process is shown in figure 4 1 All calculations are performed simul taneously with the same I Q data set Magnitude amplitude and phase of the com plex I Q pairs are determined The frequency result is obtained from the differential phase
129. position is at 100 MHz the second marker position is at 200 MHz Usage Query only Manual operation See n dB down Delta Value on page 153 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown QFACtor This command queries the Q factor of n dB down measurements lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant Return values lt QFactor gt Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown RESult This command queries the distance of the n dB down markers from each other lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 292 Analyzing Results Return values lt Distance gt The result depends on the span In case of frequency domain measurements the command returns the bandwidth between the two n dB down markers in Hz In case of time domain measurements the command returns the pulse width between the two n dB down markers in seconds Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC NDBD ON Switches on the n dB down function INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC NDBD RES Outputs the measured value Usage Query only Manual operation See n dB down Marker State on page 153 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FU
130. score n Pa ec ricette ETETNEK ES CALCulate n MARKer m LINK TO MARKer ms esessssssseseeene eere neeneren rennen nere e nennt snns CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum NEXT seessseeseesseeese enne nnne Sadri nennen eter ennns etre nia CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum RIGHfE eeee eee eee eee eene enne that ann nte RUER ENE TENEN CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimumy PEANK 2 onto tn tnn tnt nnn rn ntn ren oin CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINIMUMILEF T 2 neo tnnt rn epe teet aa tenore iadaaa CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT Pa GALCulate n MARKer m MlINimum RIGEL encontre rn a CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum PEAK eeeeeeseeseeeeeeeenenne enne aata TEN iiaa CALC latesn MARKer lt sm gt PEXGULISIOR caue arre sane o tpa peo oen nk exu E EAr N e OENE oE CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam FRAMe GALCulate n MARKer m SGRam SAR6ea 52 rrr rnit tinea taro hk a Xeno ENEN E Eo tea CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam XY MAXimum PEAK CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam XY MlINimum PEAK esee CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MAXimum ABOWe esesssssssseeeeeeeneeeneennneee nene CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum BELow CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MAXimum NEXT essseesessseeee
131. sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example PMET1 ON Switches the power sensor measurements on Manual operation See State on page 84 See Select on page 85 SENSe PMETer lt p gt UPDate STATe lt State gt This command turns continuous update of power sensor measurements on and off If on the results are update even if a single sweep is complete Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Configuring the Measurement Example PMET1 UPD ON The data from power sensor 1 is updated continuously Manual operation See Continuous Value Update on page 85 UNIT lt n gt PMETer lt p gt POWer lt Unit gt This command selects the unit for absolute power sensor measurements lt n gt is irrele vant Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Unit gt DBM WATT W RST DBM Example UNIT PMET POW DBM Manual operation See Unit Scale on page 86 UNIT lt n gt PMETer lt p gt POWer RATio lt Unit gt This command selects the unit for relative power sensor measurements lt n gt is irrele vant Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Unit gt DB PCT RST DB Example UNIT PMET POW RAT DB Manual operation See Unit Scale on page 86 Triggering with Power Sensors SENS amp eTPMETersps TRIGSgernDTIM ia ote e peto vet
132. signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Digital I Q output is not available for Analog Demodulation measurements IF Video Output IF Wide Out Frequency Noise Source Trigger 2 Trigger 3 NoiSe SOURCE roscata M aiia aa aeiae a a a aeie sands 127 Bg 128 LE SN ML e NINE OS 128 ro e 128 PMN ss tetsu cacinsincaste sss DU adi ot pU nw GM CH MU ADR IUE 128 L Seng Tiger iieii iieii brin E rite 129 Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FSW itself for example when measuring the noise level of a DUT Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce on page 238 Output Settings Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW Trigger input parameters are available in the Trigger dialog box Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected device
133. signals with a low power because it minimizes the effects of noise Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt NumberReadings gt An average count of 0 or 1 performs one power reading Range 0 to 256 Increment binary steps 1 2 4 8 Example PMET2 MTIM AVER ON Activates manual averaging PMET2 MTIM AVER COUN 8 Sets the number of readings to 8 Manual operation See Average Count Number of Readings on page 87 SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe AVERage STATe lt State gt This command turns averaging for power sensor measurements on and off Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example PMET2 MTIM AVER ON Activates manual averaging Manual operation See Meas Time Average on page 86 Configuring the Measurement SENSe PMETer lt p gt ROFFset STATe lt State gt This command includes or excludes the reference level offset of the analyzer for power sensor measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON 1 Includes the reference level offset in the results OFF 0 Ignores the reference level offset RST 1 Example PMET2 ROFF OFF Takes no offset into account for the measured power Manual operation See Use Ref Lev Offset on page 87 SENSe PMETer lt p gt STATe lt State gt This command turns a power sensor on and off Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power
134. step by step instructions demonstrate how to perform an Analog Demod ulation measurement with the R amp S FSW K7 option f 2 Press the MODE key and select the Analog Demod application Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for an Analog Demodula tion measurement Select the Input Frontend button and then the Frequency tab to define the input signal s center frequency Select the Data Acquisition button and define the bandwidth parameters for the input signal Note in MSRA MSRT mode define the analysis interval using the same settings e Demodulation Bandwidth the span of the input signal to be demodulated e Measurement Time how long the input signal is to be measured e Resolution Bandwidth how precise the signal is to be demodulated e Capture Offset multistandard mode only the offset of the analysis interval from the start of the capture buffer Optionally select the Trigger button and define a trigger for data acquisition for example an offline demodulation trigger to start capturing data only when a useful signal is transmitted Select the Demod Display button and select the demodulation displays that are of interest to you up to 6 Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences Exit the SmartGrid mode and select the Overview softkey to display the Over view again Select the Demodulation Settings button to define demodulation parameters for each evaluatio
135. table SENS MIX HARM BAND USER Define band by two ranges range 1 covers 47 48 GHz to 80 GHz harmonic 6 cvl table UserTable range 2 covers 80 GHz to 138 02 GHz harmonic 8 average conv loss of 30 dB SENS MIX HARM TYPE EVEN SENS MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON SENS MIX FREQ HAND 80GHz SENS MIX HARM LOW 6 SENS MIX LOSS TABL LOW UserTable SENS MIX HARM HIGH 8 11 4 2 3 Configuring the Measurement SENS MIX LOSS HIGH 30dB Query the possible range SENS MIX FREQ STAR Result 47480000000 47 48 GHz SENS MIX FREQ STOP Result 138020000000 138 02 GHz Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a basic frequency sweep and wait until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Return the trace data default screen configuration TRAC DATA TRACel Configuring the 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 The following commands are required to use the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 See also the command for configuring triggers while using the optional 2 GHz band width extension R amp S FSW B2000 TRIGger SEQuence OSCilloscope COUPling on page 207 Remote commands exclusive to configuring the 2 GHz bandwidth extension EXPort WAVeform DISPlayolf crac c cate thai eere e ded aua Pe ieia 204 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope STATE ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaeaenes 205 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment STEP STATe
136. tables in ac1 files can be edited Special B2000 tables in b2g files can only be imported and deleted Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 201 Delete Table Deletes the currently selected conversion loss table after you confirm the action Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL CLEAr on page 199 Import Table Imports a stored conversion loss table from any directory and copies it to the instru ment s C r_s instr user cv1 directory It can then be assigned for use for a specific frequency range see Conversion loss on page 59 Input and Frontend Settings Note When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 special conversion loss tables are required Supported tables have the file extension b2g as opposed to ac1 for common tables While ac1 files can be used data acquisition with the B2000 option using such con version loss tables will lead to substantial inaccuracy Using no conversion loss tables at all during data acquisition with the B2000 option will cause even more inaccuracy Note that only common conversion loss tables in ac1 files can be edited Special B2000 tables in b2g files can only be imported and deleted For more details see the R amp S FSW 1I Q Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Conver sion Loss Table New
137. the Display CORN used o Detto p iba stat atten das 94 2 C 94 L Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 95 Full Scale Level Mode Valug o etr eee D eite tn a te 95 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display OVLD for analog baseband or digitial baseband input Input and Frontend Settings The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the hardware of the R amp S FSW is adapted according to this value it is recom mended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Note that for input from the External Mixer R amp S FSW B21 the maximum reference level also depends on the conversion loss see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual for details Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 243 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level In some result displays the scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the
138. the path and name of the file Example MIX LOSS TABL mix 1 4 Specifies the conversion loss table mix_1_4 Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 59 SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW Average This command defines the average conversion loss to be used for the entire low first range Parameters Average numeric value Range 0 to 100 RST 24 0 dB Default unit dB Example MIX LOSS 20dB Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 59 SENSe MIXer PORTs lt PortType gt This command specifies whether the mixer is a 2 port or 3 port type Parameters lt PortType gt 2 3 RST 2 Example MIX PORT 3 Manual operation See Mixer Type on page 58 SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe State If enabled the band limits are extended beyond RF Start and RF Stop due to the capabilities of the used harmonics Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See RF Overrange on page 57 Configuring the Measurement Conversion Loss Table Settings The following settings are required to configure and manage conversion loss tables ISENSeTCORRScUOn CYL BAND ri aa uen dede pto aa ene ue teen aeta 198 SENSe CORR amp ction CVL BIAS redii crei iore stia E Ioco vene e ERR RAE NR ARR TASA OE E E EEEE O 198 SENSe CORRection CVL CATAlOQ caiia ee Leap teen etn nope nenne k igne uen animae css 199 SENSeTCORReclOh GVEOLDEAE iiiter ertet rhe et eve mede atte ee een nes 19
139. the spectrogram over all frequencies Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum ABOVe CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOVe This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher level for the current fre quency The search includes only frames above the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum BELow CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELow This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher level for the current fre quency The search includes only frames below the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 328 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements e J Q S n o P vige CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum NEXT CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next higher level for the current frequency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarke
140. via softkeys in the Save Recall menu which is displayed when you select the Save or Open icon in the tool bar These functions are only available if no measurement is running In particular if Continuous Sweep RUN CONT is active the import export functions are not available For a description of the other functions in the Save Recall menu see the R amp S FSW User Manual o9 Import Export Functions rere X EU 163 EVE BONS ra erepta hn redet na caseo du teria pu bna co inst 163 jojo RE 163 E Export Trace to ASCIT PIli oa ic eit ati aeg lod ec initio uaa 163 L Trace Export Configuration c cccsssssssssesesesecescsssessseeseceseneseseneseeesenees 163 LIGER MENQUDNQELOENE TER TTE 164 Import Provides functions to import data I Q Import Import Opens a file selection dialog box to select an import file that contains IQ data This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process l Q data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications Note that the I Q data must have a specific format as described in the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and 1 Q Input User Manual I Q import is not available in MSRA MSRT mode Remote command MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe on page 362 Export Opens a submenu to configure data export Export Trace to ASCII File Export Opens a file selection dialog box and saves the selected trace in ASCII format
141. which functions are available for which evaluations Evaluation n dB down Phase Noise Reference Fixed AF time s X AF spectrum X X X RF time X X RF spectrum X X X For details on the special marker functions see the R amp S FSW User Manual The remote commands required to define these settings are described in chap ter 11 8 1 6 Configuring Special Marker Functions on page 334 The Fixed Reference Marker settings are described in Defining a Fixed Reference on page 144 e Phase Noise Measurement Marker sess een 149 e Marker Peak List Configuration cocco ci eet mcdia ac eek eee 151 NES MR IUE CMT 152 e Deactivating All Marker Functions 2 2 oec ite ca rt diee XX Eten RR k X IECUR AR RR XR 153 Phase Noise Measurement Marker Access Overview Analysis Marker Functions Phase Noise Phase Noise Config or MKR FUNC gt Select Marker Function gt Phase Noise gt Phase Noise Config For each of the 16 markers phase noise measurement can be activated Working with Markers in the R amp S FSW Analog Demodulation application Note that phase noise markers are only available for spectrum results not for time domain results and only for normal markers The individual marker settings correspond to those defined in the Marker dialog box Any settings to the marker state or type changed in the Marker Function dialog box are also changed in the M
142. x 1 modulation frequency i e that at least three periods of the AF signal are recorded The mean carrier power for calculating the AM is also calculated with a digital filter that returns stable results after a measurement time of 2 3 x 1 modulation frequency i e at least three cycles of the AF signal must be recorded before a stable AM can be shown 4 4 AF Triggers The Analog Demodulation application allows triggering to the demodulated signal The display is stable if a minimum of five modulation periods are within the recording time Triggering is always DC coupled Therefore triggering is possible directly to the point where a specific carrier level phase or frequency is exceeded or not attained R amp S FSW K7 Measurement Basics 4 5 AF Filters Additional filters applied after demodulation help filter out unwanted signals or correct pre emphasized input signals A CCITT filter allows you to evaluate the signal by simu lating the characteristics of human hearing 4 6 Time Domain Zoom For evaluations in the time domain the demodulated data for a particular time span can be extracted and displayed in more detail using the Time Domain Zoom function This is useful if the measurement time is very large and thus each sweep point repre sents a large time span The time domain zoom function distributes the available sweep points only among the time span defined by the zoom area length The time span displayed per division
143. x val ues for both upper and lower limit lines are defined as a common control line This con trol line is the reference for the y values for both upper and lower limit lines e Confgunmg Limit UNES sericea e I poeta RR re a eeuatnnedaneteteeer 344 Managing LNK LIM GS m ES 352 e Checking the Results of a Limit Check eese cet s 353 e Programming Example Using Limit Lines eene 354 Configuring Limit Lines GALOulatesn LIMItek COMMA TI iine ern eren aa er An menie aaa RE aa EEA 344 CALCulate n LIMit k CONTrol DATA eese nennen nnne nnne 345 CALCulatesmbpMitsk X ONTIOEDOMalh v naaite i etd actae tet iaa xe netus 345 CAL Gulate mnsEIMitek CONTIOEMOPBDBE 2 1 3 rri noo pedea eei s ens sessed 345 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol OF FS6 t ccccccccssescceencceceseceaseseceeeseeceegecesseeessaneeees 345 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol SHIP t ccccccccccssccceseseecessececesceeseeseeeeseceseageeeseeseseaeees 346 CALCulate n LIMit Kk CONTrOoESPAQCing 2 cniin coeno asa cese ka aes naui nada 346 CALOCulate n LIMit k LOWer DATA eese nennen nnne enne 346 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer MARGIN cccccescccesescecescececescessseeeeseeeeeceaneeesseseeeaaeeees 347 CAL CulatesmsLMtsesdoOWerMODE tt E ette eter a bete 347 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer OFFSet cccccccccescceceece
144. zoom areas in the original trace while the zoomed trace areas are displayed in individual windows The zoom area that corre sponds to the individual zoom display is indicated in the lower right corner between the scrollbars Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z0OM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 359 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z00M MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA on page 358 Restore Original Display Restores the original display that is the originally calculated displays for the entire capture buffer and closes all zoom windows Remote command single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 358 multiple zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z0OM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 359 for each multiple zoom window X Deactivating Zoom Selection mode Deactivates any zoom mode Tapping the screen no longer invokes a zoom but selects an object Remote command single zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 358 multiple zoom DISPlay WINDow lt n gt Z0OM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe on page 359 for each multiple zoom window 6 6 Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode The data that was captured by the MSRA MSRT Master can be analyzed in the Analog Demodulation application The analysis settings and functions available in MSRA MSRT mode are those descri bed for common Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode Analysis line settings In addition an analysis line can be positioned The analysis lin
145. 100 dB RST 10 dB Example MIX PORT 3 Manual operation See Auto ID Threshold on page 60 Mixer Settings The following commands are required to configure the band and specific mixer set tings SENSe TMIXerFREQuency HANDOVER uias iioii ainidi e Dee kate rede aaia 193 SENSeMIXer FREOuency S PARU ete here ERE Ree a ee Reb IE RERET AES 194 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STOP2 uucecc scia tm enero en enean a ke E Lapin Ea inaidai 194 SENSe MIXer HARMonIcBAND PRESel erret eter erat nare zen an died 194 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue eee nnne 194 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH STATe esses reete hinten nnne 195 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALue sess 195 SENSe7MIXer HARMonlG PY PE aaa retour sette petet bere certet etaed et uen 196 SENSe MIXer HARMonic EOW 2 2 noit tre Rete tt phe e Rx Ee inea a inca aI ERREA 196 EsRIubCHBesspe m 196 I SENSe MIXerLOSS TABLES HGH rate seite ax ped n eaaet aad AAi 196 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW eene tette tnter tens 197 SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW eccentric 197 IESU EI IET HISP HM 197 SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe 22 eicere oor eov aevo atat eese reve dere aed den 197 SENSe MIXer FREQuency HANDover Frequency This command defines the frequency at which the mixer switches from one range to the next if two different ranges are selected The handover frequency for each band can
146. 117 SENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs STATe State This command activates deactivates the selected high pass filter for the specified eval uation For details on the high pass filter refer to High Pass on page 117 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT HPAS ON Activates the selected high pass filter Manual operation See High Pass on page 117 SENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs FREQuency ABSolute lt FilterT ype gt This command selects the absolute low pass filter type for the specified evaluation For details on the low pass filter refer to Low Pass on page 118 Parameters lt FilterType gt 3kHz 15kHz 150kHz RST 15kHz Example FILT LPAS FREQ 150kHz Selects the low pass filter for the demodulation bandwidth range from 400 kHz to 16 MHz Manual operation See Low Pass on page 118 SENSe FlLTer lt n gt LPASs FREQuency MANual Frequency This command selects the cutoff frequency of the low pass filter for the specified evalu ation For details on the low pass filter refer to Low Pass on page 118 Parameters Frequency numeric value Range 0 to 3 MHz RST 15kHz 11 4 8 5 11 4 8 6 Configuring the Measurement Example FILT LPAS FREQ MAN 150kHz The AF results are restricted to frequencies lower than 150 kHz Manual operation See Low Pass on page 118 SENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs FREQuency RELative FilterType This command selects the relative low pa
147. 143 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe State This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is cur rently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 Manual operation See Marker State on page 142 See Marker Type on page 142 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe Trace This command selects the trace the marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters Trace 1to6 Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC MARK3 TRAC 2 Assigns marker 3 to trace 2 Manual operation See Assigning the Marker to a Trace on page 143 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X Position This command moves a marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis Analyzing Results If necessary the command activates the marker If the marker has been used as a delta marker the command turns it into a normal marker Parameters lt Position gt Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis The unit is either Hz frequency domain or s time domain or dB statistics Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See Marker Table on page 22 Se
148. 18 R amp S FSW K7 Measurements and Result Displays PAE Start 0 0 Hz AF Stop 1 0 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIMe PM AFSPectruml see on page 298 RF Time Domain Displays the RF power of the input signal versus time The level values represent the magnitude of the I Q data set User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 19 R amp S FSW K7 Measurements and Result Displays 1 RF Time Domain e iAP Clrw CF 100 0 MHz 1001 pts Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIM AM see on page 298 RF Spectrum Displays the spectrum of the input signal In contrast to the Spectrum application the frequency values are determined using FFT from the recorded l Q data set User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 20 R amp S FSW K7 Measurements and Result Displays rcr 100 0 MHz 1001 pts Span 1 0 MHz Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH XTIM SPECTRUM see on page 298 Result Summary The result summary displays the results of the demodulation functions for all windows in a table 4 Result Summary Carrier Power 7 17 dBm Carrier Offset 4 48 Hz Mod Depth 25 18 NAD Peak Peak iPeak RMS Mod Freq Ej THO AM 25 201 25 167 25 184 o 17 543 oe 1 0001 MHz 53 116 dB 58 491 dB For each demodulation the following information is provided Table 3 1 Result summary description Label Description Peak Positive peak maximum Peak Negative peak minimum Peak 2 Average
149. 190 CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer on page 242 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Reference Level Automatically determines a reference level which ensures that no overload occurs at the R amp S FSW for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the full scale level are adjusted so the sig nal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression and clipping are minimized To determine the required reference level a level measurement is performed on the R amp S FSW If necessary you can optimize the reference level further by manually decreasing the attenuation level to the lowest possible value before an overload occurs then decreas ing the reference level in the same way When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 the level measurement is performed on the connected oscilloscope Y axis scaling on the oscil loscope is limited to a minimum of 5mV per division R amp S FSW K7 Configuration You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 133 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 283 Mechanical Attenuation Defines the mechanical attenuation for RF input This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital I Q Interface option R amp S FSW B17 Attenuation Mode Value Mec
150. 2 BC2K CDMA2000 BTS cdma2000 MS R amp S FSW K83 MC2K CDMA2000 MS 1xEV DO BTS R amp S FSW K84 BDO 1xEV DO BTS 1xEV DO MS R amp S FSW K85 MDO 1xEV DO MS WLAN R amp S FSW K91 WLAN WLAN 802 11ad R amp S FSW K95 WIGIG 802 11ad LTE R amp S FSW K10x LTE LTE the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 184 Activating Analog Demodulation Measurements Application lt ChannelType gt Default Channel Name Parameter Real Time Spectrum R amp S FSW B160R RTIM Real Time Spectrum K160RE DOCSIS 3 1 R amp S FSW K192 193 DOCSis DOCSIS 3 1 the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel INSTrument REName lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command renames a measurement channel Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the channel you want to rename lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the new channel name Note that you can not assign an existing channel name to a new channel this will cause an error Example INST REN IQAnalyzer2 IQAnalyzer3 Renames the channel with the name IQAnalyzer2 to IQAna lyzer3 Usage Setting onl
151. 215 SENSe PROBesp SE Tup MOLE 2 crap cette ut epi nent a rede th ERR cha SLE RR Een tn aae 215 SENSE PROBe lt p gt SETUR NAME 2 e arret e tende reae tra edu dia pena e dest 216 SENSe IPROBe p SETup S TATe 2 oett tiere Eo ouv 2 be eum p ui lulio Pee De D RR Yd dd pees 216 SENSe IPROBesps SETup TYPE iiiaae iaai danian ee ke poe eie Siiani 216 SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup CMOFfset lt CMOffset gt Sets the common mode offset The setting is only available if a differential probe is connected to the R amp S FSW If the probe is disconnected the common mode offset of the probe is reset to 0 0 V For details see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual Suffix lt p gt 1 2 3 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Parameters lt CMOffset gt Range 100E 24 to 100E 24 Increment 1E 3 RST 0 Default unit V Manual operation See Common Mode Offset on page 72 Configuring the Measurement SENSe PROBe lt p gt ID PARTnumber Queries the R amp S part number of the probe Suffix lt p gt 1 2 3 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values lt PartNumber gt Part number in a string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt I
152. 23 Configuring the Measurement DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision Value This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams where possible The suffix lt t gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt numeric value WITHOUT UNIT unit according to the result dis play Defines the range per division total range 10 lt Value gt RST depends on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y PDIV 10 Sets the grid spacing to 10 units e g dB per division Manual operation See Dev per Division Db per Division on page 120 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition Position This command defines the vertical position of the reference level on the display grid for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant The R amp S FSW adjusts the scaling of the y axis accordingly For measurements with the optional external generator control the command defines the position of the reference value Parameters lt Position gt RST 100 PCT AF spectrum display 50 PCT time display Example DISP TRAC Y RPOS 50PCT Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Position on page 79 See Reference Value Position on page 121 See Ref Level Position on page 123 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing lt ScalingType gt This command selects the scaling of the y axis for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant For AF spectrum displays onl
153. 54 6 4 2 Limit Line Details nnne NANREN RANEE RENNA E 156 6 5 Zoom Functions erret tinus ns riens Dar ena rr ie Ea saaria 159 6 6 Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode esses nennen nennen nnn nennen nn 160 6 1 Trace Settings Access Overview gt Analysis gt Traces or TRACE gt Trace Config You can configure the settings for up to 6 individual traces with a specific evaluation e g AM time domain the traces in all windows with the D In the Analog Demodulation application when you configure the traces for a window same evaluation are configured identically Trace data can also be exported to an ASCII file for further analysis For details see chapter 6 2 Trace Data Export Configuration on page 139 Trace Settings Mey dBm i RBW a e 10 dB SWT79 5ms VBW Mode Traces Trace Data Export Copy Trace Trace Math Spectrogram Smoothing Auto Type Hold State Value E Auto Peak s m m 2 Logarithmic Traces foan f deer A A Bz CO C 2 E D e oe Zo C a LL a Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 136 Traca oi rrry 136 HI CUT MEME 137 uel 137 Average MOG E 137 Arora a COUNT m 138 Predefined Trace Settings QUICK CONTIG cccsceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeeseeeeeena
154. 8 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer lt p gt CONFigure AUTO STATe lt State gt This command turns automatic assignment of a power sensor to the power sensor index on and off Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example SYST COMM RDEV PMET CONF AUTO OFF Manual operation See Select on page 85 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer COUNt This command queries the number of power sensors currently connected to the R amp S FSW Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt NumberSensors gt Number of connected power sensors Example SYST COMM RDEV PMET COUN Usage Query only Manual operation See Select on page 85 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer lt p gt DEFine lt Placeholder gt Type Interface lt SerialNo gt This command assigns the power sensor with the specified serial number to the selected power sensor index configuration The query returns the power sensor type and serial number of the sensor assigned to the specified index Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Setting parameters lt Placeholder gt Currently not evaluated lt SerialNo gt Serial number of a connected power sensor Query parameters lt Type gt The power sensor type e g NRP Z81 lt Interface gt Currently not evaluated Return values lt Placeholder gt Currently not used lt Type gt Detecte
155. 85 96 Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure TRIG on page 282 Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All 132 Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Freq 132 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level seesessss 133 Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto 133 Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual 133 Upper Level FIVSIGIBSIS ani eem paient a qe Ree dero tend eb edendis 133 Lower Level FysIieresis 1 ene e R EE Reden FE P DAP S R P VU E KRER A AGE 133 AF Auto SCAG rosinski risanni AEDE NEEESE od vad ees cee aude nae 134 Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All Activates all automatic adjustment functions for the current measurement settings This includes e Auto Frequency e Auto Level e AF Auto Scale on page 122 Note MSRA MSRT operating modes In MSRA MSRT operating mode this function is only available for the MSRA MSRT Master not the applications Remote command SENSe ADJust ALL on page 280 Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Freq The R amp S FSW adjusts the center frequency automatically The optimum center frequency is the frequency with the highest S N ratio in the fre quency span As this function uses the signal counter it is intended for use with sinus o
156. 88 State Switches the power measurement for all power sensors on or off Note that in addition to this general setting each power sensor can be activated or deactivated individually by the Select setting on each tab However the general setting overrides the individual settings Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt STATe on page 224 Input and Frontend Settings Continuous Value Update If activated the power sensor data is updated continuously during a sweep with a long sweep time and even after a single sweep has completed This function cannot be activated for individual sensors If the power sensor is being used as a trigger see Using the power sensor as an external trigger on page 87 continuous update is not possible this setting is ignored Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt UPDate STATe on page 224 Select Selects the individual power sensor for usage if power measurement is generally acti vated State function The detected serial numbers of the power sensors connected to the instrument are provided in a selection list For each of the four available power sensor indexes Power Sensor 1 Power Sensor 4 which correspond to the tabs in the configura tion dialog one of the detected serial numbers can be assigned The physical sensor is thus assigned to the configuration setting for the selected power sensor index By default serial numbers not yet assigned are automatically assigned to t
157. 9 SENSe CORRection CVL COMMAnl 22 22 12 20222 92 ui YE a pe d FRE VER e Peu REEL arar a 199 SENSe I CORRecton C VIDA TA sa iure rnt arteriae Eee aeu X een RE ETEA 200 SENSe CORRection CVL HARMoniC esee nnne nennt tnt nh nennen renes 200 SENSeTCORRectlon CYL MIXET creson rete aeta e ea ttt qu ett der eue t eed gu ve rex da can cdd 200 SENSe CORRection CVE PORTS iui itae fe aed vttc n noe i ease cuve aae disian 201 SENSe CORBectioniGVE ISELebgt ieui piii ee eite ini pea ean bk tne put od Eo RA dn 201 SENSeTCORRBection CVE SNUMDBOrT uc ratae ton te Iq eI rette coe PE Eie eem tann 201 SENSe CORRection CVL BAND Type This command defines the waveguide band for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 201 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters Band K A KA Q U VJE W F D G Y J USER Standard waveguide band or user defined band Note The band formerly referred to as A is now named KA the input parameter A is still available and refers to the same band as KA For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 11 2 RST F 90 GHz 140 GHz Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TA
158. ACe on page 316 All Markers Off Deactivates all markers in one step Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 315 6 3 1 2 General Marker Settings Access Overview gt Analysis gt Marker gt Marker Settings or Marker gt Markers Settings tab Some general marker settings allow you to influence the marker behavior for all mark ers Working with Markers in the R amp S FSW Analog Demodulation application Markers Marker Settings Search Settings Marker Table Reference Fixed Linked Markers State e 1j Level 70 0 Frequency 15 1 Hz AF Spectrum eon Standard EIS Peak Search Marker Table DISplay dt thee tet Hec Hex rta E DR 144 Marker SUGDSIZQ redit erret ete te oec vh seat ae Up e Sei et go e e PER n 144 Defining aEbxed Reference 22 cte ertet ac ner tl euin eret net e a 144 Link TMS MAKO irre SOA 145 Link AF Spectrum Makr uinnissa sinarado jai aai sistens 145 Marker Table Display Defines how the marker information is displayed On Displays the marker information in a table in a separate area beneath the diagram Off Displays the marker information within the diagram area Auto Default Up to two markers are displayed in the diagram area If more markers are active the marker table is displayed automatically Remote command DISPlay MTABle on page 322 Marker Stepsize Defines the size of the steps that the marker position is moved usi
159. ADEMod RESults AM DETector det REFerence sssssssseeeeneeneenennne 277 CONFigure ADEMod RESults AM DETector det REFerence MEAStoref esses 279 CONFigure ADEMod RESults AM DETector det STATe essent nennen nnne 278 CONFigure ADEMod RESults FM DETector det MODE CONFigure ADEMod RESults FM DETector det REFerence ssssssseeeeeeere nee 277 CONFigure ADEMod RESults FM DETector det REFerence MEAStoref sese 279 CONFigure ADEMod RESults FM DETector det STATe sse rennen 278 CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector det MODE sesseseeseeeeeeneenrennee nennen enne 279 CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETectorsdet gt REFErENCe siidist nrinn iiare 277 CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector det REFerence MEAStoref esses 279 CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector lt det gt STATe GONFigure ADEMod RESults UNIT nort rt n n n ene trn pnt E es DIAGnostic SERVICe NSOUFGOB nre ie ear e ence rir A a PO Rd PERRA Fh a a ER FREE ELS EE Xe KA EAE Eaei liEydele E DISPlay M TABIC ict te ete cran re euet vp rv c ies wine heen EE e E vt lg ee VC BISPlayEWINDOW SnP SIZE onem rnnt rne nibh rt ii terit b tnra reni FEE PE SEO d DISPlay WINDowsn 7 TRACES MODE ecceo concorrente RE entere een tae ee rer NEER EEEE EEEE DISPlay WINDow n
160. Analog Demodulation is a separate application on the R amp S FSW To activate the Analog Demodulation application 1 Select the MODE key Understanding the Display Information A dialog box opens that contains all operating modes and applications currently available on your R amp S FSW 2 Select the Analog Demodulation item The R amp S FSW opens a new measurement channel for the Analog Demodulation application The measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be configured in the Analog Demodulation Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Overview softkey from any menu see chapter 5 2 Configuration Overview on page 50 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function When you activate an application a new measurement channel is created which deter mines the measurement settings for that application The same application can be acti vated with different measurement settings by creating several channels for the same application The number of channels that can be configured at the same time depends on the avail able memory on the instrument Only one measurement can be performed at any time namely the one in the currently active channel However in order to perform the configured measurements consecu tively a Sequencer function is provided If activated the measurements configured in the currently active channels are per formed one after the other in the or
161. Automatically Auto Level on page 90 SENSe ADJust SCALe Y AUTO CONTinuous lt State gt Activates automatic scaling of the y axis in all diagrams according to the current mea surement results Currently auto scaling is only available for AF measurements RF power and RF spectrum measurements are not affected by the auto scaling Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example SENS ADJ SCAL Y AUTO ON Manual operation See AF Auto Scale on page 122 Configuring the Measurement 11 4 10 Configuring Standard Traces Useful commands for trace configuration described elsewhere DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 248 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 247 Remote commands exclusive to trace configuration DISPlay WINDowensTRAOSSESMODE et ede endet beet t ertet tret enced 284 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t MODE HCONtinuous eeeseeeeenenenenn nene 285 DISPlay WINDeowspns E TRACE ste SELEC iier reae Rn tete Return Ense 286 bISPlayWINDowensETRACeSEL STAT aint e ert te ettet ease nhe 286 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AM ABSolute TDOMain TYPE eee 286 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AM RELative TDOMain TYPE eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen nne 286 SENSe ADEMod n AM RELative AFSPectrum TY PE 2 ecccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 286 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt FM TDOMain TYPE eceenen tnt nen 286 SENSe JAD
162. B 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL BAND KA Sets the band to KA 26 5 GHz 40 GHz Manual operation See Band on page 64 SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias setting to be used with the conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 201 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt BiasSetting gt numeric value RST 0 0A Default unit A Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL BIAS 3A Manual operation See Write to lt CVL table name gt on page 61 See Bias on page 65 SENSe CORRection CVL CATAlog This command queries all available conversion loss tables saved in the C r_s instr user cv1 directory on the instrument This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Usage Query only SENSe CORRection CVL CLEAr This command deletes the selected conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 201 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL CLE Usage Event
163. CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod FM RESult t RELative 309 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod PM RESult t RELative 309 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod CARRier RESult sess 310 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod FERRor RESult t 310 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod SINad RESult lt t gt ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaes 310 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod THD RESUuIt lt t gt cececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaes 311 ISENSe ADEModsn iE MORES s cteessace ae iaa aa t meatu o runt eheu een ndun da 311 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod AFRequency RESult This command queries the modulation audio frequency for the demodulation method in the selected window lt m gt is irrelevant Parameters lt ModFreq gt Modulation frequency in Hz Usage Query only Retrieving Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod AM RESult lt t gt lt MeasType gt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod FM RESult lt t gt lt MeasType gt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod PM RESult lt t gt lt MeasType gt This command queries the current value of the demodulated signal for the specified trace as displayed in the Result Summary in manual operation Note that all windows with the same
164. CENTer Frequency This command defines the center frequency Parameters Frequency The allowed range and fmax is specified in the data sheet UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command DOWN Decreases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Configuring the Measurement Manual operation See Center Frequency on page 71 See Center frequency on page 96 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size You can increase or decrease the center frequency quickly in fixed steps using the SENS FREQ UP AND SENS FREQ DOWN commands see SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 240 Parameters lt StepSize gt fmax IS specified in the data sheet Range 1 to fMAX RST 0 1 x span Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 96 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK lt CouplingType gt This command couples and decouples the center frequency step size to the span or the resolution bandwidth Paramete
165. Configuration Generator Type Frequency Min Interface Interface Frequency Max Configuration TTL Handshake Level Min Source Calibration GPIB Address 28 Level Max Reference Edit Generator Setup File For more information on configuring interfaces see the Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols section in the R amp S FSW User Manual Generator TY cette eese to tuae em Rel S 73 IE IE e RC E E cranes E E E A E ian adtueus eae 73 TTE Haridshake 1 eee ie aa AE A TOR Ue Pe P A ANGRA 73 GPIB Address TCP IP Address eese ener nensi nnne nnne nnns 74 E E E a sich E A E HR RE vede cv ates Ro ert reque erue aa eaae Ses buen Wau eats 74 Edit Generator Setup Fig eco rote crt te eed ev oed Phe xt ede tds 74 Frequency Min Frequency Max oret aai aii iis 74 Level Min Level Max osssesssseeeeneeennennnen enne nennen nnne nennen seen nnne nnns 74 Generator Type Selects the generator type and thus defines the generator setup file to use For an overview of supported generators see chapter 4 7 4 2 Overview of Supported Generators on page 36 For information on generator setup files see chapter 4 7 4 3 Generator Setup Files on page 38 Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator TYPE on page 233 Interface Type of interface connection used The following interfaces are currently supported e GPIB e TCP IP not by all generators For details on which signal generators
166. Culate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed STATE ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeananaes 336 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint MAXimum PEAK This command moves the fixed reference marker to the peak power Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO MAX Sets the reference point level for delta markers to the peak of the selected trace Usage Event Manual operation See Defining a Fixed Reference on page 144 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed RPOint X lt RefPoint gt This command defines the horizontal position of the fixed delta marker reference point The coordinates of the reference may be anywhere in the diagram Parameters lt RefPoint gt Numeric value that defines the horizontal position of the refer ence For frequency domain measurements it is a frequency in Hz For time domain measurements it is a point in time in s RST Fixed Reference OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHz Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz Manual operation See Defining a Fixed Reference on page 144 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed RPOint Y lt RefPointLevel gt This command defines the vertical position of the fixed delta marker reference point The coordinates of the reference may be anywhere in the diagram Parameters lt RefPoint gt Numeric value that defines the vertical position of the reference The unit and value range is
167. D SRNumber Queries the serial number of the probe Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Return values lt SerialNo gt Serial number in a string Usage Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup MODE lt Mode gt Select the action that is started with the micro button on the probe head See also Microbutton Action on page 72 Suffix lt p gt 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Parameters lt Mode gt Manual operation Configuring the Measurement RSINgle Run single starts one data acquisition NOACtion Nothing is started on pressing the micro button RST RSINgle See Microbutton Action on page 72 SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup NAME Queries the name of the probe Suffix lt p gt Return values lt Name gt Usage 11213 Selects the connector 1 Baseband Input 2 Baseband Input Q 3 RF currently not supported use 1 with RF Input Connec tor setting Baseband Input I Name string Query only SENSe PROBe lt p gt SETup STATe Queries if the probe at the specified connector is active detected or not active not detected To switch the probe on i e activate input from the connector use
168. D m Querying REMOTE otis tette setti 311 TroubleshoOtlhg iio th pore Ein nire Petre trn mes 175 MY Pits ses 125 Threshold Lirmiblies aoc ie rae tee n Rd kde tdt 157 Time domain zoom TIME POF GIVISION isc coo ene RD extend 113 Time per division Displayed sic ette ente Ur et etie On eite dd 12 Time doralhizoOr secet cicer etie EE 113 Time trigger leid 101 Total harmonic distortion ECIAM ae 21 pic 138 Average mode 137 Averaging remote control 289 Configuration 495 Configuring remote control 284 DELECIO m 137 Detector remote control 278 289 Export format ostis ere tnter 140 Exporting 139 140 163 a9 0 rc 137 Mode e 136 Mode remote 284 Remote control 303 Retrieving results remote 304 Settings remote control 284 Settings predefined ren me 138 Traces to be Checked MEWS ocio couse dive asthe 155 Tracking see External generalor eren 75 Transducers Calibration with external generator 40 79 Transmission measurement Calibration external generator susss 78 External Generator n inrer 35 Trigger Drop t time enero ntt 102 Drop out time Power sensor eseese 88 Extern
169. DELTamarker lt m gt MREF lt Reference gt This command selects a reference marker for a delta marker other than marker 1 The reference may be another marker or the fixed reference Parameters lt Reference gt 1 to 16 Selects markers 1 to 16 as the reference FIXed Selects the fixed reference as the reference Example CALC DELT3 MREF 2 Specifies that the values of delta marker 3 are relative to marker 2 Manual operation See Reference Marker on page 142 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe State This command turns delta markers on and off If necessary the command activates the delta marker first No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 ON Turns on delta marker 2 Manual operation See Marker State on page 142 See Marker Type on page 142 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe lt Trace gt This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Analyzing Results Parameters lt Trace gt Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC DELT2 TRAC 2 Positions delta marker 2 on trace 2 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X lt Position gt This command moves a delta marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates
170. Default unit s Importing and Exporting I Q Data and Results Manual operation See Position on page 161 CALCulate lt n gt RTMS WINDow lt n gt IVAL This command queries the analysis interval for the window specified by the WINDow suffix lt n gt the CALC suffix is irrelevant This command is only available in application measurement channels not the MSRT View or MSRT Master Return values lt IntStart gt Start value of the analysis interval in seconds Default unit s lt IntStop gt Stop value of the analysis interval in seconds Usage Query only SENSe RTMS CAPTure OFFSet Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRT mode not for the MSRT Master It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements Parameters Offset This parameter defines the time offset between the capture buf fer start and the start of the extracted application data The off set must be a positive value as the application can only analyze data that is contained in the capture buffer Range pretrigger time to min posttrigger time sweep time RST 0 Manual operation See Capture Offset on page 107 11 9 Importing and Exporting I Q Data and Results The I Q data to be evaluated in the Analog Demodulation application can not only be measured by the Analog Demodulation application itself it can also be imported to the application provided it has the correct format Furthermore the evaluated I
171. Den beer oe entr H E D ced Center frequency x Analog Baseband B71 sss 71 Automatic configuration eeeessesessese 132 Displayed is SO UKOV uites i eer tes oi Ebo erae PE P dite Step size Channel bar Information external generator sssss 44 Closing Channels remote esee 183 Windows remote sseeeeeee 300 303 Comment EMI E 157 Compatibility DimiblilIes icc t ror ER EH Pe n eta eei IN EO 155 Conditions Measurement 1 2 2 eer Hec hoa eere 24 Configuration Measurement remote Procedure sd oiim rede rete eed ceti toros Connectors AUX control external generator s 33 External generator control 233 GPIB iuit ote EHE aid 33 Continue single sweep SOfIKGy eter ree tendens 109 Continuous sweep ec M enaa 108 Conventions SCPlIcommiands 2 ce eL ee ue des 177 Conversion loss External Mixer Remote control 196 197 Conversion loss tables rrr tts 62 Available remote control Band remote control Bias remote control 198 ero o To Ug oro E es 62 Creating eere am m eee eb nien dade 63 Deleting remote control 2 199 External Mixet irre trente erret 59 External Mixer Remote control 196 197 Harmonic order remote control 200
172. DiglConf requires a USB connection not LAN from the R amp S FSW to the R amp S EX IQ BOX in addition to the Digital Baseband Interface connection R amp S DiglConf version 2 20 360 86 Build 170 or higher is required To return to the R amp S FSW application press any key The R amp S FSW application is dis played with the Input Output menu regardless of which key was pressed For details on the R amp S DiglConf application see the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Inter face Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual Note If you close the R amp S DiglConf window using the Close icon the window is minimized not closed If you select the File gt Exit menu item in the R amp S DiglConf window the application is closed Note that in this case the settings are lost and the EX IQ BOX functionality is no longer available until you restart the application using the DiglConf softkey in the R amp S FSW once again Input and Frontend Settings 5 3 1 4 Analog Baseband Input Settings The following settings and functions are available to provide input via the optional Ana log Baseband Interface in the applications that support it They can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box Input Settings Frequency Digital IQ I Q Mode Input Config Analog Baseband t E N High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband RF IQ File Signal Path Analog I jQ For more information on the optional Analog Bas
173. E essent rennen rennen trinis CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINIMUM LEFT eessesssesseeeseeeeneenennee ennt rennen nnne CALCulate n DELTamarker m MlINimum NEXT ssssessseseseseeeeneee eene nennen nnne nnns enne CALCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum RIGHE eeeessesseeesseeeeene nennen rennen rennen CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK eeesseeseeeeeeeeenneneene nnne CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MODE CALCulate lt n gt DEL Tamarkersm gt MREF aoreet uc bote rtp pce ei rh de Ep apr oto ede CA ga CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam FRAMe esssssseeseeeneeeeneeen een reeneree net Sapia CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam SARea essen eene rennen eren enne CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam XY MAXimum PEAK CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam XY MlINimumr PEAK eese CALOCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum ABOWe essere enne CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum BELoOw eese CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MAXimum NEXT eessessesseseeeeeeeneneeen enne CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK CALCulate n DELTamarker m SGRam Y MlINimum ABOWe seesssssseeeeeeeeneeenee nenne CALOCulate
174. E EENE HV Ix DE DUE E EET UE FETCh PMETer p FORMatDEXPort DSEbParaltor tret t mer rir e One nk rna Ere exce ri eie ERE Yero ix 9 S lE SBar eom D FORMatDEXPort TRAGSS ettet erre em ent er nr n de ER EXER CER Eae Y de HERR senses FORMat DATA INITiate lt n gt CONMeas INITiatesn CONTIDUOUS ecitr n t nn rnnt enter enr nr eere ne rec tenere INMMiate lt nF REFRESM m INITiatesn z SEQUuencerABORL osito iE Sepe eese E CER UO copscncenonns PS EYEAREEELAN EIE FEL ADT CD creates INITiatesn SEQuencerIMMedlate re rrt aeaiiai INI TiatesmsSEQuencer MODE niet tte piro oete A uter terea cente mesa INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer REFResh ALL ss INITiate n EIMMediate 9 err rtr rne tri Rr rrr Rr eroe thru eee epa een MIN UE ATOM AU ON RE E EET INPut AT Ten ation AU TO tpe Avett anes elect areca eats INPut AT Ten uation PROTection RESet oti is inen erc erc eee ces Lenina MINUTE ON INCU RERO LEE INPULGOU zl aro INPut DIQ CDEVice INPUEDIQ RANGE COUPIING ities seccesces coments cus ersicnsancencay castes EA EAE EE A SN EATE ENE INPGt DIO RANGE UPPER ss creo nter rt e TY eae eer ee pr e HO Nvv REC OR e EB ety INPut DIQG RANGe UPP r E AUTO cher inet vaeir ae rire het rare eere erae ER E Ee EYE INPut iDIQ RANGe UPPer
175. EL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL MIX 123 4567 Manual operation See Mixer S N on page 65 Programming Example Working with an External Mixer This example demonstrates how to work with an external mixer in a remote environ ment It is performed in the Spectrum application in the default layout configuration Note that without a real input signal and connected mixer this measurement will not return useful results a a a Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Activate the use of the connected external mixer SENS MIX ON Configuring basic mixer behavior Set the LO level of the mixer s LO port to 15 dBm SENS MIX LOP 15dBm Set the bias current to 1 mA SENS MIX BIAS LOW 1mA 9522 22 22 Configuring the mixer and band settings Use band V to full possible range extent for assigned harmonic 6 SENS MIX HARM BAND V SENS MIX RFOV ON Query the possible range SENS MIX FREQ STAR Result 47480000000 47 48 GHz SENS MIX FREQ STOP Result 138020000000 138 02 GHz Use a 3 port mixer type SENS MIX PORT 3 Split the frequency range into two ranges range 1 covers 47 48 GHz GHz to 80 GHz harmonic 6 average conv loss of 20 dB range 2 covers 80 GHz to 138 02 GHz harmonic 8 average conv loss of 30 dB SENS MIX HARM TYPE EVEN SENS MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON SENS MIX FREQ HAND 80GHz SENS
176. EModx n FM AFSPectrum TYBE 2 c itane roe a ere seda acu 2 286 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PM TDOMAain TYPE eee 287 SENSe JADEMod lt n gt PM AFSPectrum TYPE ec a aa a aa 287 SENSe ADEMod ne SPECtr m TYPE ucro EATE di 287 ISENSeJAVERagde Sms COME ici ioter ten ea qo Pena rin eR e RR ARA RR E 288 SENSe JAVERage lt n gt STATCSt gt cccccecec cece cee ae eee ee eee eee eeeteceteeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeesaeaeaeaaaaaaaaaaaaes 289 SENSeJAVBERagestss D YE nera a a a aa a aaa A 289 SENSe WINDow n DETector t F UNCtion 2 iret coca ens 289 SENSe WINDow lt n gt DETector lt t gt FUNCtion AUTO isses 290 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE Mode This command selects the trace mode In case of max hold min hold or average trace mode you can set the number of single measurements with SENSe SWEep COUNt Note that synchronization to the end of the measurement is possible only in single sweep mode In the Analog Demodulation application when you configure the traces for a window with a specific evaluation e g AM time domain the traces in all windows with the same evaluation are configured identically Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt Mode gt WRITe Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting AVERage The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Aver age Count
177. ETer p RELative MAGNitude on page 219 Input and Frontend Settings Use Ref Lev Offset If activated takes the reference level offset defined for the analyzer into account for the measured power see Shifting the Display Offset on page 90 If deactivated takes no offset into account Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt ROFFset STATe on page 224 Average Count Number of Readings Defines the number of readings averages to be performed after a single sweep has been started This setting is only available if manual averaging is selected Meas Time Average setting The values for the average count range from 0 to 256 in binary steps 1 2 4 8 For average count 0 or 1 one reading is performed The general averaging and sweep count for the trace are independent from this setting Results become more stable with extended average particularly if signals with low power are measured This setting can be used to minimize the influence of noise in the power sensor measurement Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe AVERage COUNt on page 223 Duty Cycle Sets the duty cycle to a percent value for the correction of pulse modulated signals and activates the duty cycle correction With the correction activated the sensor calculates the signal pulse power from this value and the mean power Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt DCYCle STATe on page 221 SENSe PMETer lt p gt DCYCle VALue o
178. F OVLD External generator enemies 39 44 IF Power THOJE ccce cem tenter See De ex oec emat 99 Trigger level remote esee 257 Impedance PREM O16 ese E edema 190 Setting ie maet Perte tedesca 54 92 Importing VQ data eison 1 Q data remote SOK OY eie anae A tei ip exea e eee Input Analog Baseband Interface B71 settings 69 B2000 et met ex pie ince Connector remote Coupling cte Coupling remote Digital Baseband Interface settings 66 OVER OAD S 30 Overload remote RUE T 54 Settings s 02 92 Signal parameters us cena teer oasis ro ean tex 30 Source Configuration softkey ssss 52 Source Radio frequency RF seses 53 Input sample rate ISR Digital I O 1 rette et extedise ees teet n Lenses Input sources Analog Baseband DIG tA Oh MM Inserting LimitlineValUBs tin one eee ten entro sues 159 InstallatiODa cci e ehe hom et etre ede Qu io deas 9 K Keys MKR 4 MKR gt MKR FUNCT Peak Search RUN CONT RUN SINGLE ene pte tits oae L Limit check Remote corno tenir cas sthcs Seb everest 344 LEirmitlimes 2 ise Te 0 Ecce Raed ath aces 153 Activating Deactivating eene 155 COlmTeblz o uon ee eret
179. F SENSON uicem eer rere eren rer eue 86 Unit 89 90 93 94 P E 89 93 Reference line External generator iter tren 40 Position external generator Shifting external generator Value external generator Reference marker ssnin rentre treten tre Reference trace External generator rentem 39 40 Storing as transducer factor external generator 40 79 Reference value POSIIOM RP Reflection measurement Exterhnal genetator 325 ceeceentiivecetecnesvecdscescasecty cas tren 35 Refreshing MSRA applicatioris 2 3 eret ree entes 109 MSRA applications remote 203 MSRT applications sssrin riores 109 MSRT applications remote 293 SOMKCY oiea Evite b tee end 109 Remote commands Basics ofi Syntax 35e erre 177 Boolean values Capitalization Character data 181 Data blocks 224191 Numeric values 2129 Obsolete 964 Optional keywords aa 178 Parameters cone VID EDD 181 SUMIE S c erii els eicaved i cie tape EARE 178 Res BW see RB ayarini s aereis cervis athe le 107 Resetting RF input protection seses terrent 30 188 Residual FM s nete hence rerit eue ue ease tua desi ro oda 26 Resolution bandwidth Seed BW uoi UE EN erii DILE 3 107 Restoring Channel settings Standard files ES Res lt Display rr tte nere eren Result displays Marker table
180. GPIB RDEV GEN ADDR 28 Activate the use of TTL synchronization to optimize measurement speed SYST COMM RDEV GEN LINK TTL Configuring the Measurement Activate the use of the external reference frequency at 10 MHz on the generator SOUR EXT ROSC EXT Activate external generator control SOUR EXT STAT ON Set the generator output level to 10 dBm SOUR EXT POW 10DBM Set the frequency coupling to automatic SOUR EXT FREQ COUP STAT ON Define a series of frequencies one for each sweep point based on the current frequency at the RF input of the analyzer the generator frequency is half the frequency of the analyzer with an offset of 100 kHz analyzer start 10 Hz analyzer stop 1 MHz analyzer span 999 99 KHz generator frequency start 100 005 KHz generator frequency stop 600 KHz generator span 499 995 KHz SOUR EXT FREQ FACT NUM 1 SOUR EXT FREQ FACT DEN 2 SOUR EXT FREQ OFFS 100KHZ Perform a transmission measurement with direct connection between the generator and the analyzer and wait till the end SENS CORR METH TRAN SENS CORR COLL ACQ THR WAI Retrieve the measured frequencies 10 Hz 600 kHz TRAC DATA X TRACE1 Retrieve the measured power levels 0 between 10 Hz and 100 kHz below generator minimum frequency nominal 5dBm as of 100 kHz TRAC DATA TRACE1 Retrieve the normalized power levels power offsets from calibration results Should be 0 fo
181. Hz Channel 32 Code Power Relative Subtype 0 1 ah Att 10dB Slot 0of3 ChannelType PILOT Li mj i Input Source Probes Probe I Probe Q Name RT ZD10 Serial Number 201241 Part Number 1410 4715 02 i i Not C cted Type Differential ot Connecte Common Mode Offset 0 0 v Common Settings For each possible probe connector Baseband Input Baseband Input Q the detec ted type of probe if any is displayed The following information is provided for each connected probe Probe name e Serial number e R amp S part number e Type of probe Differential Single Ended For more information on using probes with an R amp S FSW see the R amp S FSW User Manual For general information on the R amp S9RTO probes see the device manuals Common Mode OMSL une ite te tete ede ete ere e ETENA te tee ente cete iiia 72 MiekObURt Or ACHO Minasian ape ec cenas ce racer scu te e eno ce eoe eon rs Oeo ee ce deseo E scuba irs 72 Input and Frontend Settings Common Mode Offset Sets the common mode offset The setting is only available if a differential probe is connected to the R amp S FSW If the probe is disconnected the common mode offset of the probe is reset to 0 0 V For details see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and 1 Q Input User Manual Remote command SENSe PROBe p SETup CMOF set on page 214 Microbutton Action Active R amp S probes except for RT ZS10E have a configurable microbutton on the p
182. IB Address TCP IP Address on page 74 Source Calibration The following commands are required to activate the calibration functions of the exter nal tracking generator However they are only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 230 Remote commands exclusive to source calibration DISPlay WINDow n TRACe st Y SCALe RVALue esses 233 SENSe CORRection COLLect AGQuitre 2 21 22 2 erit Leire tu vaeoser e aL at cv puma ccce rias 234 ISENSe TCORRecthorm MEBTEHGOO ios ataca tere eade Base e EAEE EAR EMRANATRR 234 SENSeIGORRectioniREGall dirii ionii 2 anpra aaeain a paradie iaa e Ra Rodas 235 ISENSeTCORRBeclohES DA Pe he aoctor ctv ie mated eee ra sede ope eunte Coetu caa 235 SENSe CORRection TRANsducer GENerator sssssssseseseeeeeene rennen 236 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue Value The command defines the power value assigned to the reference position in the grid for all traces t is irrelevant For external generator calibration measurements requires the optional External Gen erator Control this command defines the power offset value assigned to the reference position Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt Value gt RST 0 dBm coupled to reference level Example DISP TRAC Y RVAL 20dBm Sets the power value assigned to the reference position to 20 dBm Manual operation Se
183. IMit k LOWer MODE on page 347 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer MODE on page 350 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DOMain on page 345 Y Axis Describes the vertical axis on which the data points of the limit line are defined Includes the following settings Level unit e Scaling mode absolute or relative dB values Relative limit values refer to the reference level Limit type upper or lower limit values must stay above the lower limit and below the upper limit to pass the limit check Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UNIT on page 349 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer SPACing on page 348 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer SPACing on page 351 Data points Each limit line is defined by a minimum of 2 and a maximum of 200 data points Each data point is defined by its position x axis and value y value Data points must be defined in ascending order The same position can have two different values Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA on page 345 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer DATA on page 346 CALCulate n LIMit k UPPer DATA on page 349 6 5 Zoom Functions Insert Value Inserts a data point in the limit line above the selected one in the Edit Limit Line dia log box Delete Value Deletes the selected data point in the Edit Limit Line dialog box Shift x Shifts the x value of each data point horizontally by the
184. IQ FULLscale LEVel on page 209 Frequency The center frequency of the input signal is configured in the Frequency tab of the Input Frontend dialog box gt To display this dialog box do one of the following e Selectthe Input Frontend button in the Analog Demodulation Overview and Switch to the Frequency tab e Selectthe FREQ key and then the Frequency Config softkey Input and Frontend Settings npu cade Input Source Power Sensor Amplitude Frequency Center 13 25 GHz EG 0 1 Demod BW Conter MEQUON CD 96 Center Frequency StGpSIZG Loo ete e er ee ee added lips e a gts stasis 96 Center frequency Defines the center frequency of the signal in Hertz The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 SpaNmin 2 S feenter fmax SPAN min 2Z fmax and span i depend on the instrument and are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 240 Center Frequency Stepsize Defines the step size of the center frequency The step size can be coupled to the demodulation bandwidth or it can be manually set to a fixed value 0 1 Demod Sets the step size for the center frequency to 10 of the demodula BW tion bandwidth This is the default setting 0 5 Demod Sets the step size for the center frequency to 50 96 of the demodula BW tion bandwidth X Demod Sets the step size for the center fr
185. Importing External Mixer irisi 62 Manh agilig 2 i rhe rnt trennt etes 61 Mixer type remote control 201 Saving External Mixer xiir tiine 66 Selecting remote control 201 Shifting values External Mixer sss 66 Values External Mixer eee 65 Copying Measurement channel remote s 182 Coupling Automatic external generator 42 76 Frequencies external generator sssss 41 Input remote 188 Manual external generator ssssssssss 76 Meier e S 103 D Data acquisition MSRA MSRT iioii rites ten 105 249 Remote CODlIOl uci eere Pene liu 249 SENDIS vnia EE 105 Data format ASCI dosita ceea a Binary ecce DB per division SCAM G eer TM 120 DBW see Demodulation bandwidth ssss 11 DC offset Analog Baseband B71 remote control 210 Decimal separator ye dep T 140 Deemphasis filter imc e eee ts 119 Remote control issiskirt i 272 273 Deleting Limit line values s 159 Settings filas an uar 50 Standards 50 Delta markers we 142 DG TIMING P 142 Demodulation AF spectrum 114 Configuration va 110 Display ertt tree t nnne 110 Filter types 27 106 ise m E 24 Relative remote control 279 Relative remote 278
186. LCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt STATe on page 353 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC LIM3 TRAC2 CHEC ON Switches on the limit check for limit line 3 on trace 2 Manual operation See Traces to be Checked on page 155 Checking the Results of a Limit Check CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CLEar IMMediate ccccceceeeececeeeeceeaeeee eee eene 354 CAL Culate sms Mite PAN m 354 11 8 2 4 Analyzing Results CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CLEar IMMediate This command deletes the result of the current limit check The command works on all limit lines in a measurement windows at the same time lt n gt lt k gt are irrelevant Example CALC LIM CLE Deletes the result of the limit check Usage SCPI confirmed CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL This command queries the result of a limit check To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 292 Return values lt Result gt 0 PASS 1 FAIL Example INIT WAI Starts a new sweep and waits for its end CALC LIM3 FAIL Queries the result of the check for limit line 3 Usage Query only SCPI confirmed Programming Example Using Limit Lines The following examples demonstrate how to work with limit lines in
187. Level gt Range 10 to 10 RST 0 Hz Default unit MHz Example TRIG LEV FM 10 kHz Sets the FM trigger threshold to 10 kHz Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 102 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel PM lt Level gt The command sets the level when PM modulated signals are used as trigger source For triggering to be successful the measurement time must cover at least 5 periods of the audio signal Parameters lt Level gt Range 1000 to 1000 RST 0 RAD Default unit RAD DEG Example TRIG LEV PM 1 2 RAD Sets the PM trigger threshold to 1 2 rad Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 102 TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe lt Type gt For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Parameters lt Type gt POSitive NEGative POSitive Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level rising edge NEGative Triggers when the signal drops to the trigger level falling edge RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Slope on page 103 TRIGger SEQuence SOURce Source This command selects the trigger source Configuring the Measurement For triggering with AF AM AMRelative FM and PM trigger sources to be successful the measurement time must cover at least 5 periods of the audio signal For details on trigger sources see Trigger Source on page 98 Note on external triggers
188. Manual operation See Delete Table on page 62 SENSe CORRection CVL COMMent Text This command defines a comment for the conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 201 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters Text Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL COMM Conversion loss table for FS 260 Manual operation See Comment on page 64 Configuring the Measurement SENSe CORRection CVL DATA lt Freq gt lt Level gt This command defines the reference values of the selected conversion loss tables The values are entered as a set of frequency level pairs A maximum of 50 frequency level pairs may be entered Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 201 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt Freq gt numeric value The frequencies have to be sent in ascending order lt Level gt Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL DATA 1MHZ 30DB 2MHZ 40DB Manual operation See Position Value on page 65 SENSe CORRection CVL HARMonic lt HarmOrder gt This command defines the harmonic order for which the conversion loss table is t
189. NCtion NDBDown STATe State This command turns the n dB Down marker function on and off lt n gt m are irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK FUNC NDBD STAT ON Turns the n dB Down marker on Manual operation See n dB down Marker State on page 153 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown TIME This command queries the position of the n dB down markers on the x axis when mea suring in the time domain lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 292 Return values lt Timex1 gt absolute position in time of the n dB marker to the left of the ref erence marker in seconds lt Timex2 gt absolute position in time of the n dB marker to the right of the reference marker in seconds Analyzing Results Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC NDBD ON Switches on the n dB down function INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC NDBD TIME Outputs the time values of the temporary markers Usage Query only Manual operation See n dB down Delta Value on page 153 Phase Noise Measurement Marker The following commands control the phase noise measurement marker function CALOC
190. NITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 292 11 8 1 2 Analyzing Results The unit depends on the application of the command Table 11 5 Analog demodulation measurements Parameter measuring function or result display Output unit AM result display lin R amp S FSW K7 dB log FM result display Hz lin R amp S FSW K7 dB log PM result display rad deg lin R amp S FSW K7 dB log RF result display dB Range Log or Range Linear R amp S FSW K7 Range Linear Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker or the fixed reference Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Usage Query only General Marker Settings The following commands control general marker functionality See also Fixed Reference Marker Settings on page 334 CAL Culatesm MARKersm 2C S9lZB tcc eei een eoa ate en ed eb ee eel e ree eau 321 GAL GulatesmsMARBRIKSESmed INK ci ertter Fa sae Go uw E Reve baa sung e avene Pe ava Era 322 p Xp MS 322 CALCulate n MARKer m X SSIZe lt StepSize gt This command selects the marker step size mode for all markers in all windows lt m gt n are irrelevant The step size defines the distance the marker moves when
191. NN ND n a a a a aa aA a 156 Crede NOW LNO e oie OH EUH Her UMEN 156 EELNE oer oet Eesti Det uta c Futuna e dede uan s ard tesa ead de pu D AVEC DUE USMAE 156 5 Ap C 156 Delete Lig perte tea Er rede der eter a estat creto dre etes ee beer d Ed 156 DISSDIS All NG SS oorr verde e cete ev EE Ced roten ceo AA Prata eor Crvetu Dro edd meo dea 156 Name The name of the stored limit line Se ee User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 154 Limit Line Settings and Functions Unit The unit in which the y values of the data points of the limit line are defined Compatibility Indicates whether the limit line definition is compatible with the current measurement settings Visibility Displays or hides the limit line in the diagram Up to 8 limit lines can be visible at the same time Inactive limit lines can also be displayed in the diagram Remote command CALCulate n LIMit k LOWer STATe on page 348 CALCulate n LIMit k UPPer STATe on page 351 CALCulate n LIMit k ACTive on page 352 Traces to be Checked Defines which traces are automatically checked for conformance with the limit lines As Soon as a trace to be checked is defined the assigned limit line is active One limit line can be activated for several traces simultaneously If any of the Traces to be Checked violate any of the active limit lines a message is indicated in the diagram Remote command CALCulat
192. Note For input from the optional Analog Baseband Interface using the baseband power trigger BBP the default drop out time is set to 100 ns to avoid unintentional trigger events as no hysteresis can be configured in this case When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 with an IF power trigger the drop out time defines the width of the robust width trigger By default itis set to 1 us For external triggers no drop out time is available when using the B2000 option For details see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual Remote command TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe on page 255 Coupling If the selected trigger source is IF Power or External CH3 you can configure the cou pling of the external trigger to the oscilloscope This setting is only available if the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension is active see B2000 State on page 80 DC 50 Q Direct connection with 50 Q termination passes both DC and AC components of the trigger signal DC 1 MO Direct connection with 1 MQ termination passes both DC and AC components of the trigger signal AC Connection through capacitor removes unwanted DC and very low frequency components Remote command TRIGger SEQuence OSCilloscope COUPling on page 207 Slope For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it When using the optional 2 GHz band
193. Q Analyzer channel named IQAnalyzer2 INSTrument CREate REPLace lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command replaces a measurement channel with another one Setting parameters ChannelName1 String containing the name of the measurement channel you want to replace lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 183 lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the name of the new channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 183 Example INST CRE REPL IQAnalyzer2 IQ IQAnalyzer Replaces the channel named IQAnalyzer2 by a new measure ment channel of type IQ Analyzer named IQAnalyzer Usage Setting only INSTrument DELete lt ChannelName gt This command deletes a measurement channel If you delete the last measurement channel the default Spectrum channel is activa ted Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel you want to delete A measurement channel must exist in order to be able delete it Example INST DEL IQAnalyzer4 Deletes the channel with the name IQAnalyzer4 Usage Event INSTrument LIST This command queries all active measurement channels This is useful in order to obtain the names of the existing measurement c
194. Q data from the Analog Demodulation application can be exported for further analysis in exter nal applications For details on importing and exporting I Q data see chapter 7 I Q Data Import and Export on page 162 MMEMory EOAD IQ STATO6 ire cerent ppan aani e Eon ku Ran ta ena AARAA iai Eea ARE nua 362 MMEMory STORe n dQ COMMenl 2 east cnopscn euo icri coa e ce ped oe HR Au e RR 363 MMEMernesTORSSmnsdO STATO eerte eren cen Dae a ERE a ER 363 MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command restores 1 Q data from a file Importing and Exporting I Q Data and Results Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the source file Example Loads IQ data from the specified file Usage Setting only Manual operation See Q Import on page 163 MMEMory STORe lt n gt IQ COMMent Comment This command adds a comment to a file that contains I Q data The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Comment gt String containing the comment Example MMEM STOR IQ COMM Device test 1b Creates a description for the export file MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores I Q data and the comment to the specified file Manual operation See Q Export on page 164 MMEMory STORe lt n gt lQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command writes the captured 1 Q data to a file The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant The file extension is iq tar By d
195. R amp S FSW K7 Analog Demodulation Option User Manual start 0 0 s 09 4 Result Summary Carrier Power Peak i FM 75 860 kHz 75 813 kHz 1001 pts 8 499 dB 98 suring 1173 9240 02 21 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Measuremen TH 865 dB Test amp Measurement User Manual This manual applies to the following R amp S FSW models with firmware version 2 30 and higher R amp S9 FSWS 1312 8000K08 R amp S FSW13 1312 8000K13 R amp S9FSW26 1312 8000K26 R amp S9FSWA3 1312 8000K43 R amp S FSW50 1312 8000K50 R amp S FSW67 1312 8000K67 R amp S FSW85 1312 8000K85 The following firmware options are described e R amp S FSW K7 1313 1339 02 2015 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 Email info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S FSW is abbreviated as R amp S FSW Products of the R amp S SMW family e g R2S SMW200A are abbreviated as R amp S SMW R amp S9FSW K7 Contents Contents MES ooo c 5 1 1 About this Manual iccic iccctcccsscccsccessccsescesss
196. REA eese 358 DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom STATe eesssesseeeeeneneneenens 359 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area for a multiple zoom To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm om 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Suffix zoom 1 4 Selects the zoom window Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range O to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 159 pum PEL S E User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 358 11 8 4 Analyzing Results DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe State This command turns the mutliple zoom on and off Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window If you turn off one of the zoom windows all subsequent zoom windows move up one position Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See Multiple Zoom on page 159 See Restore Original Display on page 160 See X Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 160 Co
197. REQuency ABSolute on page 274 SENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs FREQuency RELative on page 275 SENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs FREQuency MANual on page 274 Weighting Selects a weighting AF filter By default no weighting filter is active A weighted Switches on the A weighted filter The weighting filter is active in the following demodulation bandwidth range 100 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 800 kHz Demodulation CCITT Switches on a CCITT P 53 weighting filter The weighting filter is active in the following demodulation bandwidth range 20 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 MHz CCIR weigh Switches on the CCIR weighted filter The weighting filter is active in ted the following demodulation bandwidth range 100 kHz x demodulation bandwidth lt 3 0 MHz CCIR Switches on the CCIR unweighted filter which is the combination of unweighted the 20 Hz highpass and 23 kHz low pass filter The weighting filter is active in the following demodulation bandwidth range 50 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth x 1 6 MHz Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIT on page 272 SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIR UNWeighted STATe on page 272 SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIR WEIGhted STATe on page 272 SENSe FILTer lt n gt AWEighted STATe on page 271 Deemphasis Activates a deemphasis filter with the given time constant Sometimes a modulated signal is extorted by a pre emphasis filter before transm
198. RF Spectrum window b Press the SPAN key c Select the Full Span softkey MultiView 3 Spectrum Analog Demod z Freq 500 0 MHz 1AP Clrw Ref 0 00 Hz DC CF 500 0 MHz 1001 pts 5 RF Spectrum CF 500 0 MHz 100t pts Span 400 0 kHz 4 Result Summary Carrier Power 10 35 dBm Carrier Offset 667 85 Hz Peak Peak ipeak 2 RMS Mod Freq SINAD FM 50 031 kHz 48 717 kHz 49 374 kHz 34 941 kHz 10 000 kHz Fig 9 6 RF spectrum with demodulation bandwidth 400 kHz 11 Once the correct DBW has been determined you can replace the RF spectrum by the FM spectrum result display to analyze the spectrum of the FM signal Select the Display Config softkey and move an FM Spectrum window over the RF Spectrum window in the display SEES User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 172 R amp S FSW K7 Measurement Example Demodulating an FM Signal MultiView Analog Demod Ref Lev z Att 10dB AQT 10 ms z Freq 500 0 MHz w Ref 0 00 Hz DC CF 500 0 MHz 10 tpts 5 FM Spectrum AF CF 50 0 kHz 1001 pts AF Span 100 0 kHz 4 Result Summary Carrier Power 10 37 dBm Carrier Offset 651 49 Hz Peak Peak Peak 2 RMS Mod Freq SINAD THD FM 50 132 kHz 48 840 kHz 49 486 kHz 34 956 kHz 10 000 kHz 65 064 dB 66 515 dB Fig 9 7 FM spectrum and Result Summary including SINAD and THD values From the FM spectrum the SINAD and THD are also calculated and displayed in the Result Summar
199. RRection LRRANsqucer GENBFalOr iucucois a inar tore epit pater eere e NITE ERNE EEs SENSe GORRSction STATO tpe te ect ee top ge cotta ce dott lel mde SENSe FILTer n AOFF s SENSejJFIETer n AWEiIghted S TAT6 2 cono e ep runt reote RES geek Esa XR n eee VR KE R Ed SENSe FILTer n CCIR UNWeighted S TATe eese eese nenne enne nennen SENSe FIETersris CCIR WEIGhted STATS 3 ri recette eib co teet cide tania SENSE RIE er sti CCUM E SENSe FIETer n DEMPhasis TCONStari rere tnnt torrens SENSe FIETerstis DEMPhasisES TATe uo itecto e en crier erre cn e reve ru PEERS SENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs FREQuency MANual SENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs FREQuency ABSolute SENSe FIETerstis EIPASS S TATe oiii E et identi ertet OE erede paso sees ad SENSeZFIETersmns EPASs FREQUency MAMNUdl n coc euo tae mereri munt kien rito ore ke ena ER hend SENSe FIETer n L PASs FREQuency RELative tnter reet reet een SENSe FILTer n LPASs FREQuency ABSolute eese nennen SENSeEI Tersp s EPASSESTATO concrete rettet rere vet Rt EE ETEEN EATEN SENSe FREQuency CENTer SENSe FREQUSncy CENTO OESTEB uus correr pr reete rr x iren erae Seen EE Dd rr eer Eee aed SENSe FREQuency CENTS STER EINK 5 ucro uo ego a eene ee qoe EEEE EEE enue SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK EAG TOF ertet rr rn n ton n
200. Resh on page 293 INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer REFResh ALL on page 295 Remote commands exclusive to MSRT applications The following commands are only available for MSRT application channels cAECulatesmsiRTMS ALINeSPGON asiansa eei erue nx unen aaepe ni a aa 361 CALOCulate n RTMS ALINe VALue esses eene nennen ner rrn rere h nnne nennen 361 CALCulate lt n gt RTMS WINDOWSN gt IVAL ccccceececeeeececeecceeseseeseaseeecaaecceseseeseeeeeesneeeaees 362 SENSE IRIMS CAPTWNGIOFFSEL deti ae eec te Rn een tae dee Rennen aad ened 362 CALCulate lt n gt RTMS ALINe SHOW This command defines whether or not the analysis line is displayed in all time based windows in all MSRT applications and the MSRT Master lt n gt is irrelevant Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Manual operation See Show Line on page 161 CALCulate lt n gt RTMS ALINe VALue lt Position gt This command defines the position of the analysis line for all time based windows in all MSRT applications and the MSRT Master lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Position gt Position of the analysis line in seconds The position must lie within the measurement time pretrigger posttrigger of the MSRT measurement
201. SDATAA P Trigger2 GP2 SDATAO P Reserve1 GP3 SDATAA P Reserve2 not available for Digital 1 Q enhanced mode User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 100 Trigger Configuration Bit LVDS pin GP4 SDATAO P Marker1 GP5 SDATAA P Marker2 not available for Digital I Q enhanced mode Remote command TRIG SOUR GPO see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 259 FM AM PM RF Offline Trigger Source Triggers when the demodulated input signal exceeds the trigger level Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 259 Time Trigger Source Triggers in a specified repetition interval Remote command TRIG SOUR TIME See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 259 RF Power Trigger Source Defines triggering of the measurement via signals which are outside the displayed measurement range For this purpose the instrument uses a level detector at the first intermediate fre quency The input signal must be in the frequency range between 500 MHz and 8 GHz The resulting trigger level at the RF input depends on the RF attenuation and preampli fication For details on available trigger levels see the instrument s data sheet Note If the input signal contains frequencies outside of this range e g for fullspan measurements the sweep may be aborted and a message indicating the allowed input frequencies is displayed in the status bar A Trigger Offset Trigger Polarity and T
202. SW when the probe s microbut ton if available is pressed Currently a single data acquisition via the probe can be performed simply by pressing the microbutton Impedance and attenuation The measured signal from the probe is attenuated internally by the probe s specific attenuation For probe signals that are redirected to the RF path the attenuation is compensated using a transducer see Frequency sweep measurements on probe input on page 31 The reference level is adjusted automatically For analog baseband input the attenuation is compensated without a transducer In this case higher levels are available for the full scale level A fixed impedance of 50 Q is used for all probes to convert voltage values to power levels Basics on External Generator Control Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used for external genera tor control is provided here for a better understanding of the required configuration set tings 0 4 7 4 1 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output External generator control is only available in the Spectrum I Q Analyzer Analog Demodulation and Noise Figure applications e External Generator Connections essere nnne 33 e Overview of Supported Generators sesssssssssessssseeeeene nnns 36 e Generator Setup FI gs diode rt D elt vit d Y dd dx idi 38 e Calibration MECHANISM c ccccccccsccecssssessesseeecceseeeeescnsensssuas
203. SWEEP key or in the Sweep tab of the Data Acquisition dialog box gt To display this dialog box do one of the following e Select the Data Acquisition button in the Analog Demodulation Overview and switch to the Sweep tab e Select the SWEEP key and then the Sweep Config softkey Bandwidth Sweep DV EMIETHTSEQ 198 B 62 5 US Sweep Points 1001 Sweep Count Sjerejie miees 1 FM Time Domain Data Acquisition Continuous Sweep RUN CONT oit etes ettet a nade Aaaa aAA eere 108 Single sweep RUN SINGLE rt Er ER ORE ER ees 108 Continue Single SWOGD iride esee taper entes ep ke dente cu dua nd le SERA vo L2 Dane deep PARET UE 109 Refresh MSRA MSRT Only azteca car a P tle ef te dc 109 Measurement Time AQT iiieice iliis cet eeceecc ki eec Le reu EE Pe EE 109 Sweep POMS cC ELM 109 Sweep Average Count sssssssssssssssesesees baree iiaiai aiaiai enin sinn 109 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT After triggering starts the sweep and repeats it continuously until stopped This is the default setting While the measurement is running the Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN CONT key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Continuous Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel how
204. SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope STATe lt State gt Activates the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 Note Manual operation on the connected oscilloscope or remote operation other than by the R amp S FSW is not possible while the B2000 option is active Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 1 0 ON 1 Option is active OFF 0 Option is disabled RST 0 Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC ON Manual operation See B2000 State on page 80 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment STEP STATe Performs the alignment of the oscilloscope itself and the oscilloscope ADC for the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 The correction data for the oscilloscope including the connection cable between the R amp S FSW and the oscillo scope is recorded As a result the state of the alignment is returned Alignment is required only once after setup If alignment was performed successfully the alignment data is stored on the oscilloscope Thus alignment need only be repeated if one of the following applies e Anew oscilloscope is connected to the IF OUT 2 GHZ connector of the R amp S FSW e Anew cable is used between the IF OUT 2 GHZ connector of the R amp S FSW and the oscilloscope e Anew firmware is installed on the oscilloscope Return values lt State gt Returns the state of the second alignment step ON 1 Alignment was successful OFF 0 Alignment was not yet performed succes
205. Some Rohde amp Schwarz signal generators support TTL synchronization when connec ted via GPIB The TTL interface is included in the AUX CONTROL connector of the External Generator Control option When pure GPIB connections are used between the R amp S FSW and the signal genera tor the R amp S FSW sets the generator frequency for each frequency point individually via GPIB and only when the setting procedure is finished the R amp S FSW can measure the next sweep point For generators with a TTL interface the R amp S FSW sends a list of the frequencies to be set to the generator before the beginning of the first sweep Then the R amp S FSW starts the sweep and the next frequency point is selected by both the R amp S FSW and the gen erator using the TTL handshake line TRIGGER The R amp S FSW can only measure a value when the generator signals the end of the setting procedure via the BLANK signal Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates than pure GPIB control because the frequency stepping of the R amp S FSW is directly coupled with the frequency stepping of the generator Reverse sweep The frequency offset for automatic coupling can be used to sweep in the reverse direc tion To do so define a negative offset in the external generator measurement configu ration Note that the frequency is defined as the unsigned value of the equation thus a negative frequency is not possible Example Example f
206. Standard Settings You can configure the Analog Demodulation application using predefined standard set tings This allows for quick and easy configuration for commonly performed measure ments For details see chapter 5 1 Configuration According to Digital Standards on page 48 For an overview of predefined standards and settings see chapter A 1 Predefined Standards and Settings on page 367 SENSe ADEMod n PRESet S TANdard ccena 186 SENSe JADEMod lt n gt PRESet REST 0 e ccccccecececcecececaeaeaeeeaaaaeeeeeteseteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaeed 187 ISENSeJADEModgsnsPRESSESTORS eere trttre tti edt eroe eb pa dat Gaeta 187 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PRESet STANdard Standard This command loads a measurement configuration Standard definitions are stored in an xml file The default directory for Analog Demodu lation standards is C Nr sNinstrNuser predefined MAdemodPredefined lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Standard String containing the file name If you have stored the file in a subdirectory of the directory men tioned above you have to include the relative path to the file Return values Standard The query returns the name of the currently loaded standard Manual operation See Load Standard on page 50 Configuring the Measurement SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PRESet RESTore This command restores the default configurations of predefined Analog Demodulation standar
207. TA lt LimitLinePoints gt This command defines the vertical definition points of a lower limit line lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt LimitLinePoints gt Variable number of level values Note that the number of vertical values has to be the same as the number of horizontal values set with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA If not the R amp S FSW either adds missing values or ignores surplus values The unit depends on CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UNIT on page 349 RST Limit line state is OFF Analyzing Results Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Data points on page 158 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer MARGin Margin This command defines an area around a lower limit line where limit check violations are still tolerated lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Margin gt numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB Manual operation See Margin on page 158 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer MODE Mode This command selects the vertical limit line scaling Parameters lt Mode gt ABSolute Limit line is defined by absolute physical values The unit is variable RELative Limit line is defined by relative values related to the reference level dB RST ABSolute Manual operation See X Axis on page 158 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer OFFSet Offset This command defines an offset for a complete lower limit line Compared to shifting the l
208. TRACe t MODE HCONtinuous essent nennen rennen DISPlay WINDowsn TRAGCe t SEL6CL rrr rere enr tte cr retta ri e rere rh tb ae adn DISPlay WINDowsn TRAGest Y SPAGCIIDg enira ener eco ir err ERE oben ex ERR reo eT eran nantes DISPlayEWINDowsri TRACestz Y SCALe trt trennt ttn rentre eren DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MODE esses ren rennnnen DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe PDlVision esses nenne DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel sese neret DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet essere 243 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALUGC ee eee cece cere cceee tee nnne aiidata DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue DISPlayEWINDBowsri7 TRAGe t S TAT6 iec eroe nr tnter rr nete terre DISPlay WINDowsn ZOOM AREA ntn nne neret iu crt ee ten t enhn ERR Ti n DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA essent nennen rennen DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom STATe sese nennen nnne DISPlay WINDowsn ZOOMY STATS6 iio itr ott cree ntt ri einn tae PNE OATES EXPorGWAVelornmiDISPlayOlf cces cues creo neon rae pene peo meneergeeu eene aes ep nk es I e EpL AMD
209. UNOS IS MR E EE 102 BT go 01 UNE RUE 102 ecenpe E M M 103 io aor J m 103 Tagger HOMO ec 103 Trigger Source In the Analog Demodulation application the next measurement can be triggered if the selected input signal exceeds the threshold specified using the Trigger Level setting see Trigger Level on page 102 Thus a periodic signal modulated onto the carrier frequency can be displayed It is recommended that the measurement time covers at least five periods of the audio signal Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 259 Free Run Trigger Source No trigger source is considered Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitely Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 259 External Trigger 1 2 3 Trigger Source Data acquisition starts when the TTL signal fed into the specified input connector meets or exceeds the specified trigger level See Trigger Level on page 102 Note The External Trigger 1 softkey automatically selects the trigger signal from the TRIGGER 1 INPUT connector on the front panel If the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 is active only External CH3 is supported For details see the Instrument Tour chapter in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Trigger Configur
210. YE ATE EY ERR A ERRARE 259 TRIGger SEQuence SLOPE cinan a dene en atten e E IDRRRaXM Pese ee REM NUR 259 TRIGger SEQuence S OU RGS eic pieetene naaar chant e RR ra cade Enea sucre aada raaa 259 TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTetVal 2 2222 Inte et rere euo e anas eu aaa ii 262 TRIGger SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the baseband power trigger event The command requires the optional Digital Baseband Interface or the optional Analog Baseband Interface Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 255 command for new remote control programs Parameters Period Range 150 ns to 1000s RST 150 ns Configuring the Measurement Example TRIG SOUR BBP Sets the baseband power trigger source TRIG BBP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe lt DropoutTime gt Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before a trigger is detected again For input from the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 using the baseband power trigger BBP the default drop out time is set to 100 ns to avoid unintentional trigger events as no hysteresis can be configured in this case Parameters lt DropoutTime gt Dropout time of the trigger Range O0sto10 0s RST Os Manual operation See Drop Out Time on page 102
211. a frequency of 1 GHz 11 1 6 2 Introduction Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down If the number you have entered is not supported e g in case of discrete steps the command returns an error Instead of a number you can also set numeric values with a text parameter in special cases e MIN MAX Defines the minimum or maximum numeric value that is supported e DEF Defines the default value e UP DOWN Increases or decreases the numeric value by one step The step size depends on the setting In some cases you can customize the step size with a corresponding command Querying numeric values When you query numeric values the system returns a number In case of physical quantities it applies the basic unit e g Hz in case of frequencies The number of dig its after the decimal point depends on the type of numeric value Example Setting SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ Query SENSe FREQuency CENTer would return 1E9 In some cases numeric values may be returned as text e INF NINF Infinity or negative infinity Represents the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 e NAN Not a number Represents the numeric value 9 91E37 NAN is returned in case of errors Boolean Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represen ted by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value
212. aining the name of the limit line Example CALC LIM1 COPY 2 Copies limit line 1 to line 2 CALC LIM1 COPY FM2 Copies limit line 1 to a new line named FM2 Manual operation See Copy Line on page 156 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt DELete This command deletes a limit line Usage Event 11 8 2 3 Analyzing Results Manual operation See Delete Line on page 156 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt STATe lt State gt This command turns the limit check for a specific limit line on and off To query the limit check result use CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL Note that a new command exists to activate the limit check and define the trace to be checked in one step see CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt TRACe lt t gt CHECk on page 353 lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC LIM STAT ON Switches on the limit check for limit line 1 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Disable All Lines on page 156 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt TRACe lt t gt CHECk lt State gt This command turns the limit check for a specific trace on and off To query the limit check result use CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL Note that this command replaces the two commands from previous signal and spec trum analyzers which are still supported however CALC LIM TRAC see the description of commands for compatibility in the R amp S FSW User Manual CA
213. aks to be determined Range 1 to 200 RST 50 Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE LIST SIZE 10 The marker peak list will contain a maximum of 10 peaks Manual operation See Maximum Number of Peaks on page 152 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT lt SortMode gt This command selects the order in which the results of a peak search are returned Parameters lt SortMode gt X Sorts the peaks according to increasing position on the x axis Y Sorts the peaks according to decreasing position on the y axis RST X Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE SORT Y Sets the sort mode to decreasing y values Manual operation See Sort Mode on page 151 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks STATe State This command turns a peak search on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE STAT ON Activates marker peak search Manual operation See Peak List State on page 151 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEeaks X This command queries the position of the peaks on the x axis The order depends on the sort order that has been set with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant Analyzing Results Return values lt PeakPosition gt Position of the peaks on the x axis The unit depends on the measurement Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEeaks Y This
214. al remote 259 External POWT eter ree eret nec 87 Holdoff 2 103 Holdoff Power sensor see 88 Hysteresis ens 102 Hysteresis Power sensor ssssssssssss 88 Level Power Sensor ives eret mnc 87 Offset eee vx 102 Offset value range 2 andes 27 Output 104 128 Power SONSOR eerte te rrt re d e erii eran 87 Remote control 204 SOLUS 5 oreet e n rsen rr e anria 97 SIOpB 22i 103 259 Slope Power sensor seen 88 Trigger level sa 102 External trigger remote 256 I Q Power remote 2257 IF Power remote 257 RF Power remote 21 259 Trigger SOUFGB ertet inerte 98 INE Sosun md aurea hat Donde ac eee nee 28 AM Offline x101 BB Power 100 Digital 1 Q 100 Exteitial ete t there enr eere een 98 External CHS trito trier 99 FM Offline 101 Free RUF incre rettet ie ere e erede 98 VO POWER m 99 IFHPOWGD vies n 99 PM Offline 101 Power Sensor 101 RF Offline 101 RF Power 5101 iuro D 98 Bho iot erue Erit ite ee t eter Ecce eite 101 Troubleshooting Demodulation bandwidth A Input overload 188 Overload external generator susssss 45 RF Speclr n ciet tino
215. al operation See Source State on page 75 SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet Offset This command defines a level offset for the external generator level Thus for exam ple attenuators or amplifiers at the output of the external generator can be taken into account for the setting Parameters lt Offset gt Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST OdB Example SOUR POW OFFS 10dB Sets the level offset of the external generator to 20 dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Source Offset on page 75 Interface Configuration The following commands are required to configure the interface for the connection to the external generator SOURce EXTermal ROSCIllator SOU Roe cs oorr unen etna ees 231 SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB RDEVice GENerator ADDRess esses 232 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator INT rface cccccesccessececeessccceaceesseeeeseaees 232 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator LINK cccccescccceesceesseseceeeececeaeceeseeeeeeanes 232 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator TYPE ccccessscceescecceeseceeseeeceenceeseeseceanes 233 SYSTem COMMunicate TCPip RDEVice GENerator ADDRESS cccececeeceeeeaeeeeeeeneneenenes 233 SOURce EXTernal ROSCillator SOURce Source This command controls selection of the reference oscillator for the external generator If the external reference oscillator is selected the reference signal must be connected to the rear panel
216. am er Pda vebd etes redd us 87 F Falling Slope Power sensor esee 88 File format Export Elles oit rr rji m e mem ent 312 Trace expOlt a cicer tete eterne octadins 312 File name i em E 49 Files Format VQ d ta ecce c terne dto ctns 369 l Q data binary XML rr nnno 373 I Q parameter XML ssssseeeeeen 370 Filters A weighted AF 1 2 entere ttis 118 AF CCIR AF CCITT AF apeos otra e eee rre te 118 Dernodulation cerent 26 27 106 High pass AF High pass remote 5 xt cota 189 High zpass RF Input iecit p teo 55 Low pass AF Weighting AF YIG remote c tives anaiai Fixed reference Bye 144 Remote control 5 caer en tasca nens ead 334 FM Offline SOfKOV inaina veneni Macc e eid rado cie nte 101 FM Spectrum Evaluation method 4 5 criar 17 FM Time Domain Evaluation method 2 2 niinc 14 Format Bip eet 312 Data remote eerte 305 307 308 see also File format ssssssssessee 312 Free Run TOJE et comi te eii mee pue xoc endende 98 Frequency CorifiguratiODiz ais cemere ret iv rna tha rx Ernest e e ego 114 Coupling power sensor eene 86 Deemphasis filter IB Ee C T M Deviation SCALING sosesc 120 External generator u nete marine dn tre dedgo 76 Power Sensor on iini
217. ame as FREQuency CENTer With a numeric suffix in the optional keyword DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe DISPlay ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 1 no suffix DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 4 Alternative Keywords A vertical stroke indicates alternatives for a specific keyword You can use both key words to the same effect Example SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution In the short form without optional keywords BAND 1MHZ would have the same effect as BWID 1MHZ SCPI Parameters Many commands feature one or more parameters If a command supports more than one parameter these are separated by a comma Example LAYout ADD WINDow Spectrum LEFT MTABle Parameters may have different forms of values e Numere Values inm vH Pa aivanacetais Fixe ist ave esp HE PRU vto eR la E REPERI EN 179 CESSIT a E T 180 e Charactef Da oaran enu Pete e Fes aaa aa rai au aa de dar ERR 181 Character SUMNIUS cime er enit ete eed o ede ro di et ene ecce esed 181 MBI Ge Wate a a eid sre cicaan as crea acest E rae anes aes 181 Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point or exponent In case of physical quantities you can also add the unit If the unit is missing the com mand uses the basic unit Example with unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ without unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1E9 would also set
218. andard settings file and if necessary adapt the measurement settings to your specific requirements For an overview of predefined standards and settings see chapter A 1 Predefined Standards and Settings on page 367 e Configuration According to Digital Standards eeseeseeeeeeee 48 e Configuration OVOrIVviBW ccce dossier eov ue a a XE Eee ua eet 50 p tand Frontend Setllgs ise eere eee t en c eer ip Rede 52 Trigger Cong LIES RE HEL 97 Data Acquisition cen e ett e d c edd cie nan 105 Demodulation DISHI Y ur etr am tbe ted i ode eR Eee ime 110 LEBP usus EE 110 e OUPS unatoceedeniecce ena aat eedre decida atr cd but tado d De Dra vd 127 Uere 131 5 1 Configuration According to Digital Standards Various predefined settings files for common digital standards are provided for use with the Analog Demodulation application In addition you can create your own settings files for user specific measurements For details on which settings are defined and an overview of predefined standards see chapter A 1 Predefined Standards and Settings on page 367 Configuration According to Digital Standards Digital standard settings are available via the Digital Standards softkey in the MEAS menu or the Overview Setup Standard M 49 L Selecting the Storage Location Drive Path Files
219. ange of the reference level is modified by the offset Parameters lt ReferenceLevel gt The unit is variable Range see datasheet RST 0 dBm Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Level on page 89 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Offset This command defines a reference level offset for all traces t is irrelevant Parameters Offset Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST OdB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Shifting the Display Offset on page 90 Configuring the Attenuation INPUEATTenballon sccdeexacacadieracediacdeshetdiausaesradcaceeraleaiadeaelasdddeevhccalaacdesadisadeasteataadesteiade 243 dy sitis uideo E 244 lu DeC 244 lzuscampisgioe R E 245 IPP EAGT STATE Em 245 INPut ATTenuation lt Attenuation gt This command defines the total attenuation for RF input Configuring the Measurement If an electronic attenuator is available and active the command defines a mechanical attenuation see INPut EATT STATe on page 245 If you set the attenuation manually it is no longer coupled to the reference level but the reference level is coupled to the attenuation Thus if the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level T
220. ani vua se ve v ae De a REP NA 315 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod AFRequency RESult sseessssess 308 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod AM RESult t RELative essssssess 309 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod AM RESUIt t CALCulate n2 MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod CARRier RESult esssseeeeeeeees 310 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod FERRor RESult t sse 310 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod FM RESult t RELative sssssssss 309 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod FM RESult t ssssseeeeneee 309 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod PM RESult t RELative sssssssss 309 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod PM RESult t essen 309 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod SINad RESult lt t gt CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod THD RESUlt t 2 311 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks ANNotation LABel S TATe eese 337 CALCulate n2 MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks COUNXE sssssssssssssseseeeeeeee ener 337 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks LIST SIZE 0 eccccccccsceeseseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeaeeeteneeeees CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPE aks SORT cccccc
221. annel performing the mea surement Example ABOR INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and immediately starts a new one Example ABOR WAI INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and starts a new one once abortion has been completed Usage Event SCPI confirmed INITiate lt n gt CONMeas This command restarts a single measurement that has been stopped using ABORt or finished in single sweep mode Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps The measurement is restarted at the beginning not where the previous measurement was stopped As opposed to INITiate lt n gt IMMediate this command does not reset traces in maxhold minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to continue measure ments using maxhold or averaging functions Suffix n irrelevant Usage Event Manual operation See Continue Single Sweep on page 109 INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous State This command controls the sweep mode for an individual measurement channel Note that in single sweep mode you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mode synchronization to the end of the measurement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous Sweep mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single sweep end synchronization For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual If the s
222. apture data Alter natively the internal trigger signal used by the R amp S FSW can be output for use by R amp S FSW K7 Measurement Basics eee other connected devices Using the same trigger on several devices is useful to syn chronize the transmitted and received signals within a measurement For details on the connectors see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual External trigger as input If the trigger signal for the R amp S FSW is provided by an external device the trigger sig nal source must be connected to the R amp S FSW and the trigger source must be defined as External for the R amp S FSW Trigger output The R amp S FSW can provide output to another device either to pass on the internal trig ger signal or to indicate that the R amp S FSW itself is ready to trigger The trigger signal can be output by the R amp S FSW automatically or manually by the user If it is provided automatically a high signal is output when the R amp S FSW has trig gered due to a sweep start Device Triggered or when the R amp S FSW is ready to receive a trigger signal after a sweep start Trigger Armed Manual triggering If the trigger output signal is initiated manually the length and level high low of the trigger pulse is also user definable Note however that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is ou
223. are corrected to comply with the range limits The value range for the offset depends on the selected generator The default setting is 0 Hz Offsets lt gt 0 Hz are indicated by the FRQ label in the channel bar Negative offsets can be used to define reverse sweeps Input and Frontend Settings For more information on coupling frequencies and reverse sweeps see chapter 4 7 4 7 Coupling the Frequencies on page 41 For more information on error messages and the channel bar see chapter 4 7 4 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 44 Remote command SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor DENominator on page 229 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor NUMerator on page 229 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency OFFSet on page 230 Result Frequency Start For reference only The start frequency for the generator calculated from the config ured generator frequency and the start value defined for the R amp S FSW Result Frequency Stop For reference only The stop frequency for the generator calculated from the config ured generator frequency and the stop value defined for the R amp S FSW Source Calibration Functions The calibration functions of the external generator are available in the Source Calibra tion subtab of the External Generator tab but only if external generator control is active see Source State on page 75 Ow zs Spectrum Input Source Power Sensor Tracking Generator H Measurement Configuration
224. are irrelevant Parameters lt Distance gt Distance of the temporary markers to the reference marker in dB For a positive offset the markers T1 and T2 are placed below the active reference point For a negative offset for example for notch filter measure ments the markers T1 and T2 are placed above the active ref erence point RST 6dB Example CALC MARK FUNC NDBD 3dB Sets the distance to the reference marker to 3 dB CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuency This command queries the position of the n dB down markers on the x axis when mea suring in the frequency domain lt n gt lt m gt are irrelevant Analyzing Results To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 292 Return values lt Frequency gt lt frequency 1 gt absolute frequency of the n dB marker to the left of the reference marker in Hz lt frequency 2 gt absolute frequency of the n dB marker to the right of the refer ence marker in Hz Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC NDBD ON Switches on the n dB down function INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC NDBD FREQ This command would return for example 100000000 200000000 meaning that the first marker
225. arker dialog box and vice versa Marker State Type Phase Noise Rererence Pelnt Fr 20 0 MHz 7 14 i t Norm ez Ma o 20 65 dBm Auto Peak Search ona Normas On iiu On jJ All Phase Noise Off For more information see chapter 6 3 3 Measuring Phase Noise on page 148 Phase Noise Measurement States 5 5 cn de rede d er 150 Switching All Phase Noise Measurements Off 151 Phase Noise Measurement State Activates or deactivates phase noise measurement at the marker position in the dia gram In the Analog Demodulation application this function is only available for normal mark ers If activated the normal markers display the phase noise measured at their current position in the marker table For details see chapter 6 3 3 Measuring Phase Noise on page 148 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise STATe on page 343 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise RESult on page 343 6 3 4 2 Working with Markers in the R amp S FSW Analog Demodulation application Switching All Phase Noise Measurements Off Deactivates phase noise measurement for all markers Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise STATe on page 343 Marker Peak List Configuration Access Overview gt Analysis gt Marker gt Peak List or MKR FUNC gt Marker Peak List In the Analog Demodulation application the search limits are not availabl
226. armonic order to be used should be odd even or both Which harmonics are supported depends on the mixer type Parameters lt OddEven gt ODD EVEN EODD RST EVEN Example MIX HARM TYPE ODD Manual operation See Harmonic Type on page 58 SENSe MIXer HARMonic LOW lt HarmOrder gt This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the low first range Parameters lt HarmOrder gt numeric value Range 2 to 61 USER band for other bands see band definition RST 2 for band F Example MIX HARM 3 Manual operation See Harmonic Order on page 58 SENSe MIXer LOSS HIGH Average This command defines the average conversion loss to be used for the entire high sec ond range Parameters Average numeric value Range 0 to 100 RST 24 0 dB Default unit dB Example MIX LOSS HIGH 20dB Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 59 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe HIGH lt FileName gt This command defines the file name of the conversion loss table to be used for the high second range Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the file Example MIX LOSS TABL HIGH MyCVLTable Configuring the Measurement Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 59 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW lt FileName gt This command defines the file name of the conversion loss table to be used for the low first range Parameters lt FileName gt String containing
227. astet sens eaae ette trae 303 LAYOuTAWINDOWSin gt RE PLACG M 303 Configuring the Result Display LAYout ADD WINDow lt WindowName gt lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt This command adds a window to the display in the active measurement channel This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result To replace an existing window use the LAYout REPLace WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt Return values lt NewWindowName gt Example Usage Manual operation String containing the name of the existing window the new win dow is inserted next to By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow Direction the new window is added relative to the existing win dow text value Type of result display evaluation method you want to add See the table below for available parameter values When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result LAY ADD 1 BEL XTIM AM RELative TDOMain Adds an AM Time Domain display below window 1 Query only See AM Time Domain on page 13 See FM Time Domain on page 14 See PM Time Domain on page 15 See AM Spectrum on page 16 See FM Spectrum
228. asurement results This process is referred to as normalization and can be activated or deactiva ted as required If normalization is activated NOR is displayed in the channel bar next to the indication that an external generator is being used Ext Gen The normal ized trace from the calibration sweep is a constant 0 dB line as calibration trace reference trace 0 As long as the same settings are used for measurement as for calibration the normal ized measurement results should not contain any inherent frequency or power distor tions Thus the measured DUT values are very accurate Approximate normalization As soon as any of the calibration measurement settings are changed the stored refer ence trace will no longer be identical to the new measurement results However if the measurement settings do not deviate too much the measurement results can still be normalized approximately using the stored reference trace This is indicated by the APX label in the channel bar instead of NOR This is the case if one or more of the following values deviate from the calibration set tings coupling RBW VBW SWT reference level RF attenuation start or stop frequency output level of external generator detector max peak min peak sample etc frequency deviation at a maximum of 1001 points within the set sweep limits corre sponds to a doubling of the span Differences in level settings between
229. asurements SYST SEQ OFF 11 6 Configuring the Result Display The following remote commands are required to configure the screen display in a remote environment e General Window COMMANAGG ccccccccccescsssseseeseeeecescececeseneseeseaaaeaececeeeeeesenenes 296 e Working with Windows in the Display eseeem m 297 11 6 1 General Window Commands The following commands are required to configure general window layout independent of the application Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect on page 185 DpISPlawFORMBl ci aeta tu oen uror taper etae p Ee ar ex ER rac cxE nda ergo ere x exiguus 296 o Ed ERU Bre soe SIZE ie eaan na aaa aaa a a aiaa iaaa daaa diaa aAa 297 DISPlay FORMat lt Format gt This command determines which tab is displayed Configuring the Result Display Parameters lt Format gt SPLit Displays the MultiView tab with an overview of all active chan nels SINGle Displays the measurement channel that was previously focused RST SING Example DISP FORM SPL DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE Size This command maximizes the size of the selected result display window temporarily To change the size of several windows on the screen permanently use the LAY SPL command see LAYout SPLitter on page 300 Parameters Size LARGe Maximizes the selected window to full screen
230. at of the input signal Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt DataType gt IQ 1 Q IQ The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two input channels are required for each input signal one for the in phase component and one for the quadrature compo nent l The in phase component of the input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center fre quency is not 0 the in phase component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF I Q The quadrature component of the input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center fre quency is not 0 the quadrature component of the input signal is down converted first Low IF Q RST IQ Example INP IQ TYPE Q Manual operation See Q Mode on page 69 CALibration AIQ HATiming STATe State Activates a mode with enhanced timing accuracy between analog baseband RF and external trigger signals For more information see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual Parameters State ON OFF 1 0 ON 1 The high accuracy timing function is switched on The cable for high accuracy timing must be connected to trigger ports 1 and 2 OFF 0 The high accuracy timing function is switched off RST OFF Example CAL AIQ HAT STAT ON Manual operation See High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband RF on page 70 11 4 2 5 Configuring Dig
231. ate gt ON OFF 1 0 RST OFF Example CONF ADEM RES PM DET2 STAT ON Activates relative demodulation for the negative peak detector CONF ADEM RES UNIT PCT Defines the unit for relative values as percent CONF ADEM RES PM DET2 REF 1 415 Sets the reference value for the negative peak detector to 1 415 96 CONF ADEM RES PM DET2 MODE AVER Sets the negative peak detector to average mode CONF ADEM RES PM DET2 REF MEAS Sets the reference value for the negative peak detector to the average of the currently calculated value and the previous refer ence value Manual operation See State on page 126 Configuring the Measurement CONFigure ADEMod RESults AM DETector lt det gt REFerence MEAStoref CONFigure ADEMod RESults FM DETector lt det gt REFerence MEAStoref CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector lt det gt REFerence MEAStoref Sets the reference value to be used for relative demodulation results to the currently measured value for all relative detectors If necessary the detectors are activated A reference value 0 would provide infinite results and is thus automatically corrected to 0 1 Suffix det irrelevant Example See CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector det STATe on page 278 Usage Event Manual operation See Meas Reference on page 126 CONFigure ADEMod RESults AM DETector l
232. atic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Offset Resul requency Ott coit deret t draco d d c arc Det bet Result Erequetnioy SHOP ierit herba quer aede pex EPFL Eae ER YE IA Ere aka aaan Source State Activates or deactivates control of an external generator Remote command SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 230 Source Power The output power of the external generator The default output power is 20 dBm The range is specified in the data sheet Remote command SOURce EXTernal POWer LEVel on page 230 Source Offset Constant level offset for the external generator Values from 200 dB to 200 dB in 1 dB steps are allowed The default setting is 0 dB Offsets are indicated by the LVL label in the channel bar see also chapter 4 7 4 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 44 Input and Frontend Settings With this offset attenuators or amplifiers at the output connector of the external gener ator can be taken into account for the displayed output power values on screen or dur ing data entry for example Positive offsets apply to an amplifier and negative offsets to an attenuator subsequent to the external generator Remote command SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet on page 231 Source Frequency Coupling Defines the frequency coupling mode between the R amp S FSW and the generator For more information on coupling frequencies see chapter 4 7 4 7 Coupling the Fre que
233. ating remote 189 Z Zero Phase Reference POSIION asise 113 Reference Position remote ssessss 265 Zeroing POWT SENSO i esie boe iit iore Len ee U UR Piu ode 85 Zooming Activating remote asies neient akian Area Multiple mode remote Area remote 2 erede petat egeta ratos dos IJeactlValilig disci om teer t tice ene visent KE Multiple mode Multiple mode remote REME ucc eroe Restoring original display Single mode Single mode remote sessesssss MUMS COMA A tet cave o eerte x e te Rr sen
234. ation External Trigger 1 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 1 INPUT connector External Trigger 2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 2 INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 104 External Trigger 3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Note Connector must be configured for Input in the Outputs con figuration see Trigger 2 3 on page 104 Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT2 TRIG SOUR EXT3 See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 259 External CH3 Trigger Source Data acquisition starts when the signal fed into the CH3 input connector on the oscillo Scope meets or exceeds the specified trigger level Note In previous firmware versions the external trigger was connected to the CH2 input on the oscilloscope As of firmware version R amp S FSW 2 30 the CH3 input on the oscilloscope must be used This signal source is only available if the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 is active see chapter 5 3 1 7 Settings for 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 on page 80 Note Since the external trigger uses a second channel on the oscilloscope the maxi mum memory size and thus record length available for the input channel 1 is reduced by half For details see the oscilloscope s data sheet and documentation Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT s
235. ayEWINDowesns ZOOM STATe iriiii ao cnet eate eroe ova c E ck aa can aas 358 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm IN A Span 25 0 MHz CF 2 000519931 GHz 498 pts 1 24 MHz Span 12 435008666 MHz 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 159 uum PED INNEN User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 357 R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements R r BRE RU EEE Sars DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe State This command turns the zoom on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode Manual operation See Single Zoom on page 159 See Restore Original Display on page 160 See R Deactivating Zoom Selection mode on page 160 11 8 3 2 Using the Multiple Zoom DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom A
236. be available to perform the same task In this case the procedure using the touchscreen is described Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse The alternative procedure using the keys on the instrument or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard operating procedures The term select may refer to any of the described methods i e using a finger on the touchscreen a mouse pointer in the display or a key on the instrument or on a key board Notes on Screenshots When describing the functions of the product we use sample screenshots These screenshots are meant to illustrate as much as possible of the provided functions and possible interdependencies between parameters The screenshots usually show a fully equipped product that is with all options instal led Thus some functions shown in the screenshots may not be available in your par ticular product configuration Starting the Analog Demodulation Application 2 Welcome to the Analog Demodulation Application The R amp S FSW K7 AM FM PM measurement demodulator option converts the R amp S FSW into an analog modulation analyzer for amplitude frequency or phase modulated signals It measures not only characteristics of the useful modulation but also factors such as residual FM or synchronous modulation The digital signal processing in the R amp S FSW used in the Spectrum applicat
237. be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 201 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt PortType gt 2 3 RST 2 Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL PORT 3 Manual operation See Mixer Type on page 65 SENSe CORRection CVL SELect lt FileName gt This command selects the conversion loss table with the specified file name If file name is not available a new conversion loss table is created This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the file Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Manual operation See New Table on page 62 See Edit Table on page 62 See File Name on page 64 SENSe CORRection CVL SNUMber lt SerialNo gt This command defines the serial number of the mixer for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Configuring the Measurement Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 201 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt SerialNo gt Serial number with a maximum of 16 characters Example CORR CVL S
238. be selected freely within the overlapping frequency range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 191 Parameters Frequency numeric value Example MIX ON Activates the external mixer MIX FREQ HAND 78 0299GHz Sets the handover frequency to 78 0299 GHz Configuring the Measurement Manual operation See Handover Freq on page 57 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STARt This command queries the frequency at which the external mixer band starts Example MIX FREQ STAR Queries the start frequency of the band Usage Query only Manual operation See RF Start RF Stop on page 57 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STOP This command queries the frequency at which the external mixer band stops Example MIX FREQ STOP Queries the stop frequency of the band Usage Query only Manual operation See RF Start RF Stop on page 57 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESet This command restores the preset frequency ranges for the selected standard wave guide band Note Changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the PRESET function Use this command to restore the predefined band ranges Example MIX HARM BAND PRES Presets the selected waveguide band Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Band on page 58 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue Band This command selects the external mixer band The query returns the currentl
239. by inter polation Linear interpolation is performed if the table contains only two values If it con tains more than two reference values spline interpolation is carried out Outside the frequency range covered by the table the conversion loss is assumed to be the same as that for the first and last reference value The current configuration of the conversion loss function as described by the position value entries is displayed in the preview pane to the right of the table Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL DATA on page 200 Input and Frontend Settings Insert Value Inserts a new position value entry in the table If the table is empty a new entry at 0 Hz is inserted If entries already exist a new entry is inserted above the selected entry The position of the new entry is selected such that it divides the span to the previous entry in half Delete Value Deletes the currently selected position value entry Shift x Shifts all positions in the table by a specific value The value can be entered in the edit dialog box The conversion loss function in the preview pane is shifted along the x axis Shift y Shifts all conversion loss values by a specific value The value can be entered in the edit dialog box The conversion loss function in the preview pane is shifted along the y axis Save The conversion loss table is stored under the specified name in the C r_s instr user cv1 directory of the instrument 5 3 1 3 Dig
240. c res reca Rte E E iain ieee 238 OUTPUEMRIGGEr lt pOMm DIRGCHON PE PR 263 OUTPut TRIGgersport lEVel ucns ct rt rtr Rer eher een ce eere Eee een PER R OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe OUTPut TRIGgersport PULSe IMMedlialte n raro a cr pere rete hb Hg teet n tix EPET 264 OUTP t TRIGgersport PULSe lENGIh itio tette cp eate cette ee ve toe d 264 READ PME TENS PRT PEERS 221 SOURCE EX Temal FREQUENCY ro onere renren aE AE T EEEE A E EEE Ta SOURce EXTerral FREQuency COUPling S TATe 1 notte tnnt ter tnn nnns SOURce EXTernal E REQuency OFFS etarra eaaa riaa aiaa ENa AFNA EEN SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor DENominator SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor NUMeraltor trn ene SOURce EXTernal POWer LEVWVel 2 inti rt tree hr rere n era trt erae tenni ink eX ERE eR dE SOURce EXTermalROSGIllator SOU RCS ra s iren eei opea ore tei pe pong rE EAEE ovr rege SOURce EXTernal STATe eere tn rrt hn reir regc n D E X Re Fe NE ates SOURce POWer EEVel IMMediate OFFSetl rrr th tre ern tinci tne SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB RDEVice GENerator ADDRess eese SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator INTerface esessssesseseeeeeennenennnen nennen SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator LINK ati ttr ir tn kin rr ren exSTem cOMMunicate RDEVice GENerator TY PE eer roi erra torpe pe EEEa oo erra SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCill
241. carrier frequency A phase noise measurement consists of noise density measure ments at defined offsets from the carrier the results are given in relation to the carrier level dBc In the Analog Demodulation application phase noise measurement markers are avail able for the AF Spectrum result displays For the FM Spectrum and PM Spectrum result displays the phase deviation in rad equals the phase noise at the marker posi tion For AM Spectrum displays the marker result equals the amplitude noise at the marker position The noise power density is measured at each marker for which the phase noise func tion is activated and set in relation to the measured carrier power A reference marker is not required In the marker table display the phase noise is indicated as the marker function result Marker Function Configuration Access Overview Analysis Marker Functions Phase Noise or MKR FUNC gt Select Marker Function Special marker functions can be selected via the Marker Function dialog box 0 The fixed reference marker is described under Defining a Fixed Reference on page 144 6 3 4 1 Working with Markers in the R amp S FSW Analog Demodulation application Select Marker Function Reference Fixed All Functions Off Traces Marker Marker Functions Peak List Lines ele 2 AM Spectrum Not all marker functions are available for all evaluations The following table indicates
242. ccce cee ee eee ee ee ee eee ee eeceteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesesaeaeaaaaeaaaeenenenes 252 SENSeIBANDwidth BWIDIhIBENMamd soi pe tae ta eaa eue tt en oat nth d eene 252 SENS amp BANDwWidth BWIDIh DEMOG TYPE icit coat eve nece ona eye eie 252 SENSE JBANDwidIBERESOlulon iot rer en yt RP en rarae ront re rine 252 SENSeTSWEGD C ODNU atr eee ace rad exe casi Enel eec tus vue tc dus tese deat cniin vd 253 SENS amp e SWEep POINIS 1 teo aiia no rio edet reves uses eda c LEER ui natin aa ees 253 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt MTIMe Time This command defines the measurement time for analog demodulation lt n gt is irrelevant Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt Time gt RST 62 5us Example ADEM MTIM 62 5us Sets the measurement time to 62 5 us Manual operation See Measurement Time AQT on page 106 SENSe JADEMod lt n gt RLENgth This command returns the record length set up for the current analog demodulation measurement lt n gt is irrelevant Example ADEM RLEN Returns the current record length Usage Query only SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SET lt SampleRate gt lt RecordLength gt TriggerSource lt TriggerSlope gt lt OffsetSamples gt lt NoOfMeas gt This command configures the analog demodulator of the instrument lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt SampleRate gt numeric value The frequency at which measurement values are taken fro
243. cceesseeeeeseeeceeeaeeceeaeeeseeeeeesneeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeseaee CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEaks STATe sss eee e tnter CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks IMMediate m CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion FPEeaks X sessi eese nenne ennt et a NENS sena 338 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtiIon FPE aks Y 2 0 0 cceccceceeceeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeeesecaeeeeeeaeeesenaeeeseneeetseaees 339 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDOWN 2 ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeseaeeeeseaeeeeesaeeeeeaeeseeaeees CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuency CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown QFACtOI ccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesenaeeeeecaeeeseeneeeenaees 341 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown RESUIt 0 ccccccccceeeeeeececeeeeceneeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseieeeeeee 341 CALCulate n2 MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown STATe esses eene ennt ennt netten 342 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown TIME sssesssssssssssseseneeneeeee nennen nennen 342 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise RESUIt ccccccesceeecneeceeneeeeeeaeeeeenaeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeetenaee 343 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise STATe GALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion REFerence retra nete t enr x tn n nan CAL Culatesn MARKer m EINIS incon eer pb ee eeu eu ere ce
244. ccncreesseccnsvved seaceesed inttr aine ARANNA SANESA NE 5 1 2 Documentation Overview eeeeeeeeeeenee eene eene nnne nn nnne nnn nennen nn nnns 6 1 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation eeeeeeneeeeeeenn nnn 7 2 Welcome to the Analog Demodulation Application 9 2 1 Starting the Analog Demodulation Application eeeeeennnee 9 2 2 Understanding the Display Information eee 10 3 Measurements and Result Displays esee 13 4 Measurement Basile ntn treu tnu tini aa aana 24 4 1 Demodulation PrOCoOSsS niin irren aranan RR RR ARRRR ARA RRERR P RR RR RARRRR RR 24 4 2 Demodulation Bandwidth eeeeeeeeeeeeeenne enne nnnm nennen 26 4 3 Sample Rate and Demodulation Bandwidth esses 27 AA NEM m 28 AS AF Filters inei ee e c een acre aa a e adn 29 4 6 Time Domain ZoOOm 22iirnrrnue inane cectestee sik u nnns si sunu ann maa inan RENTAS ANNEANNE 29 4 7 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output secessus 30 4 8 Analog Demodulation in MSRA MSRT Operating Mode 46 NE uUI spD eM 48 5 1 Configuration According to Digital Standards eee 48 5 2 Configuration Overview
245. ceceseeceseeeecaaceeseeeeeeseeeeseneeesees 347 GALGulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer SHIFt 02 c sccccsseetcceseccteescncs caescoueaccteasecnasantsaeseeceeaseces 347 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer SPACIng cccceceeeeeeeeeeeee cece eaeaeaeaeaeaeaeeceeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 348 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer STATC c0cccccecccccecccesesceseseeceseacecesseeseeseeeceneeesseseeeenees 348 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer THREShOIG 0cccccessececescceceeseeesseseceeeececeasecesseseceeneees 348 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt NAME cccccesescecescccceesceesseseceesececeasecesseseeeeaeeeeeseeeseeeesseneees 349 CAL GulatesmsbIMIESkSU INIT edite ia yxp eade et ed ea ere acer eae d dete setate beers 349 CAL Culate n EIMit k UPPer DATA s rino iniaiaiai 349 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer MARGIN ccccccccessececesececseeceeeseeceaeseetaneeseceeeesaneaes 349 CAL CulatesmsLMIEKSUPPeIMODSE ecccdecens cicaveacessasncaeusveesanceuedaacecdesiasiaeaceeseaacdcceasiyle 350 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer OFFSet cccccseccceescceceecececseeeceeceeeceaceceseseeseaeeeesaneeeees 350 GALGulat lt n LIMitek gt UPPer S Hl Fb iiie crusade ecacnsadeesccaassnacnadeiacdaasceesseteusdeeacuasse 350 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer SPACING 0 0 e eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaeaeaaaaaeaeeeeeeseneeeees 351 CAL CulatesmnLIMiSks DU PPer STAT ated endure acing maitr
246. center of diagram while in AF frequency domains it is defined at the position 100 top of diagram E SSE User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 174 10 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Mea surement If the results do not meet your expectations consider the following notes and tips to optimize the measurement Determining the demodulation bandwidth A frequent cause for measurement errors and false results is an incorrectly defined demodulation bandwidth DBW If the DBW is too large the actual signal takes up only a small part of the demodulated range That means that any noise or additional signal parts may be included in the measured results which are then false On the other hand if the DBW is too small part of the signal is cut off and thus not included in the calculation of the results An easy way to determine the required DBW is to display the RF spectrum of the input signal If the entire signal is displayed there and takes up most of the diagram width the DBW should be appropriate This procedure is demonstrated in the measurement example described in chapter 9 Measurement Example Demodulating an FM Signal on page 169 For further recommendations on finding the correct demodulation bandwidth see chap ter 4 2 Demodulation Bandwidth on page 26 Adjusting the displayed span Be aware that the span of the RF Spectrum display is not automatically increased for a wider DBW since it may be useful to display o
247. ctions for more complex tasks or alternative methods Measurement Examples Detailed measurement examples to guide you through typical measurement sce narios and allow you to try out the application immediately Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement Hints and tips on how to handle errors and optimize the measurement configura tion Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements Remote commands required to configure and perform Analog Demodulation mea surements in a remote environment sorted by tasks Commands required to set up the environment or to perform common tasks on the instrument are provided in the main R amp S FSW User Manual Programming examples demonstrate the use of many commands and can usually be executed directly for test purposes List of remote commands Alphahabetical list of all remote commands described in the manual Index User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 5 Documentation Overview 1 2 Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FSW consists of the following parts e Printed Getting Started manual e Online Help system on the instrument e Documentation DVD with Getting Started User Manuals for base unit and firmware applications Service Manual Release Notes Data sheet and product brochures Online Help The Online Help is embedded in the instrument s firmware It offers quick context sen sitive access to the complete information needed for ope
248. cut off When the overload protection is activated an error message is displayed in the status bar INPUT OVLD and a message box informs you that the RF Input was discon nected Furthermore a status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register is set R amp S9FSW K7 Measurement Basics 4 7 2 4 7 3 In this case you must decrease the level at the RF input connector and then close the message box Then measurement is possible again Reactivating the RF input is also possible via the remote command INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet RF Input from the Analog Baseband Connector RF input can not only be taken from the RF INPUT connector on the R amp S FSW If the optional Analog Baseband Interface is installed and active for input an RF signal can be input at the BASEBAND INPUT I connector and redirected from there to the RF input path A transducer is activated to compensate for the additional path of the redir ected signal The signal is then processed as usual in the frequency and time domain as for any other RF input This is useful for example to perform frequency sweep measurements with single ended or differential active probes which can also be connected to the BASEBAND INPUT I connector Frequency sweep measurements on probe input You can perform RF measurements measurements in the time or frequency domain by connecting a probe to the BASEBAND INPUT I connector and switching the input source to th
249. cy deviation Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SPACing on page 248 AF Auto Scale Activates automatic scaling of the y axis for AF measurements RF power and RF spectrum measurements are not affected by the auto scaling Remote command SENSe ADJust SCALe Y AUTO CONTinuous on page 283 5 7 4 2 RF Evaluation Access Overview gt Demod Settings gt Scaling or Meas Setup gt Demod gt Scaling tab These settings are only available for RF evaluations and the result summary Demodulation Demod Spectrum Scaling Unit Scaling Logarithmic Range 100 dB by L2 Linear Percent E 1 Linear with Unit Ref Level Position 100 0 Absolute GSES Relative ETsT telife Eis2l 6 RF Time Domain Range Defines the displayed y axis range in dB The default value is 100 dB For Analog Demodulation measurements time domain scaling is defined in Hz default 500 kHz Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 247 Ref Level Position Defines the reference level position i e the position of the maximum AD converter value on the level axis in where 0 corresponds to the lower and 100 to the upper limit of the diagram Only available for RF measurements Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 248 Auto Scale Once Automatically determines the optimal range and reference level position to be dis p
250. d Interface Note Electronic attenuation is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 13 6 GHz In Auto mode RF attenuation is provided by the electronic attenuator as much as possible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required Mechanical attenua tion may provide a better signal to noise ratio however When you switch off electronic attenuation the RF attenuation is automatically set to the same mode auto manual as the electronic attenuation was set to Thus the RF attenuation may be set to automatic mode and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator if possible Both the electronic and the mechanical attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value For the R amp S FSW85 the mechanical attenuation can be varied only in 10 dB steps User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 91 Input and Frontend Settings If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed in the status bar Remote command INPut EATT STATe on page 245 INPut EATT AUTO on page 245 INPut EATT on page 244 Input Settings Some input settings affect the measured amplitude of the signal as well For details see chapter 5 3 1 Input Source Settings on page 52 Preamplifier Input Settings If the optional Preamplifier hardware is insta
251. d Providing Data Output Single ended and differential probes Both single ended and differential probes are supported as input however since only one connector is occupied by a probe the Input Configuration setting for the Analog Baseband input source must be set to Single ended for all probes see Input Con figuration on page 70 Availability of probe input Analog baseband input from connected probes can only be analyzed in applications that support I Q data processing and the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B7 1 such as the I Q Analyzer the Analog Demodulation application or one of the optional applications Frequency sweep measurements with probes Probes can also be used as an alternative method of providing RF input to the R amp S FSW In this case the probe must be connected to the BASEBAND INPUT con nector and the input is redirected to the RF input path see chapter 4 7 2 RF Input from the Analog Baseband Connector on page 31 As opposed to common RF input processing a transducer is activated before the common process to compensate for the additional path of the redirected signal Probe signals that are redirected to the RF input path can also be analyzed in the Spectrum application of the R amp S FSW base unit Then you can perform RF measurements measurements in the time or frequency domain on the input from a probe Microbutton action You can define an action to be performed by the R amp S F
252. d RESults FM DETector lt det gt REFerence lt RefValue gt CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector lt det gt REFerence lt RefValue gt Defines the reference value to be used for relative demodulation results and recalcu lates the results If necessary the detector is activated A reference value 0 would provide infinite results and is thus automatically corrected to 0 1 Suffix det 1 Positive peak 2 Negative peak 3 Average of positive and negative peaks PK 2 4 RMS Detector function used for relative demodulation Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt RefValue gt double value The unit depends on the demodulation type AM FM Hz PM depends on UNIT lt n gt ANGLe setting RST 1 0 Example See CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector det STATe on page 278 Manual operation See Reference Value on page 126 CONFigure ADEMod RESults AM DETector lt det gt STATe State CONFigure ADEMod RESults FM DETector lt det gt STATe State CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector lt det gt STATe State Activates relative demodulation for the selected detector If activated the demodulated result is set in relation to the reference value defined by CONFigure ADEMod RESults AM DETector lt det gt REFerence Suffix lt det gt 1 Positive peak 2 Negative peak 3 Average of positive and negative peaks PK 2 4 RMS Detector function used for relative demodulation Parameters lt St
253. d off This command requires the use of an R amp S NRP Z81 power sensor Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF 11 4 2 8 Configuring the Measurement Example PMET2 TRIG ON Switches the external power trigger on Manual operation See Using the power sensor as an external trigger on page 87 External Generator Control External generator control commands are available if the R amp S FSW External Genera tor Control option R amp S FSW B10 is installed For each measurement channel one external generator can be configured To switch between different configurations define multiple measurement channels For more information on external generator control see chapter 4 7 4 Basics on Exter nal Generator Control on page 32 e Measurement Configuratio e ccc stiches creta c tL AA 228 e Interface Conflgurallon u reete eee ed Rc 0a 231 Source CallbIatiQlk ui ioe bs oue oc rer re ER eR Re EXE ERE E Hebex er eee ts 233 e Programming Example for External Generator Control ssss 236 Measurement Configuration The following commands are required to activate external generator control and to con figure a calibration measurement with an external tracking generator SOURce EXTemalFRELGQUSRO 1 uecieicteie dtu tute zu oa neta appa eee haaa E ni Anaia ANENE mh 228 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency COUPling STATe L
254. d power sensor type e g NRP Z81 lt Interface gt Interface the power sensor is connected to always USB lt SerialNo gt Serial number of the power sensor assigned to the specified index Example SYST COMM RDEV PMET2 DEF NRP Z81 123456 Assigns the power sensor with the serial number 123456 to the configuration Power Sensor 2 SYST COMM RDEV PMET2 DEF Queries the sensor assigned to Power Sensor 2 Result Or a NRP Z81 USB 123456 The NRP Z81 power sensor with the serial number 123456 is assigned to the Power Sensor 2 Manual operation See Select on page 85 Configuring the Measurement Configuring Power Sensor Measurements CALibrauom PME Ter p gt ZERO AUTO ONCE ueste deni enne tee ee hereto oan 219 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude eeeeeeseeseeeeeenennenennne 219 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative MAGNitude AUTO ONCE cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneee 220 CALCulate lt n gt PMETer lt p gt RELative STAT6 2 cscccceeneeeceeeeeeeneseeeseaeaeaeaeaeaeaeanenenees 220 PET CHIPMEV cc 220 READ PMETGQPSNT Los ccr rite Mmi au EEDA 221 SENSe PMETer lt p gt DCYCle STATE 2 2 ccccccececeeee cece caeeeaaeaeaeeaeeeaeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaeed 221 SENSe PMETer p DCYGOle VALUue crece te erectae a to pua ap RE E nq raa 221 SENSES FME Ters p gt FREQUENCY cer
255. d selects the start time for the zoomed display of analog demodulated measurements in the specified window The maximum possible value depends on the measurement time which is set and can be queried with the SENSe ADEMod lt n gt MTIMe command 11 4 8 3 Configuring the Measurement If the zoom function is enabled the defined number of sweep points are displayed from the start time specified with this command Parameters lt Time gt Range 0 s to measurement time zoom length RST 0s Example ADEM ZOOM STAT ON Switches on the zoom function ADEM ZOOM STAR 500us Sets the starting point of the display to 500 us Manual operation See Start on page 113 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM STATe State The command enables or disables the time domain zoom function for the analog demodulated measurement data in the specified window If the zoom function is enabled the defined number of sweep points are displayed from the start time specified with SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM STARt on page 267 If the zoom function is disabled data reduction is used to adapt the measruement points to the number of points available on the display Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example ADEM ZOOM ON Switches on the zoom function Manual operation See State on page 112 Configuring the Demodulation Spectrum The demodulation spectrum defines which span of the demodulated data is evaluated WE
256. d to trigger a measurement Trigger port 2 is configured as output if the high accuracy timing option is active Make sure not to activate this option if you use trigger port 2 in your measurement setup When you first enable this setting you are prompted to connect the cable for high accuracy timing to trigger ports 1 and 2 If you cancel this prompt the setting remains disabled As soon as you confirm this prompt the cable must be in place the firmware does not check the connection In remote operation the setting is activated without a prompt User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 70 5 3 1 5 Input and Frontend Settings For more information see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and l Q Input User Manual Remote command CALibration AIQ HATiming STATe on page 210 Center Frequency Defines the center frequency for analog baseband input For real type baseband input I or Q only the center frequency is always 0 Hz Note If the analysis bandwidth to either side of the defined center frequency exceeds the minimum frequency 0 Hz or the maximum frequency 40 MHz 80 MHz an error is displayed In this case adjust the center frequency or the analysis bandwidth Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 240 Probe Settings Probes are configured in a separate tab on the Input dialog box which is displayed when you select the INPUT OUTPUT key and then Input Source Config input A 0 00 dBm Freq 13 25 G
257. der of the tabs The currently active measurement is indicated by a 8 symbol in the tab label The result displays of the individual channels are updated in the tabs as well as the MultiView as the measurements are per formed Sequential operation itself is independent of the currently displayed tab For details on the Sequencer function see the R amp S FSW User Manual 2 2 Understanding the Display Information The following figure shows a measurement diagram during an Analog Demodulation measurement All different information areas are labeled They are explained in more detail in the following sections R amp S FSW K7 Welcome to the Analog Demodulation Application MultiView Spectrum Analog Demod 1 Time per Division Ref Level 0 x Att 200 ms DBW 5MHz Freq 1 0 GHz FM Time Domain 2 TAP CIN RET 3 pc Start 0 0 s 100tpts 2 0 ms 4 Result Summary Carrier Power 872 E Carrier Offset 133 47 kHz FPESK PESK EPESK RMS Med Freg 85 041 kHz 84 715 kHz 84 878 kHz 50 313 kHz Measuring 12 00 45 1 Channel bar for firmware and measurement settings 2 3 Window title bar with diagram specific trace information 4 Diagram area 5 Diagram footer with diagram specific information depending on result display 6 Instrument status bar with error messages progress bar and date time display MSRA MSRT operating mode In MSRA MSRT operating mode additional tabs and elements are available A colored backgro
258. devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Note For offline AF or RF triggers no output signal is provided Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 263 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection on page 263 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 For details see the description of the STATus OPERation register in the R amp S FSW User Manual and the description of the AUX port in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 264 5 5 5 5 1 Data Acquisition Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 263 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 264 Send Trigge
259. dialog box gt To display this dialog box do one of the following e Selectthe Data Acquisition button in the Analog Demodulation Overview e Select the BW key and then the Bandwidth Config softkey R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Meas Time AQT Capture Offset Resolution Bandwidth Siaeliie einm 1 FM Time Domain Demodulation Bandwidthy 5 xcci ena ett hn nr hne nh RR t trt o nh opener nn 106 Demodulator Ite ciere e e rae rrt re ete c eni a dta daa ee c 106 Measurement Time O1 a 106 Capre OS OU m EE E 107 Resolution Bea WIG swiss cedi et ert pede t ord eas ndr tar ee ee re ra e ed ed pe n 107 Demodulation Bandwidth Defines the demodulation bandwidth of the measurement The demodulation band width determines the sample rate with which the input signal is captured and analyzed For recommendations on finding the correct demodulation bandwidth see chapter 4 2 Demodulation Bandwidth on page 26 For details on the relation between demodulation bandwidth and sample rate refer to chapter 4 3 Sample Rate and Demodulation Bandwidth on page 27 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 252 Demodulation Filter Defines the filter to be used for demodulation For details on sample rates measurement times and trigger offsets for various demod ulation bandwidths when using a Gaussian filter see chapter 4 3 Sample Rate and Demodulation Bandwidth on page 27 Flat Defa
260. display 5 Set the measurement time AQT to 7 ms in order to measure 10 periods of the sig nal 6 Adjust the y axis scaling to the measured frequency deviation automatically by selecting the Scale Config softkey and in the Scaling tab setting AF Auto Scale to ON MultiView 33 Spectrum Analog Demod Ref Level 0 00 dBm Att 10dB AQT 10ms DBW 5MHz Freq 500 0 MHz CF 500 0 MHz 100 pts 1 0 ms 4 Result Summary Carrier Power 10 33 dBm Carrier Offset 694 78 Hz Peak Peak Peak 2 RMS Mod Freq SINAD FM 52 799 kHz 51 025 kHz 51 912 kHz 34 931 kHz 10 000 kHz Fig 9 3 Auto scaled measurement of 10 signal periods continuous 7 Display the RF spectrum of the measured signal to determine the required demod ulation bandwidth Select the Display Config softkey and add an RF Spectrum window to the display User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 170 R amp S FSW K7 Measurement Example Demodulating an FM Signal MultiView 33 Spectrum Analog Demod Ref Level 0 00 dBm Att 10dB AQT 10 ms Freq 500 0 MHz CF 500 0 MHz _ 0 RUIA 5 RF Spectrum 1AP Clrw CF 500 0 MHz 1001 pts Span 5 0 MHz 4 Result Summary Carrier Power 10 40 dBm Carrier Offset 642 31 Hz Peak Peak HI RMS Mod Freq SINAD FM 52 705 kHz 51 811 kHz 52 258 kHz 34 984 kHz 10 0000 kHz Fig 9 4 RF spectrum of FM signal with default demodulation bandwidth 5 MHz 8 As you can see in the default demodulation bandwidth of 5 MHz is muc
261. ds Note that the command will overwrite customized standards that have the same name as predefined standards lt n gt is irrelevant Usage Event Manual operation See Restore Standard Files on page 50 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PRESet STORe Standard This command saves the current Analog Demodualtion measurement configuration Standard definitions are stored in an xml file The default directory for Analog Demodu altion standards is C r_s instr user predefined AdemodPredefined lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Standard gt String containing the file name You can save the file in a subdirectory of the directory men tioned above In that case you have to include the relative path to the file Manual operation See Save Standard on page 50 11 4 2 Configuring the Input TIEIIDU onte nenne ema uM E 187 e Using External MIXOIS rrt rre eb reee ne RR Pe Fea Ea FISHER AERE REQUE PE EE YRPE Ran iE 191 e Configuring the 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 204 e Configuring Input via the Optional Analog Baseband Interface 208 e Configuring Digital I Q Input and OUtpUt ccc eccessseeceeesssteeeeesssceeeeesssteeeeseeeas 210 e Seng up PrIOD6OS oie p tee E RR aaa a Taaa E aaa 214 e Working with Powar Sense co ene tt e ecd pen da dl de ec det 217 e External Generator CORO icc desire eb recette Lo Rev R Pepe R EAE Fee APERTE TRA
262. e State Settings SearchLimits Sort Mode X Value EEFE LIMI a l Right Limit L 126 5 GHz Maximum Number of Peaks 50 exa a Threshold m 120 0 dBm Peak Excursion 6 0 dB Use Zoom Limits Display Marker Numbers On E Decimal Separator Point Peak List State scies i eret eco tS ve t E dc aE dada Y rd 151 SON MOJE etse ceri rre er esr ean Ra REY Sa YES vv RENT a a 151 Maximum Number of Peaks icereer ire tro ritiro err nni Ple innt arte 152 Peak EXCUFSIOR eerte etr eoe arret c en n d de d eren n e a rc dt 152 Displaying Marker IMurmbers eiie eot tmi etii teet o Lade Perder 152 Exporting the Peak LIST ite pe Sides Od IR eR deca XE Pee edt n Da tenu RS 152 Peak List State Activates deactivates the marker peak list If activated the peak list is displayed and the peaks are indicated in the trace display For each listed peak the frequency time X value and level Y value values are given Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks STATe on page 338 Sort Mode Defines whether the peak list is sorted according to the x values or y values In either case the values are sorted in ascending order Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT on page 338 Working with Markers in the R amp S FSW Analog Demodulation application Maximum Number of Peaks Defines the maximum number of peaks to be determined and displayed Remote command
263. e Marker Peak List on page 23 See Marker Position X value on page 142 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the position of a marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 292 If the analog demodulator option Analog Demodulation R amp S FSW K7 is activated the query result is output in the following units in the specified window Result display Output unit AM FM Hz PM rad deg defined with UNIT lt n gt ANGLe on page 276 RF dB Range Log or Range Linear Range Linear dB Return values lt Result gt Result at the marker position Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 Analyzing Results Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker Table on page 22 See Marker Peak List on page 23 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt AOFF This command turns all delta markers off lt m gt is irrelevant Example CALC DELT AOFF Turns all delta markers off Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK State
264. e PMETersp DOYCle VALUG contr rtr er cunei nx degere naa SENSe PMETersp DOYCle STATE rnrn aaa it e nri bnt eite rae res SENSE JPME Ters p gt nime T SENSe PMETersp FREQuency LINK niano rear et rh ker erre draps SENSe PMETe6rsp MTIMSG s 22 172 trennen trat Cabin cia oca tans ead ONES e euge aea eere gae SENSe PMETersps MTIMe AVERage G OU NL irr trei rte perra inner ti cenessienagtviesncesiene 223 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe AVERage S TA Te rrr nnn rnnt eene 223 SENSe PMETersp ROFFset S TATe eiae tt ener tier rn re trn rn 224 SENSE JPME Ter lt p A TRIGGER DMM Er meresan remp pret tex sepa E sepe kv e Eu stars peo ERa EEk 225 SENSe PMETersp TRIGger HOLIDJOIT iiiit rente rnit rnt nt re cer iter een teh eres 226 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger HYSTeresis 226 SENSE PME Ter lt p gt TRIGO6r WEN Cli euer gerent rto erret emer EE ep Fee Ek XY HE r He kr ee pe Ee x RS ANENE 227 SENS amp PMETersp TRIGger SLOBSe rr ro eren ert rented rei E ne tot RR enge 227 SENSe PMETersp TRIGger S TATe iiir rtr ttt erre trier rein rre rrr 227 SENSe PMETerspz UPDate STATS creer ohio tore eh eene td i EEEE E EIE SR eno OaE 224 SENS amp e PMETerspS ES TATe uc rient htt th ertt tren te theo ct tne etri eere n nn 224 SENSe PROBesp ID PARTn tmb6er io rro eter er tc trente rne Ene rr enn ERE EE 215 SENSe PROB
265. e Reference Value on page 79 SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire lt MeasType gt This command initiates a reference measurement calibration The reference mea surement is the basis for the measurement normalization The result depends on whether a reflection measurement or transmission measurement is performed see SENSe CORRection METHod on page 234 To obtain a correct reference measurement a complete sweep with synchronization to the end of the sweep must have been carried out This is only possible in the single sweep mode This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 230 Parameters lt MeasType gt THRough TRANsmission mode calibration with direct connection between external generator and device input REFLection mode calibration with short circuit at the input OPEN only allowed in REFLection mode calibration with open input Example INIT CONT OFF Selects single sweep operation CORR METH TRAN Selects a transmission measurement CORR COLL THR WAI Starts the measurement of reference data using direct connec tion between generator and device input and waits for the sweep end Usage Setting only SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Calibrate Reflection Short on page 78 See Calibrate Reflection Open on page 78 SENSe CORRection METHod This command selects the type of measurement to be performed with the external gen era
266. e n LIMit k RACe t CHECk on page 353 Comment An optional description of the limit line Included Lines in Overview View Filter Defines which of the stored lines are included in the overview Show compat Only compatible lines ible Whether a line is compatible or not is indicated in the Compatibility setting Show all All stored limit lines with the file extension LIN in the limits sub folder of the main installation folder if not restricted by Show lines for all modes setting Show lines for all modes Included Lines in Overview View Filter If activated default limit lines from all applications are displayed Otherwise only lines that were created in the Spectrum application are displayed Note that limit lines from some applications may include additional properties that are lost when the limit lines are edited in the Spectrum application In this case a warning is displayed when you try to store the limit line X Offset Shifts a limit line that has been specified for relative frequencies or times x axis hori zontally Limit Line Settings and Functions This setting does not have any effect on limit lines that are defined by absolute values for the x axis Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol OFFSet on page 345 Y Offset Shifts a limit line that has relative values for the y axis levels or linear units such as volt vertically This setting does not have any effect
267. e 81 Note The IP address computer name is maintained after a PRESET and is transfer red between applications Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope TCPip on page 207 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope IDN on page 206 Alignment Access INPUT OUTPUT gt B2000 Config gt Alignment An initial alignment of the output to the oscilloscope is required once after setup It need only be repeated if a new oscilloscope is connected to the IF OUT 2 GHZ con nector of the R amp S FSW or if a new firmware is installed on the oscilloscope a ea a a ew D y The required connections between the R amp S FSW and the oscilloscope are illustrated in the dialog box User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 81 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Alignment consists of two steps The first step requires a temporary connection from the REF OUTPUT 640 MHZ connector on the R amp S FSW to the CH1 input on the oscil loscope To perform the alignment select the Alignment button If necessary in particular after the firmware on the oscilloscope has been updated a self alignment is performed on the oscilloscope before the actual B2000 alignment starts This may take a few minutes If the oscilloscope and the oscilloscope ADC are aligned successfully a new dialog box is displayed Oscilloscope CH1 to FSW REF OUT 640 MHz Please connect RTO CH1 to FSW B2000 Alignment Signal Source Osci
268. e eeececesisee eene nnns 228 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency FACTor DENominator eese 229 SOURcCe EXTernal FREQuency FACTor NUMerator esee 229 SOURcCe EXTernal FREQuency OFFSet esssssssssssssssssesen enne nnne nn trennt 230 SOURce EXTermal POWher LEWVel 22 1t e or roit ey cai teenie 230 SOURCE XSI ial STATS tiet a ECT eases IR e eR RE REGE Ex 230 SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate OFFSet sse 231 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency Frequency This command defines a fixed source frequency for the external generator Parameters Frequency Source frequency of the external generator RST 1100050000 Example SOUR EXT FREQ 10MHz Manual operation See Manual Source Frequency on page 76 SOURce EXTernal FREQuency COUPling STATe State This command couples the frequency of the external generator output to the R amp S FSW Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 Default setting a series of frequencies is defined one for each sweep point based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R amp S FSW the RF frequency range covers the currently defined span of the R amp S FSW unless limited by the range of the signal generator OFF 0 The generator uses a single fixed frequency defined by SOURce EXTernal FREQuency RST 1 Example SOUR EXT FREQ COUP ON Manual operation See
269. e is a common time marker for all MSRA MSRT applications To hide or show and position the analysis line a dialog box is available To display the Analysis Line dialog box tap the AL icon in the toolbar only available in MSRA MSRT mode The current position of the analysis line is indicated on the icon Analysis in MSRA MSRT Mode Position Show Line PS NON ENTRE ate nese tet cece T 161 iae EISE TETTE T OTT I INITIO 161 Position Defines the position of the analysis line in the time domain The position must lie within the measurement time of the multistandard measurement Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe VALue on page 360 CALCulate lt n gt RTMS ALINe VALue on page 361 Show Line Hides or displays the analysis line in the time based windows By default the line is displayed Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe SHOW on page 359 CALCulate lt n gt RTMS ALINe SHOW on page 361 Import Export Functions 7 1 Q Data Import and Export Baseband signals mostly occur as so called complex baseband signals i e a signal representation that consists of two channels the in phase lI and the quadrature Q channel Such signals are referred to as I Q signals The complete modulation infor
270. e nennen 351 CALCulate n LIMit k UPPer THReshold eessseessssessseeeesn eene nnne nnns nias 351 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt COMMent Comment This command defines a comment for a limit line lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Comment String containing the description of the limit line The comment may have up to 40 characters Manual operation See Comment on page 157 Analyzing Results CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA lt LimitLinePoints gt This command defines the horizontal definition points of a limit line lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt LimitLinePoints gt Variable number of x axis values Note that the number of horizontal values has to be the same as the number of vertical values set with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer DATA or CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer DATA If not the R amp S FSW either adds missing val ues or ignores surplus values The unit is Hz or s RST Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Data points on page 158 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DOMain lt SpanSetting gt This command selects the domain of the limit line lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt SpanSetting gt FREQuency TIME RST FREQuency Manual operation See X Axis on page 158 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol MODE lt Mode gt This command selects the horizontal limit line scaling lt
271. e of the demodulated data to be displayed e AF EValuai n xe ERR Eris III EDI DDR cides MEDII DR D PME EN DCN 120 e ISEJEV Ulo Re to nete cee uae oe te etapa ocv ue sectae atelescv e ie DA Mee Teu C ca eu 122 AF Evaluation Access Overview Demod Settings gt Scaling or Meas Setup Demod Scaling tab These settings are only available for AF evaluations Demod Spectrum AfFilter Scaling Unit AF Range Db per Division 10 0 dB Ref Position 100 0 Ref Value 100 0 AF Coupling peau Logarithmic AF Auto Scale Off Sao 2 AM Spectrum t Dev per Division Db per DIVISION neie anena anaa aaa a Aa aana 120 Reference Value Position semen nnne nnne nua 121 Reference Value crier es tee eden apo erecti err bee o d ede a deed odas 121 D eol 122 DEANOM RERO DOTT TTE 122 AF Aulo Sceal8ii tee e e ec e apetece ta av e edd vei a eid 122 Dev per Division Db per Division Defines the modulation depth or the phase deviation or frequency deviation per divi sion logarithmic 0 1 to 20 dB Demodulation AM display 0 0001 to 1000 FM display 1 Hz div to 100 MHz div PM display 0 0001 rad div to 1000 rad div Note The value defined per division refers to the default display of 10 divisions on the y axis If fewer divisions are displayed e g because the window is reduced in height the range per division is increased in
272. e seen 164 How to Perform Measurements in the Analog Demodulation Appli cnp CC 167 Measurement Example Demodulating an FM Signal 169 Optimizing and Troubleshooting the Measurement 175 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 176 INtHO MU CHON 177 Common SUPPIXCS wascisccccctcccesecsccecccesscteccecessececeessssececessescceecesesstteccossseceecessesteecseseeseeees 181 Activating Analog Demodulation Measurements eene 182 Configuring the Measurement eeeeeeeeeeeeenee enne nnne nnn nint nnmnnn 186 Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps eene enn 290 Configuring the Result Display eene ener nennen 296 Retrieving Results one eeemere ee tete inte nnrirrin inr errare np IRR nianu RR iras 303 Analyzing Results unite tiene cione nia inne a bos enn coriis a anpra pinna p ERR 314 Importing and Exporting I Q Data and Results eee 362 Commands for Compatibility eese nennen nnns 364 Programming Exampl euieeiiiee rene rennen atria anna saraaa aasian 365 PROPS GING fete e 367 Predefined Standards and SettingS ccccsceccceeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeen
273. e teer eee 120 High Pass Defines a high pass filter with the given limit to separate the DC component The filters are indicated by the 3 dB cutoff frequency The 50 Hz and 300 Hz filters are designed as 2nd order Butterworth filter 12 dB octave The 20 Hz filter is designed as 3rd order Butterworth filter 18 dB octave The high pass filters are active in the following demodulation bandwidth range None No AF Filter used default 20 Hz 100 Hz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 1 6 MHz 50 Hz 200 Hz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 MHz 300 Hz 800 Hz lt demodulation bandwidth s 8 MHz Manual A high pass filter with the manually defined frequency is used Note If online demodulation output is active the predefined fixed filters are not avail able In this case the frequency for the high pass filter must be defined manually see also chapter 5 8 2 Analog Demodulation Output Settings on page 129 Demodulation If a filter was already configured when online demodulation output is activated it is replaced by a manual filter that provides corresponding results if possible Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs STATe on page 274 SENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs FREQuency ABSolute on page 273 SENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs FREQuency MANual on page 273 Low Pass Defines a low pass filter type Relative and absolute low pass filter are available e Absolute low pass filters
274. eak The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 147 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 147 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 147 Analyzing Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 147 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 148 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 148 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command
275. eband Interface see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual Analog Baseband i put Stata uu oodd etna Reden t en trc nx devia va adiac d nd dfn 69 VO or EUER 69 Ines isis I 70 High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband RF eesseeneeennne 70 Gener PREQUBINGY sp eter de regere deg deve Pu d ve Ebr ttt e og 71 Analog Baseband Input State Enables or disable the use of the Analog Baseband input source for measurements Analog Baseband is only available if the optional Analog Baseband Interface is instal led Remote command INPut SELect on page 190 Q Mode Defines the format of the input signal For more information on I Q data processing modes see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and Q Input User Manual jQ The input signal is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application Two inputs are required for a complex signal one for the in phase component and one for the quadrature component R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Only Low IF I The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT connector is filtered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is set to 0 Hz the real baseband signal is dis played without down conversion Real Baseband 1 If a center frequency greater than 0 Hz is set the input signal is down converted with the center frequency Low IF 1 Q Only Low IF Q The input signal at the BASEBAND INPUT Q connector is filt
276. ececceceeseeseneenerseaees 38 e Normalization reote reete ete che e saute ute E ederet eir patena topo des d aes dd 39 e Reference Trace Reference Line and Reference Level sess 40 e Coupling the Frequencies 5 otn rir Renate a eire ento uds 41 Displayed Information and EIfO S re rper n rete 44 External Generator Connections The external generator is controlled either via a LAN connection or via the EXT GEN CONTROL GPIB interface of the R amp S FSW supplied with the option For more information on configuring interfaces see the Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols section in the R amp S FSW User Manual TTL synchronization In addition TTL synchronization can be used with some Rohde amp Schwarz generators connected via GPIB The TTL interface is included in the AUX CONTROL connector of the External Generator Control option Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates than pure GPIB control because the frequency stepping of the R amp S FSW is directly coupled with the frequency stepping of the generator For details see chapter 4 7 4 7 Coupling the Frequencies on page 41 In figure 4 4 the TTL connection is illustrated using an R amp S SMU generator for exam ple R amp S FSW K7 Measurement Basics R amp S SMU rear panel y PF SS CLOCK INSTR 4 wi li R3 JS BNC Blank BNC Trigger E FSW B10 AUX CONTROL R amp S FSW rear panel Fig 4 4
277. ed values are evaluated by the selected detector The result is displayed on the screen and can be read out via remote control In addition important parameters are calculated e Acounter determines the modulation frequency for AM FM and PM average power carrier power RF power average frequency carrier frequency offset FM e The modulation depth or the frequency or phase deviation the deviations are determined from the trace data AC coupling is possible with FM and PM display 4 2 Demodulation Bandwidth The demodulation bandwidth determines the span of the signal that is demodulated It is not the 3 dB bandwidth of the filter but the useful bandwidth which is distortion free with regard to phase and amplitude Therefore the following formulas apply e AM demodulation bandwidth 2 2 x modulation frequency FM demodulation bandwidth 2 2 x frequency deviation modulation frequency e PM demodulation bandwidth 2 2 x modulation frequency x 1 phase deviation demodulation bandwidth must be increased by the carrier offset in addition to the requirement described above This also applies if FM or PM AC coupling has been selected O If the center frequency of the analyzer is not set exactly to the signal frequency the In general the demodulation bandwidth should be as narrow as possible to improve the S N ratio The residual FM caused by noise floor and phase noise increases dra matically with the bandwidth e
278. ee TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 259 l Q Power Trigger Source This trigger source is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface or optional Analog Baseband Interface is used for input It is also not available for analysis band widths 2 160 MHz Triggers the measurement when the magnitude of the sampled l Q data exceeds the trigger threshold The trigger bandwidth corresponds to the resolution bandwidth setting for data acquisi tion see Resolution Bandwidth on page 107 Remote command TRIG SOUR IQP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 259 IF Power Trigger Source The R amp S FSW starts capturing data as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the third intermediate frequency R amp S FSW K7 Configuration For frequency sweeps the third IF represents the start frequency The trigger band width at the third IF depends on the RBW and sweep type For measurements on a fixed frequency e g zero span or I Q measurements the third IF represents the center frequency This trigger source is only available for RF input It is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface or the optional Analog Baseband Interface The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and preamplification A refer ence level offset if defined is also considered When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 with an IF power trigger For deta
279. eeeaes 138 Trace d Trace 2 Trace S Ttace 4 SORKOVS ttt tee etit ene 138 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Selects the corresponding trace for configuration The currently selected trace is high lighted Remote command Selected via numeric suffix of TRACe lt 1 6 gt commands DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 286 Trace Mode Defines the update mode for subsequent traces Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FSW saves each trace point in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves each trace point in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one Average The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Average Count determines the number of averaging procedures View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Trace Settings Blank Removes the selected trace from the display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 284 Detector Defines the trace detector to be used for trace analysis Auto Selects the optimum detector for the selected trace and filter mode This is the default setting Type Def
280. eeeeneeeennes 367 VQ Data File Format iq tar eeeeeeeeeeeeeeen eere nennen nnne nnn nnn nnn nnns 369 List of Remote Commands AnalogDemopQ 375 385 User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 4 R amp S9FSW K7 Preface 1 Preface 1 1 About this Manual This Analog Demodulation User Manual provides all the information specific to the application All general instrument functions and settings common to all applications and operating modes are described in the main R amp S FSW User Manual The main focus in this manual is on the measurement results and the tasks required to obtain them The following topics are included Welcome to the Analog Demodulation Application Introduction to and getting familiar with the application Measurements and Result Displays Details on supported measurements and their result types Measurement Basics Background information on basic terms and principles in the context of the mea surement Configuration Analysis A concise description of all functions and settings available to configure measure ments and analyze results with their corresponding remote control command I Q Data Import and Export Description of general functions to import and export raw I Q measurement data How to Perform Measurements in the Analog Demodulation Application The basic procedure to perform each measurement and step by step instru
281. een start and stop frequency The generated trans ducer factor can be further adapted using the Transducer softkey in the SETUP menu For more information on transducers see the General Instrument Setup gt Transduc ers section in the R amp S FSW User Manual This function is only available if Source Calibration Normalize is switched on Note Note that the normalized measurement data is used not the reference trace Thus if you store the normalized trace directly after calibration without changing any settings the transducer factor will be 0 dB for the entire span by definition of the nor malized trace Remote command SENSe CORRection TRANsducer GENerator on page 236 Reference Position Defines the position of the Result Frequency Stop in percent of the total y axis range The top of the diagram is 100 the bottom is 0 By default the 0 dB line is displayed at the top of the diagram 100 This setting is only available if normalization is on see Source Calibration Normalize on page 78 The reference line defined by the reference value and reference position is similar to the Reference Level defined in the Amplitude settings However this reference line only affects the y axis scaling in the diagram it has no effect on the expected input power level or the hardware settings The normalized trace 0 dB directly after calibration is displayed on this reference line indicated by a red line in the diag
282. eennennen nennen nennt enne CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK eese nnne CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MlNimum ABOWe essent eren rennen CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum BELow is CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MINimum NEXT sesseessessseeee eene rennen nennen CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam Y MlNimum PEAK eese enne CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram FRAMe esee nennt a a CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram SAReoa sse nennen nene tn senes CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK os CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram XY MlNimum PEAK essen CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOWe essere CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELoOw essent CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT fs CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MAXimumg PEAK eese CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINIMUM ABOVE 0 cece eee cent tee eseeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeneees CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MlINimum BELOw esee CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT sseessseseseseeeeeenenen nene nennen CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum PEAK i GALGulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRA Ge
283. efault the contents of the file are in 32 bit floating point format Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters 1 lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores the captured I Q data to the specified file Manual operation See Q Export on page 164 Commands for Compatibility 11 10 Commands for Compatibility The following commands are provided for compatibility to other signal analyzers only For new remote control programs use the specified alternative commands CLES Ea lpi FEED ate adieu amawanes 364 CALCulate lt n gt FEED lt Evaluation gt This command selects the evaluation method of the measured data that is to be dis played in the specified window Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the LAYout commands for new remote control programs see chapter 11 6 2 Working with Win dows in t
284. eference trace is referred to as calibration Thus the measurement results from the controlled external generator including the inherent distortions can be used as a reference trace to calibrate the measurement setup The inherent frequency and power level distortions can be determined by connecting the R amp S FSW to the signal generator The R amp S FSW sends a predefined list of fre R amp S FSW K7 Measurement Basics quencies to the signal generator see also chapter 4 7 4 7 Coupling the Frequencies on page 41 The signal generator then sends a signal with the specified level at each frequency in the predefined list The R amp S FSW measures the signal and deter mines the level offsets to the expected values Saving calibration results A reference dataset for the calibration results is stored internally as a table of value pairs frequency level one for each sweep point The measured offsets can then be used as calibration factors for subsequent measurement results The calibration can be performed using either transmission or reflection measure ments The selected type of measurement used to determine the reference trace is included in the reference dataset 4 7 4 5 Normalization Once the measurement setup has been calibrated and the reference trace is available subsequent measurement results can be corrected according to the calibration factors if necessary This is done by subtracting the reference trace from the me
285. efined via the harmonics configuration see Range 1 2 on page 58 Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue on page 194 RF Overrange If enabled the frequency range is not restricted by the band limits RF Start and RF Stop In this case the full LO range of the selected harmonics is used Remote command SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe on page 197 Input and Frontend Settings Preset Band Restores the presettings for the selected band Note changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the PRESET function This function allows you to restore the original band settings Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESet on page 194 Mixer Type The External Mixer option supports the following external mixer types 2 Port LO and IF data use the same port 3 Port LO and IF data use separate ports Remote command SENSe MIXer PORTs on page 197 Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration The harmonics configuration determines the frequency range for user defined bands see Band on page 57 Range 1 2 Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Enables the use of a second range based on another harmonic frequency of the mixer to cover the band s frequency range For each range you can define which harmonic to use and how the Conversion loss is handled Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH STATe on page 195 Harmonic Type Mixer Settings Harmonics Configura
286. efines which span of the demodulated data is evaluated Depending on the evaluation AF or RF display the settings vary e JP Evaluation heute eo e A A TEE AAA AAE 114 e RE EValudalbIm io een ee reto eene cede i teet ac a geo bastee dm eive eva 115 AF Evaluation Access Overview Demod Settings Spectrum or Meas Setup Demod Spectrum tab These settings are only available for AF Spectrum evaluations not in the time domain Demod Spectrum AfFilter Scaling Unit Settings AF Center AF Start AF Stop AF Span AF Full Span IfeT Telf e Mfeluil 2 AM Spectrum t AF Center Defines the center frequency of the demodulated data to evaluate Remote command SENSe ADEMod n AF CENTer on page 268 AF Start Defines the start frequency of the demodulated data to evaluate Remote command SENSe ADEMod n AF STARt on page 269 5 7 2 2 Demodulation AF Stop Defines the stop frequency of the demodulated data to evaluate The maximum AF stop frequency corresponds to half the demodulation bandwidth Remote command SENSe ADEMod n AF STOP on page 270 AF Span Defines the span around the center frequency of the demodulated data to evaluate The maximum span is DBW 2 Remote command SENSe ADEMod n AF SPAN on page 269 AF Full Span Sets the span around the center frequency of the demodulated data to the maximum of DBW 2
287. elect the I Q Import softkey Select the storage location and the file name with the iq tar file extension o m FF o Select Open The stored data is loaded from the file and displayed in the current application Previewing the I Q data in a web browser The iq tar file format allows you to preview the I Q data in a web browser 1 Use an archive tool e g WinZip or PowerArchiver to unpack the iq tar file into a folder 2 Locate the folder using Windows Explorer 3 Open your web browser gt xzy xml How to Export and Import I Q Data 4 Drag the I Q parameter XML file e g example xml into your web browser file D ay xml e D x xzy xml xzy xml of iq tar file Saved by FSV IQ Analyzer Comment Here is a comment Date amp Time 2011 03 03 14 33 05 Sample rate 6 5 MHz Number of samples 65000 Duration of signal 10 ms Data format complex float32 Data filename xzy complex 1ch float32 Scaling factor 1v Comment Channel 1 of 1 Power vs time y axis 10 dB div x axis 1 ms div Spectrum y axis 20 dB div x axis 500 kHz div E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet http Avww rohde schwarz com Fileformat version 1 8 How to Perform Measurements in the Ana log Demodulation Application The following
288. elected window Select an active window from the Specifics for selection list that is displayed in the Overview and in all window specific configuration dialog boxes The Overview and dialog boxes are updated to indicate the settings for the selected window Input and Frontend Settings The source and characteristics of the input signal to be demodulated are configured in the Input and Frontend Settings dialog box For background information on working with power sensors see the R amp S FSW User Manual P To display this dialog box do one of the following e Selectthe Input Frontend button in the Analog Demodulation Overview e Selectthe INPUT OUTPUT key and then the Input Source Config softkey e Selectthe INPUT OUTPUT key and then the Power Sensor Config softkey npiteource SOMOS ucro eie ee ERE ener ee REI UNE 52 MELOS deco C 83 9 AIDIMUGE oiii n ta de reete eter bein Pre vetrine tuse mei iode 88 e PRG GING usate er e ORE RENS NE aaa UEx e A exu E EM rxuEE pee e exta ese qune 95 Input Source Settings Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Source or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config 3 1 1 Input and Frontend Settings The input source determines which data the R amp S FSW will analyze Since the Digital I Q input and the Analog Baseband input use the same digital signal path both cannot be used simultaneously When one is activated
289. ements 11 1 Introduction Commands are program messages that a controller e g a PC sends to the instru ment or software They operate its functions setting commands or events and request information query commands Some commands can only be used in one way others work in two ways setting and query If not indicated otherwise the com mands can be used for settings and queries The syntax of a SCPI command consists of a header and in most cases one or more parameters To use a command as a query you have to append a question mark after the last header element even if the command contains a parameter A header contains one or more keywords separated by a colon Header and parame ters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank If there is more than one parameter for a command these are separated by a comma from one another Only the most important characteristics that you need to know when working with SCPI commands are described here For a more complete description refer to the User Manual of the R amp S FSW Remote command examples Note that some remote command examples mentioned in this general introduction may not be supported by this particular application 11 1 1 Conventions used in Descriptions Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions e Command usage If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting and for queryin
290. en Starts an open circuit reflection type measurement to determine a reference trace for calibration If both reflection type calibrations open circuit short circuit are carried out the refer ence trace is calculated by averaging the two measurements The order of the two cali bration measurements is irrelevant Remote command SENSe CORRection METHod on page 234 Selects the reflection method SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire on page 234 Starts the sweep for open circuit calibration Source Calibration Normalize Switches the normalization of measurement results on or off This function is only available if the memory contains a reference trace that is after a calibration has been performed For details on normalization see chapter 4 7 4 5 Normalization on page 39 Remote command SENSe CORRection STATe on page 235 Recall Restores the settings that were used during source calibration This can be useful if instrument settings were changed after calibration e g center frequency frequency deviation reference level etc Remote command SENSe CORRection RECall on page 235 Input and Frontend Settings Save As Trd Factor Uses the normalized measurement data to generate a transducer factor The trace data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and stored in a file with the specified name and the suffix tra under c r_s instr trd The frequency points are allocated in equidistant steps betw
291. ency is displayed i e an input signal with an offset relative to the center frequency is not displayed symmetrically with respect to the zero line If AC is selected the frequency offset is automatically corrected i e the trace is always symmetric with respect to the zero line e PM time evaluation If DC is selected the phase runs according to the existing frequency offset In addi tion the DC signal contains a phase offset of rr If AC is selected the frequency offset and phase offset are automatically corrected i e the trace is always symmetric with respect to the zero line Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF COUPling on page 265 AC Cutoff Frequency Defines the cutoff frequency for the AC highpass filter for AC coupling only see AF Coupling Note that the audio frequency AF filter settings used for demodulation also apply to the online output Automatic Settings See chapter 5 7 3 AF Filter on page 116 Remote command OUTPut ADEMod ONLine AF CFRequency on page 239 Phones Output In addition to sending the output to the IF VIDEO DEMOD connector on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW it can also be output to headphones connected on the front panel PHONES connector CAUTION Risk of hearing damage To protect your hearing make sure that the vol ume setting is not too high before putting on the headphones Note If you do not hear output on the connected headphones despite having enabled
292. enne eats SENSe MIXer BIAS HIGH eene SENSe MIXer BIAS LOW SENSe MIXer FREQUehcYy HAN OVE iiec cr treat rh repe ea enit cen on x ner ey duo SENSe MIXer FREQUenGCy S ARE ni rre er ne trie er RR Rn Eri he tige b a nere Yee ERR R EE 194 SENSe MIXer FREQUENCY S TOP eneee r retour EASE ON TESE EEEE EE EEEE 194 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESOLt ici rette ti nec telle en dd aina 194 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue ett ttt 194 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH STATe SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALue SENSe MIXer HARMON c TY PE scent cereo cep ttu E Ente DR Peg oq RE PRSE canene E AEE TE saureesyeseeeceseeseaves SENSe MIXer HARMONIC LOW entr nep e rrr panas SENSe MIXer L OPOWET riot terat rrt erre ere ener hee STEATE Po e Ye E BRA KR ENERO TET Nais SENSE IMI Xer LOSS HIG H e SENSe MIXer EOSS TABLe HIGEI rrr ri rt rn tree rr eren ce S SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW E SENSE MIXEREOSS LOW T c SENSE MIXE PORTS carpe tente eemper en ve evt de e ctp ge cob v dpa ee omnes SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange S TATe trot nne er rrr en ri rne rrr rr adde adn SENSE IMIXSr SIGNA C E SENSe MIXer THReshold 2 erroe rrr rnt rere rre tn a aiaa SENSE MIXE STATE innnan e rre er eee Te E a dye ec PO Forex edes SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet SENS
293. environment SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AM ABSolute TDOMain RESUIt seen 304 SENSe JADEMod lt n gt AM RELative TDOMain RESUIt eene 304 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AM RELative AFSPectrum RESUIt eeeeeeeeeeeeseenneeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaa 304 SENSe JADEMod n FM TDOMain RESUIE eene eene 304 SENSe JADEMod n FM AFSPectrum RESUIE Leeeeeeeeee eene 304 SENSe JADEMod n PM TDOMain RESUlt 2 aoreet titer eite 304 SENSe JADEMod lt n gt PM AFSPectrum RESUIt scii aa aaa 304 SENSe JADEMod lt n gt SPECtrumRESUlt is uei tee kate euet Lagen nk a den tta hae ae e RR Ren 304 BOSE EL desires a bae aoi Datus tue a obla d Pia 305 TRAC Ser DATA iis adiens e tetti Rt nta dtdsbesaesvnmcarmiancanasatsbiaspnernandianens 306 SENSe JADEMod lt n gt AM ABSolute TDOMain RESult lt TraceMode gt SENSe JADEMod lt n gt AM RELative TDOMain RESult lt TraceMode gt SENSe JADEMod lt n gt AM RELative AFSPectrum RESult lt TraceMode gt SENSe JADEMod lt n gt FM TDOMain RESult lt TraceMode gt SENSe JADEMod lt n gt FM AFSPectrum RESult lt TraceMode gt SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PM TDOMain RESult lt TraceMode gt SENSe JADEMod lt n gt PM AFSPectrum RESult lt TraceMode gt SENSe JADEMod lt n gt SPECtrum RESult lt TraceMode gt This command reads the result data of the evaluated signal in the specified trace mode The data format of
294. equency at the RF input of the R amp S FSW Numerator multiplication factor for the current analyzer frequency Denominator division factor for the current analyzer frequency Forse frequency offset for the current analyzer frequency for example for frequency converting measurements or harmonics measurements The value range for the offset depends on the selected generator The default setting is 0 Hz Offsets other than 0 Hz are indicated by the FRQ label in the channel bar see also chapter 4 7 4 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 44 Swept frequency range The Fanalyzer Values for the calibration sweep start with the start frequency and end with the stop frequency defined in the Frequency settings of the R amp S FSW The resulting output frequencies Result Frequency Start and Result Frequency Stop are displayed in the External Generator Measurement Configuration for reference If the resulting frequency range exeeds the allowed ranges of the signal generator an error message is displayed see chapter 4 7 4 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 44 and the Result Frequency Start and Result Frequency Stop values are corrected to comply with the range limits The calibration sweep nevertheless covers the entire span defined by the R amp S FSW however no input is received from the generator outside the generator s defined limits Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output TTL synchronization
295. equency to a manually defined fac Bw tor of the demodulation bandwidth The X Factor defines the per centage of the demodulation bandwidth Values between 1 and 100 in steps of 1 96 are allowed The default setting is 10 9o Center Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency and removes the coupling of the step size to the demodulation bandwidth The used value is indicated in the Value field 5 4 Trigger Configuration Manual Defines a fixed step size for the center frequency Enter the step size in the Value field Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 241 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 241 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 241 Trigger Configuration Triggering means to capture the interesting part of the signal Choosing the right trigger type and configuring all trigger settings correctly allows you to detect various incidents in your demodulated signals Optionally the trigger signal used by the R amp S FSW can be output to a connected device and an external trigger signal from a connected device can be used by the R amp S FSW Trigger settings are identical to the base unit except for the available trigger sources Gating is not available for Analog Demodulation measurements For background information on trigger settings trigger output and working with external triggers see the R amp S FSW User Manual The tri
296. er direction for trigger ports that serve as an input as well as an output Suffix port Selects the used trigger port 2 trigger port 2 front panel 3 trigger port 3 rear panel Parameters Direction INPut Port works as an input OUTPut Port works as an output RST INPut Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 104 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel lt Level gt This command defines the level of the signal generated at the trigger output This command works only if you have selected a user defined output with OUTPut TRIGger port OTYPe Suffix port Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters lt Level gt HIGH TTL signal LOW OV RST LOW Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 104 See Level on page 105 Configuring the Measurement OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe lt OutputT ype gt This command selects the type of signal generated at the trigger output Note For offline AF or RF triggers no output signal is provided Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters lt OutputType gt DEVice Sends a trigger signal when the R amp S FSW has triggered inter nally TARMed Sends a trigger signal when the trigger is armed and ready for an external trigger event UDEFined Sends a user defined tri
297. er in the diagram Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 316 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 319 Marker Position X value Defines the position x value of the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 316 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 320 Marker Type Toggles the marker type The type for marker 1 is always Normal the type for delta marker 1 is always Delta These types cannot be changed Note If normal marker 1 is the active marker switching the Mkr Type activates an additional delta marker 1 For any other marker switching the marker type does not activate an additional marker it only switches the type of the selected marker Normal A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position in the diagram Delta A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the speci fied reference marker marker 1 by default Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 316 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 319 Reference Marker Defines a marker as the reference marker which is used to determine relative analysis results delta marker values If the reference marker is deactivated the delta marker referring to it is also deactiva ted If a fixed reference point is configured see Defining a Fixed Reference on page 144 the reference point FXD
298. er to the highest level of the spectrogram Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam XY MINimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram XY MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level of the spectrogram Usage Event R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements J O M P r H eq CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum ABOVe CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum ABOVe This command moves a marker vertically to the next lower peak level for the current frequency The search includes only frames above the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum BELow CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum BELow This command moves a marker vertically to the next lower peak level for the current frequency The search includes only frames below the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum NEXT CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker vertically to the next lower peak level for the current frequency The search includes all frames It does not cha
299. ered and resampled to the sample rate of the application If the center frequency is set to 0 Hz the real baseband signal is dis played without down conversion Real Baseband Q If a center frequency greater than O Hz is set the input signal is down converted with the center frequency Low IF Q Remote command INPut IQ TYPE on page 209 Input Configuration Defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all four Analog Base band connectors or as a plain l Q signal via two simple ended lines Note Both single ended and differential probes are supported as input however since only one connector is occupied by a probe the Single ended setting must be used for all probes Single Ended Q data only Differential l Q and inverse l Q data Not available for R amp S FSW85 Remote command INPut IQ BALanced STATe on page 208 High Accuracy Timing Trigger Baseband RF Activates a mode with enhanced timing accuracy between analog baseband RF and external trigger signals Note Prerequisites for previous models of R amp S FSW For R amp S FSW models with a serial number lower than 103000 special prerequisites and restrictions apply for high accuracy timing To obtain this high timing precision trigger port 1 and port 2 must be connected via the Cable for High Accuracy Timing order number 1325 3777 00 e As trigger port 1 and port 2 are connected via the cable only trigger port 3 can be use
300. erence level to 0 dBm TRIG SOUR IFP TRIG LEV IFP 10dBm Defines triggering when the second intermediate frequency rises to a level of 10 dBm DISP TRAC2 ON DISP TRAC2 MODE AVER DISP TRAC3 ON DISP TRAC3 MODE MAXH Configures 3 traces 1 default clear write 2 average 3 max hold 9 2 2 Configuring the limit check MMEM LOAD TYPE REPL MMEM LOAD STAT 1 LimitLines FM1 FM3 Loads the limit lines stored in LimitLines FM1 FM3 CALC LIM1 NAME FM1 CALC LIM1 UPP STAT ON Activates upper limit FM1 as line 1 CALC LIM3 NAME FM3 CALC LIM3 LOW STAT ON Activates lower limit line FM3 as line 3 CALC LIM ACT Queries the names of all active limit lines Result FM1 FM3 CALC LIM1 TRAC3 CHEC ON Activates the upper limit to be checked against trace3 maxhold trace CALC LIM3 TRAC2 CHEC ON Activates the upper limit to be checked against trace2 average trace CALC LIM CLE R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements 11 8 3 11 8 3 1 Clears the previous limit check results INIT WAI Initiates a new measurement and waits until the last sweep has finished CALC LIM1 FAIL Queries the result of the upper limit line check CALC LIM3 FAIL Queries the result of the lower limit line check Zooming into the Display Using the Single Zoom BISPlay WINDowsnsTZOOMABREA icri ct tra n tee ae de ete 357 DISPl
301. ery lt WindowType gt Type of result display you want to use in the existing window See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 298 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY REPL WIND 1 MTAB Replaces the result display in window 1 with a marker table LAYout SPLitter lt Index1 gt lt Index2 gt lt Position gt This command changes the position of a splitter and thus controls the size of the win dows on each side of the splitter Compared to the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE on page 297 command the LAYout SPLitter changes the size of all windows to either side of the splitter per manently it does not just maximize a single window temporarily R amp S FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements SEE EE eS eee Note that windows must have a certain minimum size If the position you define con flicts with the minimum size of any of the affected windows the command will not work but does not return an error y 100 x 100 y 100 1 01 GHz 102 12 dim x 0 y 0 x 100 Fig 11 1 SmartGrid coordinates for remote control of the splitters Parameters lt Index1 gt The index of one window the splitter controls Index2 The index of a window on the other side of the splitter Position New vertical or horizontal position of the splitter as a fraction of the screen area without channel and status bar and softkey menu The point of origin x 0 y 0 is in the lower left corne
302. es or ignores surplus values The unit depends on CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UNIT on page 349 RST Limit line state is OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Data points on page 158 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer MARGin lt Margin gt This command defines an area around an upper limit line where limit check violations are still tolerated lt n gt is irrelevant Analyzing Results Parameters lt Margin gt numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB Manual operation See Margin on page 158 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer MODE lt Mode gt This command selects the vertical limit line scaling Parameters lt Mode gt ABSolute Limit line is defined by absolute physical values The unit is variable RELative Limit line is defined by relative values related to the reference level dB RST ABSolute Manual operation See X Axis on page 158 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines an offset for a complete upper limit line Compared to shifting the limit line an offset does not actually change the limit line defi nition points lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Offset gt Numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB Manual operation See Y Offset on page 156 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer SHIFt lt Distance gt This command moves a complete upper limit line vertically Compared to defining an offset t
303. es the sample rate with which the input signal is captured and analyzed For recommendations on finding the correct demodulation bandwidth see chapter 4 2 Demodulation Bandwidth on page 26 For details on the relation between demodulation bandwidth and sample rate refer to chapter 4 3 Sample Rate and Demodulation Bandwidth on page 27 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 252 RF Full Span Sets the span around the center frequency of the RF data to be evaluated to the demodulation bandwidth Remote command SENSe ADEMod n SPECtrum SPAN MAXimum on page 270 AF Filter Access Overview Demod Settings AF Filter or Meas Setup gt Demod gt AF Filter tab The AF filter reduces the evaluated bandwidth of the demodulated signal and can define a weighting function Demodulation AF filters are only available for AF time domain evaluations A maximum of two filters out of high pass low pass or deemphasis filters can be active at the same time if analog demodulation output is active see chapter 5 8 2 Analog Demodulation Output Settings on page 129 Demod Spectrum AfFilter Scaling Unit High Pass Low Pass Weighting Deemphasis All Filter Off S 2 AM Spectrum t PAPAS RTT 117 NOUIS 118 NMS BH ENSE LLL LLL EIL ME 118 BI ge lC 119 Deactivating all AP Filters 2 2 2 or tei ret
304. esults Example CALC MARK PEXC 10dB Defines peak excursion as 10 dB Manual operation See Peak Excursion on page 146 11 8 1 5 Positioning the Marker This chapter contains remote commands necessary to position the marker on a trace e Positioning Normal Markers errno aar Eryn a sed 331 e Positioning Delta Markers ecni aaa Eaa nE 332 Positioning Normal Markers The following commands position markers on the trace CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXiMUM LEPFT ccccssscccescccecesceessseeeceeceeseeseeseeeeeeeeneeeaes 331 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimMUM NEXT cccceccccceesccecssceceessceceacecesseeeceeeseseeeeeees 331 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK 0 cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaeaaaaaeeeenesenenenes 331 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimUM RIGHL ccccceecccessseeceeeeeecaceeessseeceeceeeeneeeaes 332 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINIMUM ILEFT 0cccccseecceesceeceesccesseseceesececeenceesseeeseaeees 332 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINIMUM NEXT ccccesseccceecececeseecessseecescecesseessaeeeeeaneees 332 CALCulate n MARKer m MlNimum PEAK cessisse nnne nennen 332 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINIMUM RIGHLL cccccccccceecececescecesseeeceeeeeeseseeceseeeesaneeeaes 332 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next lower p
305. et etae etui tieu aka uq 321 e Marker Search Spectrograms sssssssssssssssesesee nennen ennt 323 e Marker Search Setlngs ec oc ace aei HR e RE Pe A a ed ee 330 e Positioning the MarKer eet Eee Eee Hx ERAN FRYR ER RK AE aaa a A 331 e Configuring Special Marker Functions eseeessseeneeennennenns 334 Setting Up Individual Markers The following commands define the position of markers in the diagram CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF cccccccccesssceceecececeecesessseeceacccesugeeeeseeeeceaceseseseessaeees 315 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK TO MARKEr lt m gt ccccccseeeceescccceesecesaseeceaaceeseeseeeanes 316 CAL Culate n MARKer mo STATe 222 erann nann desee eee erue hacc canna aac pone eias 316 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACE cccccccccessecccncceceecceasececeecceseaeesessececeaeceeceeeeseases 316 CAL Culate lt n gt MARKEr lt m gt X ccccsccccesescecescceceesceceseeeceasceecsgecesseeeseaaeceaeeneeeseeeeeeageeeaes 316 CAL CGulatesmsMARKersmosy Vonesa e rne a cusieceraanceteyusaadadesireadaternys 317 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt AOFF cccccssscecescccceesceceseseceesceeseeseceeseeeceeneceseeneesaues 318 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK 00cccccescceseseceenececesecesseeeeeenececeaeesesseeeeeaeeeees 318 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK TO MARKEr lt m gt cccccessccceecceesseee
306. et etta era attin 225 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger HOLDOoff 2 2 1 mi rici eeoco coca cei ie kane edu Sori aai aana 226 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger HYSTeresis essere 226 SENSe PMETer p TRIGger LEVel esses nnne nnn rere trn nne 227 BENSE PME Ters p gt TRIGO Sb OP ett Dres epe Gace denies elias Alera 227 SENSe PMETer amp p TRIGgei S TATe 2 2 2 irae oto a ii 227 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger DTIMe Time This command defines the time period that the input signal has to stay below the IF power trigger level before the measurement starts Configuring the Measurement Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Time gt Range Os to 1s Increment 100 ns RST 100 us Example PMET2 TRIG DTIMe 0 001 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger HOLDoff lt Holdoff gt This command defines the trigger holdoff for external power triggers Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Holdoff gt Time period that has to pass between the trigger event and the start of the measurement in case another trigger event occurs Range Os to 1s Increment 100 ns RST Os Example PMET2 TRIG HOLD 0 1 Sets the holdoff time of the trigger to 100 ms Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 88 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis for ex
307. etails on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Real Time Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual e Er User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 47 Configuration According to Digital Standards 9 Configuration Analog demodulation measurements require a special application on the R amp S FSW which you activate using the MODE key When you activate an Analog Demodulation application the first time a set of parame ters is passed on from the currently active application After initial setup the parame ters for the measurement channel are stored upon exiting and restored upon re enter ing the channel Thus you can switch between applications quickly and easily When you activate the Analog Demodulation application a Analog Demodulation mea surement for the input signal is started automatically with the default configuration It can be configured in the Analog Demodulation Overview dialog box which is dis played when you select the Overview softkey from any menu The main configuration settings and dialog boxes are also available via the Analog Demod menu which is displayed when you press the MEAS CONFIG key The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 11 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements on page 176 Predefined settings For commonly performed measurements standard setup files are provided for quick and easy configuration Simply load an existing st
308. evaluation method have the same traces thus the window is irrelevant lt m gt is irrelevant Query parameters lt MeasType gt PPEak MPEak MIDDIe RMS PPEak Postive peak PK MPEak NPEak Negative peak PK MIDDle Average of positive and negative peaks PK 2 RMS Root mean square value Example CALC FEED XTIM PM TDOM Switches on the PM time domain result display DISP TRAC ON Switches on the trace CALC MARK FUNC ADEM PM PPE Queries the peak value of the demodulated PM trace Usage Query only Manual operation See Result Summary on page 21 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod AM RESult lt t gt RELative lt MeasType gt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod FM RESult lt t gt RELative lt MeasType gt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod PM RESult lt t gt RELative lt MeasType gt This command queries the current relative value of the demodulated signal for the specified trace as displayed in the Result Summary in manual operation Note that all windows with the same evaluation method have the same traces thus the window lt n gt and marker lt m gt are irrelevant The unit of the results depends on the CONFigure ADEMod RESults UNIT setting Retrieving Results Query parameters lt MeasType gt PPEak Postive peak PK MPEak NPEak Negative peak PK MIDDle Average of positive and negative peaks PK 2
309. ever the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a channel defined sequence In this case a channel in continuous sweep mode is swept repeatedly If the Sequencer is active in MSRT mode the Continuous Sweep function does not start data capturing it merely has an effect on trace averaging over multiple sequen ces In this case trace averaging is performed Furthermore the RUN CONT key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN CONT starts the Sequencer in continuous mode For details on the Sequencer see the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 292 Single Sweep RUN SINGLE After triggering starts the number of sweeps set in Sweep Count The measurement stops after the defined number of sweeps has been performed While the measurement is running the Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the high lighted softkey or key again Note Sequencer If the Sequencer is active the Single Sweep softkey only controls the sweep mode for the currently selected channel however the sweep mode only has an effect the next time the Sequencer activates that channel and only for a chan nel defined sequence In this case a channel in single sweep mode is swept only once by the Sequencer If the Sequencer is active in MSRT mode the Single Sweep function does n
310. ference value for the AF range in the window title bar is displayed with respect to the defined reference position The position may vary for different windows For time domain and frequency domain windows for example a different reference value may be displayed although the same reference is actually used but the posi tions vary Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue on page 276 Demodulation AF Coupling Controls the automatic correction of the frequency offset and phase offset of the input signal This function is only available for FM or PM time domain evaluations e FM time evaluation If DC is selected the absolute frequency is displayed i e an input signal with an offset relative to the center frequency is not displayed symmetrically with respect to the zero line If AC is selected the frequency offset is automatically corrected i e the trace is always symmetric with respect to the zero line e PM time evaluation If DC is selected the phase runs according to the existing frequency offset In addi tion the DC signal contains a phase offset of rr If AC is selected the frequency offset and phase offset are automatically corrected i e the trace is always symmetric with respect to the zero line Remote command SENSe ADEMod n AF COUP1ing on page 265 Deviation Switches between logarithmic and linear display of the modulation depth or the phase deviation or the frequen
311. file are set to their default values when the standard is loa ded Measurement settings e DBW e AQT e Demod Filter e Sweep Points e Squelch State Level e Units Phase THD e RF Span Window display settings e Position e State e Window number e Window type all evaluation methods supported by the Analog Demodulation appli cation see chapter 3 Measurements and Result Displays on page 13 Scaling Ref Position Dev per Division Predefined Standards and Settings e Time Domain Zoom State Start Length AF specific settings e AF Center e AF Span e AF Filters lowpass Highpass Deemphasis Weighting e Scaling for Spectrum Ref Value Deviation Scaling for Time Domain Ref Value AF Coupling FM PM only Table 1 1 List of predefined standards and settings Setting Demod band width AM Broadcast 100 kHz FM Narrowband 100 kHz FM Broadcast 400 kHz Frequency Set tling None Default Aquisition time 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms Input coupling AC AC AC Squelch level Windows RF Spectrum AM Time Domain AM Spectrum Result Summary RF Spectrum FM Time Domain FM Spectrum Result Summary RF Spectrum FM Time Domain FM Spectrum Result Summary FM Time Domain RF Time Domain FM Time Domain Result Summary AF filter Hi
312. first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 147 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 148 Positioning Delta Markers The following commands position delta markers on the trace Analyzing Results CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXiIMUM LEFT ccc0ecccceesccesseseceessceceaeceeaeeeeeeaneees 333 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXiIMUM NEXT cccccecccecescecessseeceneeceseseecseseeseneees 333 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK eese 333 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXiIMUM RIGHL c 0cccccesceceseseececeeeseseeeeeeeeeseneeeaas 333 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINiIMUM LEFT 0sccccsssceceecececeseeseasseecescceeeuseesanees 333 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINiIMUM NEXT c 000ccccescccceesccecseseceeeeeeceeseeeseeeeeeeees 334 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK eee 334 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINiIMUM RIGHL ccccccccceesccesseseeeseececeaeceeaseeeeeeeees 334 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement va
313. formation on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and l Q Input User Manual Parameters lt ConnType gt RF RF input connector AIQI Analog Baseband connector RST RF Example INP CONN AIQI Selects the analog baseband input Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Connector on page 55 INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt This command selects the coupling type of the RF input Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC AC coupling DC DC coupling RST AC Example INP COUP DC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Coupling on page 54 Configuring the Measurement INPut DPATh lt State gt Enables or disables the use of the direct path for frequencies close to 0 Hz Parameters lt State gt AUTO 1 Default the direct path is used automatically for frequencies close to 0 Hz OFF 0 The analog mixer path is always used RST 1 Example INP DPAT OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Direct Path on page 54 INPut FILTer HPASs STATe lt State gt Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the R amp S FSW in order to mea sure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires an additional high pass filter hardware option Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals wit
314. g parameters If a command can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely Parameter usage If not specified otherwise a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values e Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R amp S FSW follow the SCPI syntax rules e Asynchronous commands A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next com mand starts executing overlapping command is indicated as an Asynchronous command e Reset values RST User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 177 11 1 2 11 1 3 11 1 4 Introduction Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument RST command are indicated as RST values if available Default unit This is the unit used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the parame ter e Manual operation If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation a link to the description is inserted Long and Short Form The keywords have a long and a short form You can use either the long or the short form but no other abbreviat
315. g MATLAB o Save vector of complex cartesian I Q data i e iqiqiq N 100 iq randn 1 N 1j randn 1 N fid fopen xyz complex float32 w for k 1 length iq fwrite fid single real iq k float32 fwrite fid single imag iq k float32 end fclose fid List of Remote Commands AnalogDemod SENSe WINDowsn 7 DE Tector t EFUNCtlon cette tutte tte rtt tenen 289 SENSe WINDow n DETector t FUNCtion AUTO netten thru tnn nbn tnnt thin 290 SENSe ADEModsri AF CENTOr oot orto no e reat then teneo x rt SEE EIS P EYE CAPELET E EXE SE EEAS TIE T A 268 SENSe ADEModsrn AF COUPPIlifig oai retro t neta eta ete he t Enea enk eni ant 265 SENSe JADEModsri AF SPAN tui oed entis ee eie cea bosco rat vae diro c mane a ORCI RETI EEE 269 SENSe ADEModsri AF SPAN FULL icon teen hh enar er the rh e tinea ti ko Rae nde ERREUR 269 SENSE ADEMod lt n gt APIS M oe 269 ISENS JADEMod lt n gt AR STOP 5 count aa di cs eure PER RECO EM IS EEE 270 SENSe JADEMod n AM RELative AFSPectrum RESUIt essen 304 SENSe ADEMod n AM RELative AFSPectrum TYPE sse nennen 286 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AM RELative TDOMain RESUIt essent 304 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AM RELative TDOMain TYPE sese 286 SENSe ADEMod n AM ABSolute TDOMain RESUIt
316. gger settings are configured in the Trigger dialog box Trigger Source Trigger In Out Trigger Source IF Power D Trigger Level 20 0 dBm Drop Out Time 0 0 s Trigger Offset E Slope Rising Falling Hysteresis Holdoff gt To display this dialog box do one of the following e Select the Trigger button in the Analog Demodulation Overview e Select the TRIG key and then the Trigger Config softkey Trigger SOURCE SetEnd aiaa a n iaaa tata i eA ies 98 Trigger input and Output SeDUIas ux cxt ita erbe yino r abere dua 104 Trigger Configuration 5 4 1 Trigger Source Settings The trigger source settings are configured in the Trigger Source tab of the Trigger dialog box MUA GU SS OUI p PRECES 98 L Free RUM ERREEER 98 L External Tigger 12 8 cosa tozsacncecsastscdansasdonsandaxdennsedaadascddaandsasnsasansiedicndaanadelane 98 Ci T 99 L Q POW ERREUR 99 M xz C UE TL eR ONO I 99 Rio 0127 ici tac sre vzn Go Dvcninn ces ak oben sacs ovarbbscetcidutasitabetictanessdoeviapisiad 100 E 1 MAP 100 L FM AM PM RF Offline eese cesete etant tassa baee eb tna an 101 2o e 101 ux d c E 101 L Power SORISOL iicacca vec petet taceo tere ea eere v codo d vc renr dnd 101 DIGGS Level tere teen eme re oe teri en E RR EOD Pe renun ERR xu RE iS 102 drei 102 FAY S
317. gger signal For more information see OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel RST DEVice Manual operation See Output Type on page 104 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate This command generates a pulse at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Usage Event Manual operation See Send Trigger on page 105 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth lt Length gt This command defines the length of the pulse generated at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters lt Length gt Pulse length in seconds Manual operation See Pulse Length on page 105 Configuring the Measurement 11 4 8 Configuring Demodulation 11 4 8 1 The following remote commands are required to configure the demodulation parame ters in a remote environment The tasks for manual operation are described in chap ter 5 7 Demodulation on page 110 e Basic Demodulation Settings ere teen Eso i Ee Ci Ea Per dia E EU 265 e Time Domain ZOOM 96ttlhgs roi HERR RIEN t e e ER ee td SR RU ETUR 267 e Configuring the Demodulation Spectrum eeesessseseee eee enn 268 e Postprocessing AF FIIGGES ioi ccce EE 271 e Defining the Scaling and D NIES 5 eren e ER e enna 275 e Scaling for AF E
318. gh 20 kHz 50 Hz pass AF filter Low 15 kHz 3 kHz pass RF Spectrum Span 50 kHz 25 kHz 400 kHz AM FM Time Domain Time domain 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms zoom Dev per division 1 kHz 20 kHz 100 kHz 50 kHz AM FM Spectrum Start freq 0 Hz 0 Hz 0 Hz Stop freq 15 kHz 5 kHz 63 33 kHz Ref value The Frequency Settling scenario requires a manually defined trigger 75 kHz Q Data File Format iq tar A 2 VQ Data File Format iq tar l Q data is packed in a file with the extension iq tar An ig tar file contains I Q data in binary format together with meta information that describes the nature and the source of data e g the sample rate The objective of the iq tar file format is to separate I Q data from the meta information while still having both inside one file In addition the file format allows you to preview the I Q data in a web browser and allows you to include user specific data The iq tar container packs several files into a single tar archive file Files in tar format can be unpacked using standard archive tools see http en wikipedia org wiki Comparison of file archivers available for most operating systems The advantage of tar files is that the archived files inside the tar file are not changed not com pressed and thus it is possible to read the I Q data directly within the archive without the need to unpack untar the tar file first Sample iq tar files If you have
319. gital Baseband Interface and the optional Analog Baseband Interface Parameters Level Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV BBP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 102 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt port gt lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that the variable INPUT OUTPUT connectors ports 2 3 must be set for use as input using the OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection command Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port 1 trigger port 1 TRIGGER INPUT connector on front panel 2 trigger port 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on front panel 3 trigger port 3 TRIGGER3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on rear panel Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 3 5 V RST 1 4 V Example TRIG LEV 2V Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 102 Configuring the Measurement TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IF Power lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered For compatibility reasons this command is also available for the baseband power trigger source when using the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 Parameters l
320. gnal is modulated with Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH RSUM See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 298 Results CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod PM RESult t on page 309 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod PM RESult lt t gt RELative on page 309 Marker Table Displays a table with the current marker values for the active markers This table may be displayed automatically if configured accordingly see Marker Table Display on page 144 4 Marker Table Wnd Type X value i Mi 13 25 GHz 1 D M 600 0 kHz 1 M 600 0 kHz 2 0 MHz User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 22 R amp S FSW K7 Measurements and Result Displays Tip To navigate within long marker tables simply scroll through the entries with your finger on the touchscreen Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MTAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 298 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 316 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 317 Marker Peak List The marker peak list determines the frequencies and levels of peaks in the spectrum or time domain How many peaks are displayed can be defined as well as the sort order In addition the detected peaks can be indicated in the diagram The peak list can also be exported to a file for analysis in an external application You can define search and sort criteria to influence the results of the analysis see chapter 6 3 2 1 Marker Search Settings on
321. guring the Triggering Condlitions nonien ener be nde h kde ras 254 Configuring the Tigger Outpul iiio re tree peau pu oer tex PE X d eerie cy vede 263 11 4 7 1 Configuring the Triggering Conditions The following commands are required to configure a triggered measurement TRIGger SEQuence BBPowerHOLDDoff terii elec iret insta nani 254 WRIGGer SEQUGHCE DTM PR E 255 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME ceceeeeeeeceeee cece ee eaeeeeaeaeae aaa aaaaegedeeeeeeeeseeeeereeeees 255 TRiGgern SEQuence JFPowerHOUDOR iunctae partie tte praeerat trt eaa ta 255 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis cessere nennen 256 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPOWED cececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeee eee aeae ttes nnns 256 TRIGger SEQuenceJ LEVel EXTernal port ccs 256 TRIGger SEQuence LEVeliFPOWer 2 cio rere tee erede ask cec Co Ra rac sedens 257 TRIGSer SEQuence EVeldO POWPEE e a xara tueur ru teh at ETE NE aa 257 TRIGger SEQuence OSCilloscope COUPling sess 257 TRIGger SEQuence EEVeDIRPPQWE 4 eiecerunt enn Gaels 258 TRIGger SEQuenceJ LEVel AM RELative sessssssssssesssseseseeeenen nennen nennen nna 258 TRIGger SEQuenceJ LEVel AM ABSolute sess ener 258 TRIGO6 SEQuence DEVel PM dac coeds De Ert erae etae eder caua 258 TRIGger SEQuence EVelPpM 1 iiir eod ceo a a accu auc po ro sea eo Lace E E
322. h The use of the indefinite for mat requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length 11 2 Common Suffixes In the Analog Demodulation application the following common suffixes are used in remote commands Suffix Value range Description lt k gt 1 8 Limit line m 1 16 Marker Activating Analog Demodulation Measurements Suffix Value range Description lt n gt 1 6 Window or Evaluation lt t gt 1 6 Trace 11 3 Activating Analog Demodulation Measurements Analog demodulation measurements require a special application on the R amp S FSW The measurement is started immediately with the default settings INSTIrument GREate DUPLicale 21 2 eene ceterae eq nee Ree er MD Ode REA 182 INS Fr ment oREate NEW etre tetas tt t attt eate eee padre guy ceo ten cat ehe 182 INS Tr mebt GREateREPI SO ei etr rere esito er Poe tese dure ved edis 183 INSTIumentDELele rite nent esu ease due x tee e TN Re RAN MER AATRE EAE 183 TS ERGO at ores dius irte susto saute temen dao Re ionic ett E a aa a AAEE 183 INS Tramient RENING crue aco egu tene rne d roe Ea raaa a e bre I A iaaa 185 INSTrument SEL Bi ETE 185 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXEQCute ssessesesseseseseeeene eene nnn n
323. h too large the actual signal takes up only a small part of the displayed range That means that any noise or additional signals apart from the FM signal of interest may be included in the measured results Select the Demod BW softkey and reduce the value to 200 kHz MultiView 33 Spectrum Analog Demod Ref Level 0 00 dBm Att 10dB AQT 10ms DBW Freq 500 0 MHz CF 500 0 MHz 5 RF Spectrum CF 500 0 MHz 100 pts Span 200 0 kHz 4 Result Summary Carrier Power 10 34 dBm Carrier Offset 679 70 Hz Peak Peak Ep RMS Mod Freq SINAD FM 49 853 kHz 48 649 kHz 49 251 kHz 34 914 kHz 10 000 kHz Fig 9 5 RF spectrum with demodulation bandwidth 200 kHz The span is automatically reduced to 200 kHz as well as only the demodulated range can be displayed User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 171 R amp S FSW K7 Measurement Example Demodulating an FM Signal ES EEE EE EE SS EEE EE EEE Ee 9 Now the RF spectrum shows that part of the FM signal is cut off The missing sig nal parts are not included in the calculated results Increase the demodulation bandwidth to 400 kHz to include the entire signal but no interfering frequencies The span is not automatically increased for the wider DBW since it may be useful to display only a small range from the demodulated bandwidth However this means the RF spectrum will still not show the entire signal 10 Increase the span manually to show the entire demodulated bandwidth a Select the
324. h a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP FILT HPAS ON Turns on the filter Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz on page 55 INPut FILTer YIG STATe State This command turns the YIG preselector on and off Note the special conditions and restrictions for the YIG filter described in YIG Prese lector on page 55 Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 0 for I Q Analyzer GSM VSA Pulse Amplifier Transient Analysis DOCSIS and MC Group Delay measurements Configuring the Measurement Example INP FILT YIG OFF Deactivates the YIG preselector Manual operation See YIG Preselector on page 55 INPut IMPedance Impedance This command selects the nominal input impedance of the RF input In some applica tions only 50 O are supported 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a matching pad of the RAZ type 25 O in series to the input impedance of the instrument The power loss correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 The command is not available for measurements with the optional Digital Baseband Interface Parameters Impedance 50 75 RST 500 Example INP IMP 75 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Impedance on page 54 See Unit on page 90 INPu
325. hanical Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level Auto mode This ensures that no overload occurs at the RF INPUT connector for the current reference level It is the default setting By default and when electronic attenuation is not available mechanical attenuation is applied This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface In Manual mode you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps down to 0 dB Other entries are rounded to the next integer value The range is specified in the data sheet If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenuation the refer ence level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed NOTICE Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels When decreasing the attenuation manually ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level allowed at the RF input as an overload may lead to hardware damage Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 243 INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 244 Using Electronic Attenuation If the optional Electronic Attenuation hardware is installed on the R amp S FSW you can also activate an electronic attenuator In Auto mode the settings are defined automatically in Manual mode you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseban
326. hannels which are required in order to replace or delete the channels R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements Return values lt ChannelType gt For each channel the command returns the channel type and lt ChannelName gt channel name see tables below Tip to change the channel name use the INSTrument REName command Example INST LIST Result for 3 measurement channels ADEM Analog Demod IQ IQ Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer2 Usage Query only Table 11 1 Available measurement channel types and default channel names in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode Application lt ChannelType gt Default Channel Name Parameter Spectrum SANALYZER Spectrum I Q Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer Pulse R amp S FSW K6 PULSE Pulse Analog Demodulation R amp S FSW K7 ADEM Analog Demod GSM R amp S FSW K10 GSM GSM Multi Carrier Group Delay R amp S FSW K17 MCGD MC Group Delay Amplifier Measurements R amp S FSW K18 AMPLifier Amplifier Noise R amp S FSW K30 NOISE Noise Phase Noise R amp S FSW K40 PNOISE Phase Noise Transient Analysis R amp S FSW K60 TA Transient Analysis VSA R amp S FSW K70 DDEM VSA 3GPP FDD BTS R amp S FSW K72 BWCD 3G FDD BTS 3GPP FDD UE R amp S FSW K73 MWCD 3G FDD UE TD SCDMA BTS R amp S FSW K76 BTDS TD SCDMA BTS TD SCDMA UE R amp S FSW K77 MTDS TD SCDMA UE cdma2000 BTS R amp S FSW K8
327. he Display on page 297 Parameters lt Evaluation gt Type of evaluation you want to display See the table below for available parameter values Example INST SEL ADEM Activates analog demodulator CALC FEED XTIM FM Selects the display of the FM signal I Table 11 6 Evaluation parameter values for the AnalogDemod application Parameter Evaluation XTIM AM RELative AM Time Domain XTIM AM RELative AFSPectrum AM Spectrum XTIM FM FM Time Domain XTIM FM AFSPectrum FM Spectrum XTIM PM PM Time Domain XTIM PM AFSPectrum PM Spectrum XTIM SPECtrum RF Spectrum XTIM AM RF Time Domain RF power XTIM RFPower XTIM AMSummary Result summary XTIM AMSummary RELative XTIM FMSummary XTIM FMSummary RELative XTIM PMSummary XTIM PMSummary RELative XTIM SUMMary Programming Example 11 11 Programming Example In this example we will configure and perform an analog demodulation measurement to demonstrate the remote control commands Signal generator settings e g R amp S SMW Frequency 500 MHz Level 10 dBm Modulation FM Modulation frequency 10 kHz Frequency deviation 50 kHz Wy esueUsBtpeEE Preparing the measurement RST Reset the instrument FREQ CENT 500 MHz Set the center frequency to 500 MHz DISP TRAC Y SCAL RLEV 0 Set the reference level to 0 dBm INST CRE
328. he EJ SmartGrid icon from the toolbar e Select the Demod Display button in the Overview e Press the MEAS key e Select the Display Config softkey in the main Analog Demod menu Up to six evaluation methods can be displayed simultaneously in separate windows The Analog Demodulation evaluation methods are described in chapter 3 Measure ments and Result Displays on page 13 For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Demodulation Access Overview Demod Settings or Meas Setup Demod e Basic Demodulation Measurement Parameters Demod ssss 110 e Demodulation SPEU saoiri tpe etre n cen n EE nee e ER enn tia 114 MEC UG IEEE UM UR 116 S OEA see ie E REL a Pe ELE EE HERE LT AE HL ERES BAUR EE Pe PEL E EL ad 120 LER cc 124 e Result Table Sette oci dece tte te enda tre e eee deeds 125 Basic Demodulation Measurement Parameters Demod Access Overview gt Demod Settings gt Demod or Meas Setup Demod Demod tab The basic demodulation measurement parameters define how the measurement is performed R amp S9FSW K7 Configuration Te 2PM Tinge mE AF Filter Scaling Unit Settings Time Domain Zoom Squelch State State on off Squelch Level Start AF Coupling Length Auto Manual Selected Trace PM Settings AZ Cte ite oie te 0 0 S Phase Wrapping ETiTzeiif Sius 2 PM Time Domain x
329. he diagram contains the following information depend ing on the evaluation RF Spectrum CF Center frequency Sweep points Span measured span of input signal RF Time domain CF Center frequency Sweep points Time per division of input signal AF Spectrum AF CF center fre Sweep points AF Span evaluated span quency of demodula ted signal AF Time domain CF Center frequency Sweep points Time per division of input signal For most modes the number of sweep points shown in the display are indicated in the diagram footer In zoom mode the rounded number of currently displayed points are indicated Status bar information Global instrument settings the instrument status and any irregularities are indicated in the status bar beneath the diagram Furthermore the progress of the current operation is displayed in the status bar 3 Measurements and Result Displays The data that was measured by the R amp S FSW can be evaluated using various different methods In the Analog Demodulation application up to six evaluation methods can be displayed simultaneously in separate windows The results can be displayed as abso lute deviations or relative to a reference value or level e The abbreviation AF for Audio Frequency refers to the demodulated AM FM or PM signal Basis for evaluation All evaluations are based on the I Q data set acquired during the
330. he measurement and on the unit you have currently set If you are measuring with the auto peak detector the command returns positive peak values only To retrieve negative peak val ues define a second trace with a negative peak detector Example TRAC TRACE3 Queries the data of trace 3 Usage SCPI confirmed Exporting Trace Results Trace results can be exported to a file For more commands concerning data and results storage see the R amp S FSW User Manual MMEMony STORESSA TRACE eI cni des vei dadedueveadneceus eso tn vea coded eee patte v edes 306 FORMatDEXIPOIT DSEPatstop 2 rr cor roh pE Eo Do cerei enian 307 FORMaEDEXPortHEADr 2 cite sues ote neuen aE E EANO EA RERNE 307 FORMSEUDEXPOIUTRADES urea ditt este eoi est amt aM MD RE a aA ERI ERU SIPLM Ret Ga niae 308 MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe Trace lt FileName gt This command exports trace data from the specified window to an ASCII file Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device Retrieving Results For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Paramete
331. he next free power sensor index for which Auto Assignment is selected Alternatively you can assign the sensors manually by deactivating the Auto option and selecting a serial number from the list Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt STATe on page 224 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer lt p gt DEFine on page 218 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer p CONFigure AUTO STATe on page 217 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer COUNt on page 217 Zeroing Power Sensor Starts zeroing of the power sensor For details on the zeroing process refer to the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command CALibration PMETer lt p gt ZERO AUTO ONCE on page 219 Frequency Manual Defines the frequency of the signal to be measured The power sensor has a memory with frequency dependent correction factors This allows extreme accuracy for signals of a known frequency Remote command SENSe PHETer p FREQuency on page 222 Input and Frontend Settings Frequency Coupling Selects the coupling option The frequency can be coupled automatically to the center frequency of the instrument or to the frequency of marker 1 Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt FREQuency LINK on page 222 Unit Scale Selects the unit with which the measured power is to be displayed Available units are dBm dB W and If dB or 96 is selected the display is relative to the reference value that is defined with either the Meas Ref
332. he upper diagram border over range is displayed in the status line Overloading can be avoided as follows e Reducing the output level of the external generator Source Power on page 75 in External Generator gt Measurement Configuration Increasing the reference level Reference Level in the Amplitude menu 4 7 5 Input from Noise Sources The R amp S FSW provides a connector NOISE SOURCE CONTROL with a voltage sup ply for an external noise source By switching the supply voltage for an external noise Source on or off in the firmware you can activate or deactive the device as required External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FSW itself for example when measuring the noise level of an amplifier In this case you can first connect an external noise source whose noise power level is known in advance to the R amp S FSW and measure the total noise power From this value you can determine the noise power of the R amp S FSW Then when you measure the power level of the actual DUT you can deduct the known noise level from the total power to obtain the power level of the DUT The noise source is controlled in the Output settings see Noise Source on page 127 4 7 6 Receiving and Providing Trigger Signals Using one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors of the R amp S FSW the R amp S FSW can use a signal from an external device as a trigger to c
333. her minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker vertically to the minimum level for the current fre quency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker If the marker hasn t been active yet the command first looks for the peak level for all frequencies and moves the marker vertically to the minimum level Usage Event Using Delta Markers The following commands control spectrogram delta markers Useful commands for spectrogram markers described elsewhere The following commands define the horizontal position of the delta markers x ELTamarker m MAXimum E CALCulate lt n gt EFT on page 333 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 333 ELTamarker lt m CALCulate lt n gt MAXimum PEAK on page 333 CALCulate lt n gt CALCulate lt n gt Tamarker lt m MINimum LEFT on page 333 gt ELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt on page 333 gt e CALCulatecn Tamarker lt m MINimum NEXT on page 334 Analyzing Results CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum
334. his command actually changes the limit line definition points by the value you define lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Distance gt Defines the distance that the limit line moves The unit depends on CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UNIT on page 349 Usage Event Analyzing Results Manual operation See Shift y on page 159 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer SPACing lt InterpolType gt This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of an upper limit line from one horizontal point to the next Parameters lt InterpolType gt LINear LOGarithmic RST LIN Manual operation See X Axis on page 158 See Y Axis on page 158 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer STATe lt State gt This command turns an upper limit line on and off Before you can use the command you have to select a limit line with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt NAME on page 349 lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Visibility on page 155 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer THReshold Limit This command defines an absolute limit for limit lines with a relative scale The R amp S FSW uses the threshold for the limit check if the limit line violates the thresh old lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Limit gt Numeric value The unit depends on CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UNIT on page 349
335. his function is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active Parameters lt Attenuation gt Range see data sheet Increment 5 dB RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Defines a 30 dB attenuation and decouples the attenuation from the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 91 INPut ATTenuation AUTO lt State gt This command couples or decouples the attenuation to the reference level Thus when the reference level is changed the R amp S FSW determines the signal level for optimal internal data processing and sets the required attenuation accordingly This function is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation to the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 91 INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines an electronic attenuation manually Automatic mode must be switched off INP EATT AUTO OFF see INPut BATT AUTO on page 245 If the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level This command requires the electronic attenuation hardware option It is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is active Configuring the Measurement
336. his value also affects the unit conversion see Reference Level on page 89 This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface or from the optional Analog Baseband Interface For analog baseband input an impe dance of 50 Q is always used Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 190 Direct Path Enables or disables the use of the direct path for small frequencies In spectrum analyzers passive analog mixers are used for the first conversion of the input signal In such mixers the LO signal is coupled into the IF path due to its limited isolation The coupled LO signal becomes visible at the RF frequency 0 Hz This effect is referred to as LO feedthrough Input and Frontend Settings To avoid the LO feedthrough the spectrum analyzer provides an alternative signal path to the A D converter referred to as the direct path By default the direct path is selected automatically for RF frequencies close to zero However this behavior can be deactivated If Direct Path is set to Off the spectrum analyzer always uses the ana log mixer path Auto Default The direct path is used automatically for frequencies close to zero Off The analog mixer path is always used Remote command INPut DPATh on page 189 High Pass Filter 1 3 GHz Activates an additional internal high pass filter for RF input signals from 1 GHz to 3 GHz This filter is used to remove the harmonics of the analyzer in order t
337. hus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 306 6 3 Working with Markers in the R amp S FSW Analog Demodulation application Basically markers in the R amp S FSW Analog Demodulation application are very similar to those in the Spectrum application However some additional functions are available e Marker oeltlligs uento tenderer eae E ERU RG 141 e Marker Search Settings and Positioning Functions seeeseses 145 e Measunng Pase Nola esie eden ace Een c eel ce ean c t dn RR 148 e Marker F nction ConfIQUEFallOli oreet re ipt eter np 148 6 3 1 6 3 1 1 Working with Markers in the R amp S FSW Analog Demodulation application Marker Settings Access Overview gt Analysis gt Marker gt Markers or Marker gt Markers The remote commands required to define these settings are described in chap ter 11 8 1 Working with Markers Remotely on page 315 e Tndividual Markor SetuP facets ccscanssnsodedcbsacsGicadstaeasnaxenagusvacdadesazadetsancdesevavaeviecdasads 141 e General Marker Settings icnn ian ineo einen ee 143 Individual Marker
338. i 270 SENSe ADEMod n SPECtrum SPAN MAXimum eeeeeeeeseee nnnm 270 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SPEC SPAN ZOOM Span This command sets the span around the center frequency for RF spectrum result dis play The span is limited to the demodulation bandwidth see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 252 lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters Span RST 5 MHz Example ADEM SPEC SPAN ZOOM 200 kHz Sets the rF span to 200 kHz Manual operation See Span on page 116 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SPECtrum SPAN MAXimum lt FreqRange gt Sets the DBW to the specified value and the span around the center frequency of the RF data to be evaluated to its new maximum the demodulation bandwidth lt n gt is irrelevant Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt FreqRange gt RST 5 MHz Default unit Hz Manual operation See Span on page 116 See RF Full Span on page 116 11 4 8 4 Post processing AF Filters The AF filter reduces the evaluated bandwidth of the demodulated signal and can define a weighting function AF filters are only available for AM or FM time domain evaluations SENSe FILTer n AWEighted STATe nineteenth nene anh aari 271 SENSe FIL Teran gt AOF EET 271 SENSe FILTeren s CCIR WEIGhted STAT cacciecestecseecsesacecccsansaseeeesnasecdeeseuascevesiveredes 272 SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIR UNWeighted STAT
339. ic settings concern general usage of an external mixer SENSE MIXE STATS a iiir cet betae pese EXE deedeedentaleamaneasdadedhasacdaagazs 191 SENSe MIXer BIAS HIGEHI eiie rhet erroe retrace rebate nn p penne ppe tenue a anida id 191 SENSe MIXer BIAS LOW c c scscsessescsesecscssscsesesscevsesteavacsseesecssssasetstsasatsvansavansnsasanaess 192 SENSe MIXer EOBOWSF 2 aote iaaiiai et cease Er vete ee eaa eo d RED RE creas 192 ISENSe JMIXSESIGNSL cero orae n RE E es aya RENE neci KE SEE a Seu E NEE EET 192 SENSe MIXer THReshi old 1 olii ripa e Eae kn neben et bae nme e nina a eR ipaa eia 193 SENSe MIXer STATe State Activates or deactivates the use of a connected external mixer as input for the mea surement This command is only available if the optional External Mixer is installed and an external mixer is connected Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example MIX ON Manual operation See External Mixer State on page 57 SENSe MIXer BIAS HIGH lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias current for the high second range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 191 Parameters BiasSetting RST 0 0A Default unit A Configuring the Measurement Manual operation See Bias Settings on page 61 SENSe MIXer BIAS LOW lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias current for the low first range
340. idal signals This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface Remote command SENSe ADJust FREQuency on page 283 Automatic Settings Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Automatically determines a reference level which ensures that no overload occurs at the R amp S FSW for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the full scale level are adjusted so the sig nal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression and clipping are minimized To determine the required reference level a level measurement is performed on the R amp S FSW If necessary you can optimize the reference level further by manually decreasing the attenuation level to the lowest possible value before an overload occurs then decreas ing the reference level in the same way When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 the level measurement is performed on the connected oscilloscope Y axis scaling on the oscil loscope is limited to a minimum of 5mV per division You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 133 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 283 Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto Resets the measurement duration for automatic settings to the default value
341. ils on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet Remote command TRIG SOUR IFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 259 Baseband Power Trigger Source Defines triggering on the baseband power for baseband input via the optional Digital Baseband Interface or the optional Analog Baseband interface For more information on the the Digital Baseband Interface or the Analog Baseband Interface see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and l Q Input User Manual Remote command TRIG SOUR BBP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 259 Digital I Q Trigger Source For applications that process I Q data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applica tions and only if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is available Defines triggering of the measurement directly via the LVDS connector In the selection list you must specify which general purpose bit GPO to GP5 will provide the trigger data Note If the Digital I Q enhanced mode is used i e the connected device supports transfer rates up to 200 Msps only the general purpose bits GPO and GP1 are available as a Digital l Q trigger source The following table describes the assignment of the general purpose bits to the LVDS connector pins For details on the LVDS connector see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer User Manual Table 5 1 Assignment of general purpose bits to LVDS connector pins Bit LVDS pin GPO SDATA4_P Trigger1 GP1
342. imit line an offset does not actually change the limit line defi nition points Parameters lt Offset gt Numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB Manual operation See Y Offset on page 156 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer SHIFt lt Distance gt This command moves a complete lower limit line vertically Analyzing Results Compared to defining an offset this command actually changes the limit line definition points by the value you define Parameters lt Distance gt Defines the distance that the limit line moves The unit depends on CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UNIT on page 349 Manual operation See Shift y on page 159 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer SPACing lt InterpolT ype gt This command selects linear or logarithmic interpolation for the calculation of a lower limit line from one horizontal point to the next Parameters lt InterpolType gt LiNear LOGarithmic RST LIN Manual operation See X Axis on page 158 See Y Axis on page 158 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer STATe lt State gt This command turns a lower limit line on and off Before you can use the command you have to select a limit line with CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt NAME on page 349 lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Visibility on page 155 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer THReshold Threshold
343. ines the selected detector type Note If the EMI R amp S FSW K54 measurement option is installed and the filter type CISPR is selected additional detectors are availa ble even if EMI measurement is not active Remote command SENSe WINDow lt n gt DETector lt t gt FUNCtion on page 289 SENSe WINDow lt n gt DETector lt t gt FUNCtion AUTO on page 290 Hold If activated traces in Min Hold Max Hold and Average mode are not reset after specific parameter changes have been made Normally the measurement is started again after parameter changes before the mea surement results are analyzed e g using a marker In all cases that require a new measurement after parameter changes the trace is reset automatically to avoid false results e g with span changes For applications that require no reset after parameter changes the automatic reset can be switched off The default setting is off Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE HCONtinuous on page 285 Average Mode Defines the mode with which the trace is averaged over several sweeps A different averaging mode can be defined for each trace This setting is only applicable if trace mode Average is selected How many sweeps are averaged is defined by the Average Count on page 138 Linear The power level values are converted into linear units prior to averag ing After the averaging the data is converted back into it
344. ings on page 139 11 7 3 Retrieving Results FORMat DEXPort TRACes Selection This command selects the data to be included in a data export file see MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 306 Parameters lt Selection gt SINGle Only a single trace is selected for export namely the one speci fied by the MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe command ALL Selects all active traces and result tables e g Result Summary marker peak list etc in the current application for export to an ASCII file The trace parameter for the MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe command is ignored RST SINGle Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Export all Traces and all Table Results on page 139 Retrieving Result Summary Values The result summary contains measurement values that are calculated from the trace data For details see Result Summary on page 21 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod AFRequency RESuUlt 308 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod AM RESUuIt lt t gt ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaes 309 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod FM RESult lt t gt ccccceceseseseseseneeeenes 309 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod PM RESUuIt lt t gt ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaes 309 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod AM RESult t RELative 309
345. ion bandwidth VBW 30000 Hz SWT 0 005 s Video bandwidth Sweep time Sweep Count 20 Number of sweeps set Ref Position 75 Position of reference level referred to diagram limits 0 lower edge Level Range 100 dB Display range in y direction Unit dB with x axis LOG 96 with x axis LIN User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 313 Analyzing Results File contents Description x Axis LIN Scaling of x axis linear LIN or logarithmic LOG y Axis LOG Scaling of y axis linear LIN or logarithmic LOG x Unit Hz Unit of x values Hz with span gt 0 s with span 0 dBm dB with statistics measurements y Unit dBm Unit of y values dB V A W depending on the selected unit with y axis LOG or with y axis LIN Data section for individual window Window 1 Frequency Sweep Window number and name Trace 1 Selected trace Trace Mode AVERAGE Display mode of trace CLR WRITE AVER AGE MAXHOLD MINHOLD Detector AUTOPEAK Detector set AUTOPEAK MAXPEAK MINPEAK AVER AGE RMS SAMPLE QUASIPEAK Values 1001 Number of measurement points 10000 10 3 15 7 10130 11 5 16 9 10360 12 0 17 4 Measured values lt x value gt lt y1 gt lt y2 gt lt y2 gt being available only with detector AUTOPEAK and containing in this case the smallest of the two measured values for a measurement point Data section for individual trace Trace 2
346. ion for digital IF filters is also ideally suited for demodulating AM FM or PM signals The firmware option R amp S FSW K7 provides the necessary measurement functions The R amp S FSW Analog Demodulation application features e AM FM and PM demodulation with various result displays Modulation signal versus time Spectrum of the modulation signal FFT RF signal power versus time Spectrum of the RF signal Determining maximum minimum and average or current values in parallel over a selected number of measurements e Maximum accuracy and temperature stability due to sampling digitization already at the IF and digital down conversion to the baseband I Q e Error free AM to FM conversion and vice versa without deviation errors frequency response or frequency drift at DC coupling e Relative demodulation in relation to a user defined or measured reference value This user manual contains a description of the functionality that the application pro vides including remote control operation All functions not discussed in this manual are the same as in the base unit and are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual The latest version is available for download at the product homepage http www2 rohde schwarz com product F SW html Installation You can find detailed installation instructions in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual or in the Release Notes 2 1 Starting the Analog Demodulation Application
347. ions of the keywords The short form is emphasized in upper case letters Note however that this emphasis only serves the purpose to distinguish the short from the long form in the manual For the instrument the case does not matter Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as SENS FREQ CENT Numeric Suffixes Some keywords have a numeric suffix if the command can be applied to multiple instances of an object In that case the suffix selects a particular instance e g a mea surement window Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets n next to the keyword If you don t quote a suffix for keywords that support one a 1 is assumed Example DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe enables the zoom in a particular mea surement window selected by the suffix at WINDow DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON refers to window 4 Optional Keywords Some keywords are optional and are only part of the syntax because of SCPI compli ance You can include them in the header or not Note that if an optional keyword has a numeric suffix and you need to use the suffix you have to include the optional keyword Otherwise the suffix of the missing keyword is assumed to be the value 1 Optional keywords are emphasized with square brackets 11 1 5 11 1 6 11 1 6 1 Introduction Example Without a numeric suffix in the optional keyword SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the s
348. is command uses the normalized measurement data to generate a transducer factor with up to 1001 points The trace data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and stored in a file with the specified name and the suffix tra under c r_s instr trd The frequency points are allocated in equidistant steps between start and stop frequency The generated transducer factor can be further adapted using the commands descri bed in the Remote Commands gt Configuring the R amp S FSW gt Working with Transduc ers section in the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters lt Name gt lt name gt Example CORR TRAN GEN SMW200A1 Creates the transducer file C r_s instr trd SMW200A trd Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Save As Trd Factor on page 79 Programming Example for External Generator Control The following example demonstrates how to work with an external generator in a remote environment It assumes a signal generator of the type SMWO6 is connected to the R amp S FSW including TTL synchronization as described in chapter 4 7 4 1 External Generator Connections on page 33 ea a a Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument RST Set the frequency span SENS FREQ STAR 10HZ SENS FREQ STOP 1MHZ Set the generator type to SMW06 with a frequency range of 100 kHz to 4GHz SYST COMM RDEV GEN TYPE SMWO06 Set the interface used to the GPIB address 28 SYST COMM RDEV GEN INT GPIB SYST COMM
349. is connector in the RF input configuration see Input Connector on page 55 The probe s attenuation is compensated automatically by the R amp S FSW using a trans ducer named Probe on Baseband Input The probe can only be connected on I as only input at the connector can be redirected to the RF path A comment is assigned that includes the type name and serial number of the detected probe The transducer is deleted as soon as the probe is disconnected For details on transducers see the General Instrument Setup section in the R amp S FSW User Manual For more information on the BASEBAND INPUT connector R amp S FSW B7 1 see the R amp S FSW R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and 1 Q Input User Manual Using Probes As an alternative means of input to the R amp S FSW active probes from Rohde amp Schwarz can be connected to the optional BASEBAND INPUT connectors if the Analog Base band Interface option R amp S FSW B71 is installed These probes allow you to perform voltage measurements very flexibly and precisely on all sorts of devices to be tested without interfering with the signal Connecting probes Probes are automatically detected when you plug them into the upper BASEBAND INPUT connectors on the front panel of the R amp S FSW The detected information on the probe is displayed in the Probes tab of the Input dialog box individually for each connector User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 31 4 7 4 Receiving Data Input an
350. ission for example to eliminate frequencies that are more prone to interferences In this case the emphasis function must be reversed after demodulation This is done by the deem phasis filter The deemphasis filter is active in the following demodulation bandwidth range 25 us 25 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 40 MHz 50 us 6 4 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 18 MHz 75 Us 6 4 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 18 MHz 750 us 800 Hz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 MHz Depending on the deemphasis filter minimum demodulation bandwidth is required for an error less than 0 5 dB up to a maximum AF frequency The following table shows the dependencies Deemphasis us 25 us 50 us 75 us 750 us Max AF frequency 25 kHz 12 kHz 8 kHz 800 Hz Required demodulation bandwidth 2200kHz 2100kHz 250kHz 2 6 4 kHz For higher AF frequencies the demodulation bandwidth must be increased Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt DEMPhasis STATe on page 273 SENSe FILTer lt n gt DEMPhasis TCONstant on page 272 5 7 4 5 7 4 1 Demodulation Deactivating all AF Filters The All Filter Off button deactivates all AF filters for the selected evaluation Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt AOFF on page 271 Scaling Access Overview gt Demod Settings gt Scaling or Meas Setup gt Demod gt Scaling tab The scaling parameters define the rang
351. ital I Q Input Settings The following settings and functions are available to provide input via the optional Digi tal Baseband Interface in the applications that support it These settings are only available if the Digital Baseband Interface option is installed on the R amp S FSW They can be configured via the INPUT OUTPUT key in the Input dialog box Input and Frontend Settings input Input Source Power Sensor Frequency Digital IQ Input Sample Rate 10 0 MHz Auto Wanual Full Scale Level IQR100 101165 Digital IQ OUT 10 MHz 10 dBm For more information see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and l Q Input User Manual Digtal OQ Input SEE ern tent oa d tetendit enge ntes 67 lietysjerdcum e 67 IUES Le Vel ER 67 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level eene enne 68 Connected Iistturei ciere iret retra ede aeneae ta ER EE de E Rd 68 Nice ERI 68 Digital I Q Input State Enables or disable the use of the Digital IQ input source for measurements Digital IQ is only available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface is installed Remote command INPut SELect on page 190 Input Sample Rate Defines the sample rate of the digital I Q signal source This sample rate must corre spond with the sample rate provided by the connected device e g a generator If Auto is selected the sample rate is adjusted automatically by the connected device
352. ital I Q Input and Output Useful commands for digital I Q data described elsewhere INP SEL DIQ see INPut SELect on page 190 Configuring the Measurement TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower on page 256 Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software always begin with SOURce EBOX Such commands are passed on from the R amp S FSW to the R amp S DiglConf automatically which then configures the R amp S EX IQ BOX via the USB connection All remote commands available for configuration via the R amp S DiglConf software are described in the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software Example 1 SOURce EBOX RST SOURce EBOX IDN Result Rohde amp Schwarz DiglConf 02 05 436 Build 47 Example 2 SOURCe EBOX USER CLOCk REFerence FREQuency 5MHZ Defines the frequency value of the reference clock Remote commands exclusive to digital I Q data input and output INPUR DIO CDE Vite c 211 IN PutbIOXRANGeEEUPPBetr AUTO onono latex ANE EA T 212 INPutDIO RANGe COUPling curae tnn n rp n enr nemen ttp a aiaa aii 213 INPUtE DIORANG UPP EN m RREES 213 INPULDIQURANGe UPPER UNIT issendu uunc aka iter ete 213 INPUEDIQ SRAM ES 213 INPUT DIOS RAMS WTO maidin anneni aa Aa a eaaa E EA aa ANa EDN ii 214 INPut DIQ CDEVice This
353. ital baseband input only TRIGger SEQuence LEVel BBPower on page 256 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower on page 258 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel AM RELative on page 258 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel AM ABSolute on page 258 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel FM on page 258 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel PM on page 259 Trigger Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the sweep offset 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger For the Time trigger source this function is not available Remote command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 255 Hysteresis Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Settting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level This setting is only available for IF Power trigger sources The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 with an IF power trigger the hysteresis refers to the robust width trigger For details see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page 256 Drop Out Time Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again Trigger Configuration
354. ive the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Search Minimum on page 147 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 148 11 8 1 6 Configuring Special Marker Functions The following commands are required to configure the special marker functions that are available in the Analog Demodulation application e Fixed Reference Marker Settings 2 c c cccceieescsdesteeeeeddcdeeeecueceneeeenecenseeeestnene 334 e Makar PEAK NS Te asi esis dca raced WERE DI mH Wed NA 336 PGB Down MatKeL eo orte tet tuere a Eon a ntes AANA 340 e Phase Noise Measurement Markel c ccccccceccesseeeeeceaceeseeeeseeseseeeeeesenensseeeeeees 343 Fixed Reference Marker Settings The following commands configure a fixed reference marker Analyzing Results CALOCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint MAXimum PEAK 335 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOINE X cccceescceceesecesseeeeeeneees 335 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOINY 0cccceescceeeeseceseeeeeeeneees 335 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed RPOint Y OFFSet cccsccceseeeeeeees 335 CAL
355. kHz 31 25 kHz 100 kHz 50 kHz 62 5 kHz 200 kHz 100 kHz 125 kHz 400 kHz 200 kHz 250 kHz 800 kHz 400 kHz 500 kHz 1 6 MHz 800 kHz 1 MHz 3 2 MHz 1 6 MHz 2MHz 6 4 MHz 3 MHz 4 MHz 10 666 MHz 5 MHz 8 MHz 12 MHz 8 MHz 16 MHz 32 MHz 10 MHz 32 MHz 40 MHz 18 MHz 32 MHz 72 MHz 28 MHz 64 MHz 112 MHz User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 27 AF Triggers Demodulation BW Sample Rate Flat Top Sample Rate Gaussian Top 40 MHz 64 MHz 160 MHz 80 MHz 128 MHz 320 MHz 160 MHz 200 MHz 640 MHz 320 MHz 400 MHz 500 MHz9 600 MHz Gaussian filter curve is limited by I Q bandwidth 1 only available with option B28 2 only available with option B40 3 only available with option B80 4 only available with option B160 5 only available with option B320 9 only available with option B500 Large numbers of samples Principally the R amp S FSW can handle up to 1 6 million samples However when 480001 samples are exceeded all traces that are not currently being displayed in a window are deactivated to improve performance The traces can only be activated again when the samples are reduced o Effects of measurement time on the stability of measurement results Despite amplitude and frequency modulation the display of carrier power and carrier frequency offset is stable This is achieved by a digital filter which sufficiently suppresses the modulation provi ded however that the measurement time is 2 3
356. ker position in the spectrogram Using Markers The following commands control spectrogram markers Useful commands for spectrogram markers described elsewhere The following commands define the horizontal position of the markers CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 331 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 331 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK on page 331 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt on page 332 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 332 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK on page 332 e 2 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT on page 332 e gt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimu RIGHt on page 332 Remote commands exclusive to spectrogram markers CALOCulate n MARKer m SGRam FRAMe eesssssssssssssssesene nennen ennt nnn nnne 324 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram FRAMe esses 324 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam SARG8 cccccceeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeaea eee eaeeedeeseteeeeeeereneees 324 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram SARea essen 324 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam XY MAXimum PEAK eeeeeeeeeeeeee een 324 CALCulate n MARKer m SPECtrogram XY MAXimum PEAK essen 324 CALCulate n MARKer m SGRam XY MINimum PEAK
357. l and the Spectrum application in particular Furthermore the soft ware functions that enhance the basic functionality for various applications are descri bed here An introduction to remote control is provided as well as information on main tenance instrument interfaces and troubleshooting Conventions Used in the Documentation In the individual application manuals the specific instrument functions of the applica tion are described in detail For additional information on default settings and parame ters refer to the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S FSW is not inclu ded in the application manuals All user manuals are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html Service Manual This manual is available in PDF format on the Documentation DVD delivered with the instrument It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications instrument function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the R amp S FSW by replacing modules Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified func tions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corre sponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The most recent release notes are also available for download f
358. l be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer REFResh ALL This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SySTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only in MSRA MSRT mode The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by all active MSRA MSRT applications The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Example SYST SEQ OFF Deactivates the scheduler INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a new data measurement and waits for the end of the Sweep INIT SEQ REFR Refreshes the display for all channels Usage Event SYSTem SEQuencer State This command turns the Sequencer on and off The Sequencer must be active before any other Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are executed otherwise an error will occur Configuring the Result Display A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 The Sequencer is activated and a sequential measurement is started immediately OFF 0 The Sequencer is deactivated Any running sequential measure ments are stopped Further Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are not available RST 0 Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single Sequencer mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential me
359. l columns depending on the measurement which are also separated by a sem icolon The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row Generally the format of this ASCII file can be processed by spreadsheet calculation programs e g MS Excel Different language versions of evaluation programs may require a different handling of the decimal point Thus you can define the decimal sep arator to be used decimal point or comma see Decimal Separator on page 140 Table 11 4 ASCII file format for trace export in the Spectrum application File contents Description Header data Type R amp S FSW Instrument model Version 1 00 Firmware version Date 01 Oct 2006 Date of data set storage Mode ANALYZER Operating mode Preamplifier OFF Preamplifier status Transducer OFF Transducer status Center Freq 55000 Hz Center frequency Freq Offset 0 Hz Frequency offset Start 10000 Hz Stop 100000 Hz Start stop of the display range Unit Hz for span gt 0 s for span 0 dBm dB for statistics mea surements Span 90000 Hz Frequency range 0 Hz in zero span and statistics measure ments Ref Level 30 dBm Reference level Level Offset 0 dB Level offset Rf Att 20 dB Input attenuation EI Att 2 0 dB Electrical attenuation RBW 100000 Hz Resolut
360. l of the external mixer s LO port Possible values are from 13 0 dBm to 17 0 dBm in 0 1 dB steps Default value is 15 5 dB Remote command SENSe MIXer LOPower on page 192 Signal ID Activates or deactivates visual signal identification Two sweeps are performed alter nately Trace 1 shows the trace measured on the upper side band USB of the LO the test sweep trace 2 shows the trace measured on the lower side band LSB i e the reference sweep Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that per form frequency sweeps not in the VSA the I Q Analyzer or the Real Time application for instance Mathematical functions with traces and trace copy cannot be used with the Signal ID function Remote command SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 192 Auto ID Activates or deactivates automatic signal identification Auto ID basically functions like Signal ID However the test and reference sweeps are converted into a single trace by a comparison of maximum peak values of each sweep point The result of this comparison is displayed in trace 3 if Signal ID is active at the same time If Signal ID is not active the result can be displayed in any of the traces 1 to 3 Unwanted mixer products are suppressed in this calculated trace Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that per form frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the I Q Analyzer for instance
361. lation bandwidth range from 800 Hz to 4 MHz with a time constant of 750 us Manual operation See Deemphasis on page 119 SENSe FlLTer lt n gt DEMPhasis STATe State This command activates deactivates the selected deemphasis for the specified evalua tion For details about deemphasis refer to Deemphasis on page 119 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT DEMP ON Activates the selected deemphasis Manual operation See Deemphasis on page 119 SENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs FREQuency ABSolute FilterType This command selects the high pass filter type for the specified evaluation For details on the high pass filters refer to High Pass on page 117 Parameters lt FilterType gt 20 Hz 50 Hz 300 Hz RST 300Hz Default unit Hz Example FILT HPAS FREQ 300Hz Selects the high pass filter for the demodulation bandwidth range from 800 Hz to 8 MHz Manual operation See High Pass on page 117 SENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs FREQuency MANual lt Frequency gt This command selects the cutoff frequency of the high pass filter for the specified eval uation For details on the high pass filters refer to High Pass on page 117 Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt Frequency gt numeric value Range 0 to 3 MHz RST 15kHz Example FILT HPAS FREQ MAN 3MHz The AF results are restricted to frequencies lower than 3 MHz Manual operation See High Pass on page
362. layed for the current measurement settings The display is only set once it is not adapted further if the measurement settings are changed again Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ONCE on page 247 Scaling Defines the scaling method for the y axis 5 7 5 Demodulation Logarithmic Logarithmic scaling only available for logarithmic units dB and A V Watt Linear Unit Linear scaling in the unit of the measured signal Linear Per Linear scaling in percentages from 0 to 100 cent Absolute The labeling of the level lines refers to the absolute value of the refer ence level not available for Linear Percent Relative The scaling is in dB relative to the reference level only available for logarithmic units dB The upper line of the grid reference level is always at 0 dB Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 248 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE on page 247 Units Access Overview gt Demod Settings gt Unit or Meas Setup gt Demod gt Unit tab The units define how the demodulated data is displayed Demod Spectrum AfFilter Scaling Unit Unit Phase Unit THD Unit 0 o Se 2 AM Spectrum gt Phase Urmit ad D6eg unie etuer rent d db eda ir alee Pes sa cut Rada 124 TD Writ Vos DB e 125 ius
363. line value Reference POSON iui coit recti ero terrx ot Reference trace Reference value Reflection measurement ssssseses 35 Reflection open measurement sssssse 78 Reflection short measurement Remote control sesinin naan iff rd Transducer factor m Transmission measurement sssssss 35 78 TI L synehironization uot oen retine tine 33 External Mixer Activating remote control sssssss 191 DP M Basic settings Configuration Conversion lOSS ici cra sco tni en pe tein conden pen Ernie dado 59 Conversion loss tables sssssssssseees 62 Frequency Farige 2 2 oret tenenti tes 57 Handover frequency Harmonic Order 58 Harmonie Type re enr 58 Name 2 ott e o S ne gp std ied 65 Programming example sess 202 Range nne 58 Restoring DANS acra cet ede es 58 RF overrange 57 197 RE Stam RF Stop eite eter ete teens etat 57 Serial n tmboet siete 5 seb e eras 65 zm 58 65 197 External reference External generator een eee tea 36 External generator control ssussssss 74 External trigger 98 99 Level power sensor ssssssssseenee 87 Level remote 256 Power SenSOr tette
364. litude configuration described elsewhere SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 283 Remote commands exclusive to amplitude configuration CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion REFerence eeeeseeeeeee eese ener 242 GALOulatesp UNEFIDPONBSI siete ca tnter enr Ehe Ex A ENT Fen a de eser EXE Reb aR cr aman 242 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel sseeeseeenenenennnnne 243 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet ueseesessssse 243 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion REFerence This command matches the reference level to the power level of a marker If you use the command in combination with a delta marker that delta marker is turned into a normal marker Example CALC MARK2 FUNC REF Sets the reference level to the level of marker 2 Usage Event This command selects the unit of the y axis The unit applies to all power based measurement windows regardless of the lt n gt suf fix 11 4 5 2 Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt Unit gt DBM V A W DBPW WATT DBUV DBMV VOLT DBUA AMPere RST dBm Example CALC UNIT POW DBM Sets the power unit to dBm Manual operation See Unit on page 90 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant With a reference level offset 0 the value r
365. lled a preamplifier can be activated for the RF input signal You can use a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low input power This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface For R amp S FSW26 or higher models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the pream plifier is activated For R amp S FSW8 or 13 models the following settings are available Off Deactivates the preamplifier 15 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 15 dB 30 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 30 dB Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 246 INPut GAIN VALue on page 246 Input Coupling Input Settings The RF input of the R amp S FSW can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct cur rent DC This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface or from the optional Analog Baseband Interface AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 188 Impedance Input Settings For some measurements the reference impedance for the measured levels of the R amp S FSW can be set to 50 Q
366. lloscope FSW Rear Panel z 9 iz a im a t d Continue Alignment For the second alignment step the connector must be disconnected from the REF OUTPUT 640 MHZ connector and instead connected to the FSW B2000 ALIGNMENT SIGNAL SOURCE connector on the R amp S FSW To continue the alignment select the Continue Alignment button After the second alignment step has been completed successfully a new dialog box is displayed User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 82 R amp S FSW K7 Configuration Alignment finished Please reconnect RTO CH1 to FSW IF OUT 2 GHz Oscilloscope FSW Rear Panel 4 i00 go0gg In order to switch from alignment mode to measurement mode move the cable from the FSW B2000 ALIGNMENT SIGNAL SOURCE back to the IF OUT 2 GHZ connec tor so that it is then connected to the CH1 input on the oscilloscope If UNCAL is displayed alignment was not yet performed successfully If both alignment steps were performed successfully the date of alignment is indicated Remote commands SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment STEP STATe on page 205 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment DATE on page 206 5 3 2 Power Sensor The R amp S FSW can also analyze data from a connected power sensor For background information on working with power sensors see the R amp S FSW User Manual 5 3 2 1 Power Sensor Setti
367. lues to the left of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 147 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 147 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Manual operation See Peak Search on page 147 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Peak on page 147 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value Analyzing Results The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 148 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher minimum value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Next Minimum on page 148 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet act
368. ly mode in an editor Although the existing setup files are displayed in read only mode in the editor they can be saved under a different name using File SaveAs Be careful however to adhere to the required syntax and commands Errors will only be detected and displayed when you try to use the new generator see also chap ter 4 7 4 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 44 For details see chapter 4 7 4 3 Generator Setup Files on page 38 Frequency Min Frequency Max For reference only Lower and upper frequency limit for the generator Level Min Level Max For reference only Lower and upper power limit for the generator Measurement Settings The measurement settings for external generator control are configured in the Mea surement Configuration subtab of the External Generator tab Input and Frontend Settings Input Source Power Sensor External Generator Measurement Configuration Source State Interface Source Power Configuration Source Offset Source Calibration Frequency Coupling Coupling State Source Freq RF Offset Result Frequency Start Result Frequency Stop SINC GS CMe oe M OUNCE POW CF M C avanesdeaseadaandanceendstheanndavaatanteantacasaadeage Source Puls DU Source Freggency Coup i idan aeneds aei e eter re e ed re ae Manual Source Fredieligy cuoi ero a rete creta preme Autom
369. lyzer and l Q Input User Manual Remote command INPut CONNector on page 188 Input and Frontend Settings 5 3 1 2 External Mixer Settings Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Source gt External Mixer or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Input Source gt External Mixer If installed the optional external mixer can be configured from the R amp S FSW Analog Demodulation application Note that external mixers are not supported in MSRA MSRT mode For details on using external mixers see the R amp S FSW User Manual Mixer Settings Basic Settings Mixer Settings Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Mixer Settings or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Mixer Settings In this tab you configure the band and specific mixer settings Input Source Radio Frequency External Mixer Mixer Settings Basic Settings Conversion Loss Table Band Settings Mixer Type RF Start RF Stop Handover Freq Mixer Settings Range Harmonic Type Harmonic Order Conversion Loss CENEDINEE orcad Cr ge Hc E Preset Band Mixer Type Managing Conversion Loss Tables Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables Input and Frontend Settings Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration accettate enarrant 58 CRIE VA 4 m
370. m the A D converter and stored in I Q memory Allowed range refer to chapter 4 3 Sample Rate and Demodu lation Bandwidth on page 27 RST 8 MHz lt RecordLength gt Number of samples to be stored in I Q memory Range 1 to 400001 with AF filter or AF trigger active 1 to 480001 with both AF filter and AF trigger deactive RST 501 lt TriggerSource gt Selection of the trigger source to use for the demodulator For details on trigger sources see Trigger Source on page 98 IMMediate EXTernal EXT2 EXT3 IFPower RFPower AF AM AMRelative FM PM Note After selecting IF Power the trigger threshold can be set with the TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower command RST IMMediate lt TriggerSlope gt lt OffsetSamples gt lt NoOfMeas gt Example Configuring the Measurement POSitive NEGative Used slope of the trigger signal The value indicated here will be ignored for lt trigger source gt IMMediate RST POSitive Number of samples to be used as an offset to the trigger signal For details refer to chapter 4 3 Sample Rate and Demodulation Bandwidth on page 27 The value indicated here is ignored for lt trigger source gt IMMediate RST 0 Number of repetitions of the measurement to be executed The value indicated here is especially necessary for the average maxhold minhold function Range 0 to 32767 RST 0 ADEM SET 8MHz 32000 EXT POS 500 30 Performs a measuremen
371. ma tion and even distortion that originates from the RF IF or baseband domains can be analyzed in the I Q baseband Importing and exporting I Q signals is useful for various applications e Generating and saving I Q signals in an RF or baseband signal generator or in external software tools to analyze them with the R amp S FSW later e Capturing and saving I Q signals with an RF or baseband signal analyzer to ana lyze them with the R amp S FSW or an external software tool later For example you can capture I Q data using the I Q Analyzer application if available and then analyze that data later using the R amp S FSW Analog Demodulation application As opposed to storing trace data which may be averaged or restricted to peak values l Q data is stored as it was captured without further processing The data is stored as complex values in 32 bit floating point format Multi channel data is not supported The I Q data is stored in a format with the file extension ig tar For a detailed description see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual Export only in MSRA mode In MSRA mode I Q data can only be exported to other applications I Q data cannot be imported to the MSRA Master or any MSRA applications e mport Export FHIDOCUODS ois ceci eri ir ehe e i e eiat eden 162 e Howto Exportand Import VO Bala iot ttt ted iter e eds 164 Import Export Functions The following import and export functions are available
372. mend t te ret b 110 Drop out time re M Trigger Power sensor Duplicating Measurement channel remote 182 Duty cycle Power SGFISOF screen trece ee d E Oeo da 87 E Electronic input attenuation 0 0 0 cece eee eeees 91 Enhanced mode nce 100 Errors External generator aseri nos tn ren a eae 44 y 89 93 Evaluation Data Dasi eS 13 Method e D 13 Evaluation methods IReITiOLle icis etin a eH ln ea Od d ire E SC das 298 Example Remote control of an external generator 236 Examples RREMOLE CONINO uico detnr etr 365 Export format JB CBS catt o a e tid e x a asd iut 312 Exporting rie 1 Q data x l Q data remote creen 362 Measurement settings ssesssesese 139 Peak list Softkey MW ACES ci ciis cod ee thai tie exten Heint External generator Activating Deactivating seseesees T9 ELI Calibration functions Calibration measurement settings 74 Channel bar information s sierici gens 44 Connections Coupling frequencies tr ern n EONS ERE E a Generators supported Inten aCe sass ds Interface settings eres into rer eco ob Normalizing is Overloading m Recalling calibration settings 78 Reference level Reference line Reference line position Reference
373. ment SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIR WEIGhted STATe State This command activates deactivates the weighted CCIR filter for the specified evalua tion For details on weighting filters see Weighting on page 118 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT CCIR WEIG ON Activates the weighted CCIR filter Manual operation See Weighting on page 118 SENSe FILTer n CCIR UNWeighted STATe State This command activates deactivates the unweighted CCIR filter in the specified win dow For details on weighting filters see Weighting on page 118 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT CCIR UNW ON Activates the unweighted CCIR filter Manual operation See Weighting on page 118 SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIT State This command activates deactivates the CCITT CCITT P 53 weighting filter for the specified evaluation For details on weighting filters see Weighting on page 118 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT CCIT ON Activates the CCITT weighting filter Manual operation See Weighting on page 118 SENSe FILTer lt n gt DEMPhasis TCONstant This command selects the deemphasis for the specified evaluation For details on deemphasis refer to Deemphasis on page 119 Configuring the Measurement Parameters 25 us 50 us 75 us 750 us RST 50 us Example FILT DEMP TCON 750us Selects the deemphasis for the demodu
374. mide roll ple DE 54 limpedanase ei Erb Prep EFL HERR Te eA R0 QU Te aere pe Feeder Pa eS YT ERE aer eu a ea Edd 54 Direct Pell nutem MI LA DD ET 54 Input and Frontend Settings FiglisPass FRO 1 STA Zit death eene ended n e dn eed erede 55 WIG AP ISS SIS GUO EET 55 PUT COMEN P 55 Radio Frequency State Activates input from the RF INPUT connector Remote command INPut SELect on page 190 Input Coupling The RF input of the R amp S FSW can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct cur rent DC This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface or from the optional Analog Baseband Interface AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 188 Impedance For some measurements the reference impedance for the measured levels of the R amp S FSW can be set to 50 Q or 75 OQ 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a 75 Q adapter of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 T
375. mple For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm Manual operation See Upper Level Hysteresis on page 133 SENSe ADJust CONF igure TRIG State Defines the behaviour of the measurement when adjusting a setting automatically using SENS ADJ LEV ON for example See Adjusting settings automatically during triggered measurements on page 132 Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt State gt ON 1 The measurement for automatic adjustment waits for the trigger OFF 0 The measurement for automatic adjustment is performed imme diately without waiting for a trigger RST 1 SENSe ADJust FREQuency This command sets the center frequency to the frequency with the highest signal level in the current frequency range Example ADJ FREQ Usage Event Manual operation See Adjusting the Center Frequency Automatically Auto Freq on page 132 SENSe ADJust LEVel This command initiates a single internal measurement that evaluates and sets the ideal reference level for the current input data and measurement settings This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSW or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Example ADJ LEV Usage Event Manual operation See Setting the Reference Level
376. mum span for AF spectrum result display The maximum span corresponds to DBW 2 see SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 252 lt n gt is irrelevant Example ADEM BAND 5 MHz Sets the demodulation bandwidth to 5 MHz ADEM AF SPAN FULL Sets the AF span to 2 5 MHz Manual operation See AF Full Span on page 115 SENSe JADEMod lt n gt AF STARt Frequency This command sets the start frequency for AF spectrum result display lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Frequency gt RST 0 MHz Example ADEM AF STAR 0 kHz Sets the AF start frequency to 0 kHz ADEM AF STOP 500 kHz Sets the AF stop frequency to 500 kHz Manual operation See AF Start on page 114 Configuring the Measurement SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF STOP Frequency This command sets the stop frequency for AF spectrum result display lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Frequency gt RST 9 MHz Example ADEM AF STAR 0 kHz Sets the AF start frequency to 0 kHz ADEM AF STOP 500 kHz Sets the AF stop frequency to 500 kHz Manual operation See AF Stop on page 115 RF evaluation These settings are only available for RF evaluation both in time and frequency domain Useful commands described elsewhere SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 240 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 252 Specific commands SENSe JADEMod n SPEC SPANZOOM cci eii rotonda ated cero aiana aidia ctae kiiri
377. n e Configure the Squelch function on the Demod tab to suppress noise dur ing demodulation e Fortime domain evaluations zoom into the areas of interest by defining a zoom area on the Demod tab e For AF evaluations use special filters to eliminate certain effects of demodula tion or to correct pre emphasized modulated signals on the AF Filters tab e Adapt the diagram scaling to the displayed data on the Scaling tab Select the Analysis button in the Overview to make use of the advanced analy sis functions in the demodulation displays e Configure a trace to display the average over a series of sweeps on the Trace tab if necessary increase the Sweep Count in the Data Acquisition settings e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the demodulated signal on the Marker tab e Use special marker functions to calculate phase noise or an n dB down band width on the Marker Config tab e Configure a limit check to detect excessive deviations on the Lines tab 10 Start a new sweep with the defined settings In multistandard mode you may want to stop the continuous measurement mode by the Sequencer and perform a single data acquisition a Select the Sequencer icon E from the toolbar b Set the Sequencer state to OFF c Press the RUN SINGLE key 11 Optionally export the trace data of the demodulated signal to a file a In the Traces tab of
378. n evaluations e FM time evaluation If DC is selected the absolute frequency is displayed i e an input signal with an offset relative to the center frequency is not displayed symmetrically with respect to the zero line If AC is selected the frequency offset is automatically corrected i e the trace is always symmetric with respect to the zero line e PM time evaluation If DC is selected the phase runs according to the existing frequency offset In addi tion the DC signal contains a phase offset of rr If AC is selected the frequency offset and phase offset are automatically corrected i e the trace is always symmetric with respect to the zero line Remote command SENSe ADEMod n AF COUPling on page 265 Selected Trace Defines the trace used to determine the results in the Result Summary Time Domain Zoom Using the time domain zoom the demodulated data for a particular time span is extrac ted and displayed in more detail This is useful if the measurement time is very large and thus each sweep point represents a large time span The time domain zoom func tion distributes the available sweep points only among the time span defined by the zoom area length The time span displayed per division of the diagram is decreased Thus the display of the extracted time span becomes more precise Note that the time domain zoom area affects not only the diagram display but the entire evaluation for the current window Thi
379. n page 133 Configuring the Measurement SENSe JADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis LOWer Threshold When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 283 command the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines a lower threshold the signal must fall below compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted auto matically Parameters Threshold Range O dB to 200 dB RST 1dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST LOW 2 For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level falls below 18 dBm Manual operation See Lower Level Hysteresis on page 133 SENSe ADJust CONFigure HYSTeresis UPPer Threshold When the reference level is adjusted automatically using the SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 283 command the internal attenuators and the preamplifier are also adjusted In order to avoid frequent adaptation due to small changes in the input signal you can define a hysteresis This setting defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed compared to the last measurement before the reference level is adapted automatically Parameters Threshold Range 0 dB to 200 dB RST 1dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST UPP 2 Exa
380. n page 221 Using the power sensor as an external trigger If activated the power sensor creates a trigger signal when a power higher than the defined External Trigger Level is measured This trigger signal can be used as an external power trigger by the R amp S FSW This setting is only available in conjunction with a compatible power sensor For details on using a power sensor as an external trigger see the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger STATe on page 227 TRIG SOUR PSE see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 259 External Trigger Level Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the trigger level for the power sensor trigger For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger LEVel on page 227 5 3 3 5 3 3 1 Input and Frontend Settings Hysteresis Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Setting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level Remote command SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger HYSTeresis on page 226 Trigger Holdoff Using the power sensor as an external trigger Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored
381. ncies on page 41 Auto Default setting a series of frequencies is defined one for each Sweep point based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R amp S FSW see Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denomi nator Offset on page 76 the RF frequency range covers the cur rently defined span of the R amp S FSW unless limited by the range of the signal generator Manual The generator uses a single fixed frequency defined by Manual Source Frequency which is displayed when you select Manual cou pling Remote command SOURce EXTernal FREQuency COUPling STATe on page 228 Manual Source Frequency Defines the fixed frequency to be used by the generator Remote command SOURce EXTernal FREQuency on page 228 Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denominator Offset With automatic frequency coupling a series of frequencies is defined one for each sweep point based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R amp S FSW However the frequency used by the generator may differ from the input from the R amp S FSW The RF frequency may be multiplied by a specified factor or a frequency offset can be added or both Note The input for the generator frequency is not validated i e you can enter any val ues However if the allowed frequency ranges of the generator are exceeded an error message is displayed on the R amp S FSW and the values for Result Frequency Start and Result Frequency Stop
382. nd off It requires the optional preamplifiier hardware This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface For R amp S FSW 26 or higher models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the pream plifier is activated For R amp S FSW 8 or 13 models the preamplification is defined by INPut GAIN VALue Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier on page 92 INPut GAIN VALue lt Gain gt This command selects the gain level if the preamplifier is activated INP GAIN STAT ON see INPut GAIN STATe on page 246 The command requires the additional preamplifier hardware option Parameters lt Gain gt 15 dB 30 dB The availability of gain levels depends on the model of the R amp S FSW R amp S FSW8 13 15dB and 30 dB R amp S FSW26 or higher 30 dB All other values are rounded to the nearest of these two RST OFF Example INP GAIN VAL 30 Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier on page 92 Configuring the Measurement 11 4 5 4 Scaling the Y Axis DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe esses nnne 247 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO ONCE seseeeeeeeeeennenene 247 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MODE eese nnne 247 DISPlay
383. nds The application independent remote commands for general tasks on the R amp S FSW are also available for Analog Demodulation measurements and are described in the R amp S FSW User Manual In particular this comprises the following functionality e Managing Settings and Results e Setting Up the Instrument Using the Status Register Channel specific commands Apart from a few general commands on the R amp S FSW most commands refer to the currently active channel Thus always remember to activate an Analog Demodulation channel before starting a remote program for an Analog Demodulation measurement MMO MCU o M X NM 177 e Common SuUfIflXGS sce see re ees ERE HEEL PEL E ER EUER d 181 e Activating Analog Demodulation Measurements seen 182 e Configuring the Measurement sssssssssseeseseeeeeeenen nennen enne 186 e Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps eee eee tranne 290 e Configuring the Result Display retener tte ecu ez 296 e Retrieving Resulls eet eren ex nee RR cued RR n ERR naa RR 303 Analyzing RESUNS tero reor o rnt d e eei e he Er e Ite duds 314 e Importing and Exporting I Q Data and Results seeseesssss 362 e Commands for Compatibility ee 2 tete to RO 364 e Programming Example eceeeeic rese ne neptem t tte kamen innen ir ER Lene 365 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measur
384. nel bar you can restore the calibration settings which are stored with the refer ence dataset on the R amp S FSW Storing the normalized reference trace as a transducer factor The inverse normalized reference trace can also be stored as a transducer factor for use in other R amp S FSW applications that do not support external generator control The normalized trace data is converted to a transducer with unit dB and stored in a file with the specified name and the suffix trd under c r_s instr trd The frequency points are allocated in equidistant steps between the start and stop frequency This is useful for example to determine the effects of a particular device component and then remove these effects from a subsequent measurement which includes this component For an example see the External Generator Control Measurement Examples section in the R amp S FSW User Manual Thus if you store the normalized trace directly after calibration without changing any settings the transducer factor will be O dB for the entire span by definition of the nor malized trace o Note that the normalized measurement data is stored not the original reference trace 4 7 4 6 Reference Trace Reference Line and Reference Level Reference trace The calibration results are stored internally on the R amp S FSW as a reference trace For each measured sweep point the offset to the expected values is determined If normali R amp S FSW K7 Meas
385. nfiguring an Analysis Interval and Line MSRA mode only In MSRA operating mode only the MSRA Master actually captures data the MSRA applications define an extract of the captured data for analysis referred to as the analysis interval The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applica tions For the Analog Demodulation application the commands to define the analysis interval are the same as those used to define the actual data acquisition see chapter 11 4 6 Configuring Data Acquisition on page 249 Be sure to select the correct measure ment channel before executing these commands In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the analysis interval for the Analog Demodulation measurement Useful commands related to MSRA mode described elsewhere INITiate lt n gt REFResh on page 293 INITiate n SEQuencer REFResh ALL on page 295 Remote commands exclusive to MSRA applications The following commands are only available for MSRA application channels CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALIN SHOW ccccccccssecceescceceeseceassceceascceseaceeeseeeeseaceeeeeeeeeeaeees 359 CALCulatesmMSRACALINeEWVALUG casita dnte beoe trea ee rn neues re emet 360 CALCulate lt n gt MSRA WINDOWS lt N gt IVAL 0ccccceeceecseseceeeececencceseeseceaeseeceagecesseeessaneeees 360 SENSe IMSRA CAP T re OFF Sef icdeecceecsi puer rtp nonno tape ex
386. ng the rotary knob Standard The marker position is moved in Span 1000 steps which corre sponds approximately to the number of pixels for the default display of 1001 sweep points This setting is most suitable to move the marker over a larger distance Sweep The marker position is moved from one sweep point to the next This Points setting is required for a very precise positioning if more sweep points are collected than the number of pixels that can be displayed on the screen It is the default mode Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SSIZe on page 321 Defining a Fixed Reference Instead of using a reference marker that may vary its position depending on the mea surement results a fixed reference marker can be defined for trace analysis Working with Markers in the R amp S FSW Analog Demodulation application When you set the State to On a vertical and a horizontal red display line are dis played marked as FXD The normal marker 1 is activated and set to the peak value of the trace assigned to marker 1 and a delta marker to the next peak The fixed refer ence marker is set to the position of marker 1 at the peak value The delta marker refers to the fixed reference marker If activated the fixed reference marker FXD can also be selected as a Reference Marker instead of another marker The Level and Frequency or Time settings define the position and value of the ref erence marker Al
387. nge the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MAXimum PEAK CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker vertically to the highest level for the current frequency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker If the marker hasn t been active yet the command looks for the peak level in the whole spectrogram Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum ABOVe CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum ABOVe This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes only frames above the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker um EPI S INC C NN NUUS User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 325 Analyzing Results Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum BELow CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELow This command moves a marker vertically to the next higher minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes only frames below the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum NEXT CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker vertically to the next hig
388. nges the window type of an existing window specified by the suffix lt n gt in the active measurement channel The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REPLace WINDow com mand To add a new window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt ADD command Parameters lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to replace another one with See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 298 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY WIND2 REPL MTAB Replaces the result display in window 2 with a marker table 11 7 Retrieving Results The following remote commands are required to retrieve the results from an Analog Demodulation measurement in a remote environment In the Analog Demodulation application when you configure the traces for a window with a specific evaluation e g AM time domain the traces in all windows with the same evaluation are configured identically 11 7 1 Retrieving Results Specific commands e Relrievitig Trace ROSUIES itat trt cette ette ttd ettet e b non etade 304 e Exporting Trace ReSUIIS iore Fete i a erra re fii tus 306 e Retrieving Result Summary Values eecreier rime tient tena 308 e Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format 312 e Reference ASCII File Export Format essnee aaia nnns 312 Retrieving Trace Results The following remote commands are required to retrieve the trace results in a remote
389. ngs Power sensor settings are available in the Power Sensor tab of the Input dialog box Each sensor is configured on a separate tab User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 83 Input and Frontend Settings Input Source Power Sensor off Continuous Update Sensorl ff Select Auto Sensor2 Zeroing Power Sensor Meas gt Ref Sensor3 Frequency Manual Reference Value 767 19 67 19d8m Sensor4 o Frequency Coupling Ki Use Ref Level Offset Unit Scale Mm Number of Readings Meas Time Average Duty Cycle External Power Trigger External Trigger Level 20 0 dBm Hysteresis 0 0 dB Dropout Time 100 0 ps Holdoff Time Slope Rising Falling ZONO FONT OO MM 85 Freguency Manyak eccna E tices 85 Freguoney dde vro je e EE 86 Bici E 86 Meas Tile AVerage 2 re d ariete PEE CU FERE eX DE dade ate 86 Setting the Reference Level from the Measurement Meas Ref 86 Reference Value ssssssssssssssseseesse senten E stir ss sen aa en 86 Use Ref Lev O66 REST 87 Average Count Number of Readings sss 87 IUD VOI ento tried rii iade tun haee tra E e nasi de 87 Using the power sensor as an external trigger essere 87 L External Trigger Levell cccccccccccsscsscssseesssssesesesesecesesssesesessesetaseseseseseseceees 87 E 0 SADNMRINERNCEE 88 NU doo c NONE 88 L Drop MILI REDE D T 88 lo Meme austen
390. nly a small range from the demodulated bandwidth However this means the RF spectrum may not show the entire demodula ted bandwidth In this case you must increase the span manually to show the entire signal Determining the SINAD and THD The signal to noise and distortion ratio SINAD and the total harmonic distortion THD of the demodulated signal are a good indicator of the signal quality sent by the DUT Both values are calculated inside the AF spectrum span and thus only if an AF spectrum window is displayed If either value deviates strongly from the expected result make sure the demodulation bandwidth is defined correctly see Determining the demodulation bandwidth 11 Remote Commands for Analog Demodula tion Measurements The commands required to perform measurements in the Analog Demodulation appli cation in a remote environment are described here It is assumed that the R amp S FSW has already been set up for remote control in a net work as described in the R amp S FSW User Manual A programming example at the end of the remote commands description demonstrates the most important commands in a typical application scenario see chapter 11 11 Programming Example on page 365 Status registers The R amp S FSW K7 option uses the status registers of the base unit except for the STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit register For a description see the R amp S FSW User Manual General R amp S FSW Remote Comma
391. nns 185 INSTrument CREate DUPLicate This command duplicates the currently selected measurement channel i e creates a new measurement channel of the same type and with the identical measurement set tings The name of the new channel is the same as the copied channel extended by a consecutive number e g IQAnalyzer gt IQAnalyzer2 The channel to be duplicated must be selected first using the INST SEL command This command is not available if the MSRA MSRT Master channel is selected Example INST SEL IQAnalyzer INST CRE DUPL Duplicates the channel named IQAnalyzer and creates a new measurement channel named IQAnalyzer2 Usage Event INSTrument CREate NEW lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt This command adds an additional measurement channel The number of measurement channels you can configure at the same time depends on available memory Parameters lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 183 Activating Analog Demodulation Measurements lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 183 Example INST CRE IQ IQAnalyzer2 Adds an additional I
392. ny MSRA application or the MSRA Master and is then adjusted in all other applications Thus you can easily analyze the results at a specific time in the measurement in all applications and determine correlations If the marked point in time is contained in the analysis interval of the application the line is indicated in all time based result displays such as time symbol slot or bit dia grams By default the analysis line is displayed however it can be hidden from view manually In all result displays the AL label in the window title bar indicates whether or not the analysis line lies within the analysis interval or not orange AL the line lies within the interval white AL the line lies within the interval but is not displayed hidden e no AL the line lies outside the interval MSRA View MSRA Master Analog Demod Ref Level 0 00 dBm Att 10dB AQT 62 5ys DBW SMHz Freq 1 0 GHz 1PM Time Domain 1AP Clew Ref 0 00 rad AC 2 FM Time Domain alysis ys 62 5 inalvsis CF 1 0 GH 1001 pts 6 25 psy reF 1 0 GHz 1001 pts 5 AM Time Domain CF 1 0 GHz 1060 pts I Result Summary nalysis Interva TE Carrier Power 30 79 dBm Carrier Offset 11 03 kHz Mod Depth 1 57 Peak Peak tPeak 2 RMS Mod Freq SINAD 1 5031 1 6277 1 5654 0 51978 87 341 kHz 96 167 kHz 91 754 kHz 49 469 kHz 4 7121 rad 3 0697 rad 3 8909 rad 1 5513 rad For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For d
393. o La pp A m A RE REO See Rte nda 360 CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe SHOW This command defines whether or not the analysis line is displayed in all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master lt n gt is irrelevant Analyzing Results Note even if the analysis line display is off the indication whether or not the currently defined line position lies within the analysis interval of the active application remains in the window title bars Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Manual operation See Show Line on page 161 CALCulate lt n gt MSRA ALINe VALue lt Position gt This command defines the position of the analysis line for all time based windows in all MSRA applications and the MSRA Master lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Position gt Position of the analysis line in seconds The position must lie within the measurement time of the MSRA measurement Default unit s Manual operation See Position on page 161 CALCulate lt n gt MSRA WINDows lt n gt IVAL This command queries the analysis interval for the window specified by the WINDow suffix lt n gt the CALC suffix is irrelevant This command is only available in application measurement channels not the MSRA View or MSRA Master Return values lt IntStart gt Start value of the analysis interval in seconds Default unit s lt IntStop gt Stop value of the analysis interval in seconds Usage Query only
394. o be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 201 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt HarmOrder gt numeric value Range 2 to 65 Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL HARM 3 Manual operation See Harmonic Order on page 64 SENSe CORRection CVL MIXer Type This command defines the mixer name in the conversion loss table This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 201 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt Type gt string Name of mixer with a maximum of 16 characters Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL MIX FS Z60 Manual operation See Mixer Name on page 65 SENSe CORRection CVL PORTs lt PortNo gt This command defines the mixer type in the conversion loss table This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can
395. o measure the harmonics for a DUT for example This function requires an additional hardware option Note for RF input signals outside the specified range the high pass filter has no effect For signals with a frequency of approximately 4 GHz upwards the harmonics are suppressed sufficiently by the YIG filter Remote command INPut FILTer HPASs STATe on page 189 YIG Preselector Activates or deactivates the YIG preselector if available on the R amp S FSW An internal YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW ensures that image frequen cies are rejected However this is only possible for a restricted bandwidth In order to use the maximum bandwidth for signal analysis you can deactivate the YIG preselector at the input of the R amp S FSW which may lead to image frequency display Note that the YIG preselector is active only on frequencies greater than 8 GHz There fore switching the YIG preselector on or off has no effect if the frequency is below that value Remote command INPut FILTer YIG STATe on page 189 Input Connector Determines whether the RF input data is taken from the RF INPUT connector default or the optional BASEBAND INPUT I connector This setting is only available if the optional Analog Baseband Interface is installed and active for input It is not available for the R amp S FSW67 or R amp S FSW85 For more information on the Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 see the R amp S FSW I Q Ana
396. o reflect a power offset in the mea surement trace change the Reference Value 4 7 4 7 Coupling the Frequencies As described in chapter 4 7 4 5 Normalization on page 39 normalized measure ment results are very accurate as long as the same settings are used as for calibration Although approximate normalization is possible it is important to consider the required User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 41 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output frequencies for calibration in advance The frequencies and levels supported by the connected signal generator are provided for reference with the interface configuration Two different methods are available to define the frequencies for calibration that is to couple the frequencies of the R amp S FSW with those of the signal generator Manual coupling a single frequency is defined e Automatic coupling a series of frequencies is defined one for each sweep point based on the current frequency at the RF input of the R amp S FSW the RF fre quency range covers the currently defined span of the R amp S FSW unless limited by the range of the signal generator Automatic coupling If automatic coupling is used the output frequency of the generator source frequency is calculated as follows Numerator _ _ Offset Denominator Source Freq RF Output frequency of the generator 4 1 where F cenerator OUtput frequency of the generator Fanalyzer Current fr
397. ommand DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 243 Input and Frontend Settings Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level In some result displays the scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Note however that the internal reference level used to adjust the hardware settings to the expected signal optimally ignores any Reference Level Offset Thus it is impor tant to keep in mind the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle and not to rely on the displayed reference level internal reference level displayed reference level offset Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 243 Unit Reference Level The R amp S FSW measures the signal voltage at the RF input In the default state the level is displayed at a power of 1 mW dBm Via the known input impedance 50 Q or 75 Q see Impedance on page 54 conversion to other units is possible The following units are available and directly convertible dBm dBmV dByV dBpA dBpW Volt Ampere Watt Remote command INPut IMPedance on page
398. on limit lines that are defined by absolute values for the y axis Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer OFFSet on page 347 CALCulate n LIMit k UPPer OFFSet on page 350 Create New Line Creates a new limit line Edit Line Edit an existing limit line configuration Copy Line Copy the selected limit line configuration to create a new line Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt COPY on page 352 Delete Line Delete the selected limit line configuration Remote command CALCulate n LIMit k DELete on page 352 Disable All Lines Disable all limit lines in one step Remote command CALCulate n LIMit k STATe on page 353 6 4 2 Limit Line Details Access Overview gt Analysis gt Lines gt Limit Lines gt New Edit Copy To or LINES gt Line Config gt Limit Lines gt New Edit Copy To Limit Line Settings and Functions Edit Limit L Name UPPER LIMIT LINE Thresho X Axis Position 0 00 Hz 30 00000000 MHz 1 50 MHz Data Dolls o cdececdm en dun IE ix uu EE I UE x EE 158 doin lv ENERO TOT DIEM 159 Delete Value nieto etia cicae e aedi net c re ead aste eite e cal C Ce C RA 159 SHIP STEREO T TUTTI LTEM 159 OILS ERECTO LL DES 159 ics 159 Name Defines the limit line name All names must be compatible with Windo
399. or for the most recent measurement trace 1 Result 649 07 Hz ADEM FM OFFS AVER Queries FM carrier offset averaged over 30 measurements Result 600 Hz TRAC DATA TRACE1 Retrieve the trace data of the most recent measurement trace 1 Result 1 201362252 1 173495054 1 187217355 1 186594367 1 171583891 1 188250422 1 204138160 1 181404829 1 186317205 1 197872400 TRAC DATA TRACE2 Retrieve the averaged trace data for all 30 measurements trace 2 Result 1 201362252 1 173495054 1 187217355 1 186594367 1 171583891 1 188250422 1 204138160 1 181404829 1 186317205 1 197872400 Predefined Standards and Settings A Reference A 1 Predefined Standards and Settings You can configure the Analog Demodulation application using predefined standard set tings This allows for quick and easy configuration for commonly performed measure ments For details see chapter 5 1 Configuration According to Digital Standards on page 48 Provided standard files The instrument comes prepared with the following standard settings e AM Broadcast e FM Narrowband e FM Broadcast e Frequency Settling None default settings The default storage location for the settings files is C R_S Instr user predefined AdemodPredefined Predefined settings The following parameters can be stored in a standard settings file Any parameters that are not included in the xml
400. or 75 0 3 3 2 0 Input and Frontend Settings 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impe dance using a 75 Q adapter of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 This value also affects the unit conversion see Reference Level on page 89 This function is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Interface or from the optional Analog Baseband Interface For analog baseband input an impe dance of 50 Q is always used Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 190 Amplitude Settings for Analog Baseband Input The following settings and functions are available to define amplitude settings for input via the optional Analog Baseband Interface in the applications that support it They can be configured via the AMPT key or in the Amplitude tab of the Input dialog box eM tude Amplitude Scale Reference Level Input Settings Valie I Q Mode 1 j0 Offset innings mel Differential Unit Auto Level Full Scale Level Mode Value The input settings provided here are identical to those in the Input Source gt Analog Baseband tab see chapter 5 3 1 4 Analog Baseband Input Settings on page 69 For more information on the optional Analog Baseband Interface see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual Referenc LEVEE M 93 L Shifting
401. or reverse sweep FanalyzerStart 100 MHz F analyzerStop 200 MHz Forse 300 MHz Numerator Denominator 1 gt F Generatorstart 200 MHz FGeneratorstop 100 MHz If the offset is adjusted so that the sweep of the generator crosses the minimum gener ator frequency a message is displayed in the status bar Reverse Sweep via min Ext Generator Frequency 4 7 4 8 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output Example Example for reverse sweep via minimum frequency FanalyzerStart 100 MHz F analyzerStop 200 MHz Forse 150 MHz Fai 20 MHz Numerator Denominator 1 gt F GeneratorStart 50 MHz gt F GeneratorStop 50 MHz via Fmin Displayed Information and Errors Channel bar If external generator control is active some additional information is displayed in the channel bar Label Description EXT TG source power External generator active signal sent with source power level APX approximation LVL Power Offset see Source Offset on page 75 FRQ Frequency Offset see Automatic Source Frequency Numerator Denomi nator Offset on page 76 NOR Normalization on No difference between reference setting and measurement Normalization on Deviation from the reference setting occurs Aborted normalization or no calibration performed yet Error and status messages The following status and error messages may occur during external generator
402. order to display the same result range in the smaller window In this case the per division value does not correspond to the actual display Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe PDIVision on page 248 Reference Value Position Determines the position of the reference value for the modulation depth or the phase deviation or frequency deviation on the y axis of the diagram The position is entered as a percentage of the diagram height with 100 96 correspond ing to the upper diagram border The default setting is 50 diagram center for the AF time evaluations and 100 96 upper diagram border for the AF spectrum evalua tions Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 248 Reference Value Determines the modulation depth or the phase deviation or the frequency deviation at the reference line of the y axis The reference value can be set specifically for each evaluation e AF time display The trace display takes individual frequency phase offsets into account in contrast the AF Coupling setting permits automatic correction by the average frequency phase offset of the signal and can therefore not be activated simultaneously e AF spectrum display In the default setting the reference value defines the modulation depth or the FM PM deviation at the upper diagram border Possible values e AM 0 and 10000 96 e FM 0 and 10 MHz e PM 0 and 10000 rad Note The re
403. oscope ALIGnment DATE essen 206 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment STEP STATe SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope IDN eese eere tenere nnne nennen tnnt 206 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope LEDState sese 206 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope TCPip esee rennen 207 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope VDEVice eesessssssseeseeeeeeeennenneen nennen 207 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope VFIRmware essent 207 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope STATe sseeeseeesenenenenneen ene 205 SxYSTem cOMMunicate RDEVice PMETer COUN rue ttn to rr topi ansann nana 217 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer p CONFigure AUTO STATe eene 217 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice PMETer p DEFine seen 218 SYSTem COMMunicate TCPip RDEVice GENerator ADDRess esseeeeeeneneen enne 233 SYSTem PRESSECEANnel EXEGHLle ttrirrr en e ever gea eet pete vete e cr gd ape ands 185 HK XEMEdeesem E M 295 SY STEM SPEAKS VOLUME sia 240 TRACe lt n gt DATA 4 TRIGger SEQuence BBPower HOLJ Off 1 6 tror rrt tn rero rne enin 254 TRIGGEr SEQUENCE TIME H R 255 TRIGger SEQuericeE HOBDOTI TIME cante ctore Pet trc bette cep
404. ositioning Functions ioco coche rei i dee E e e eds 146 6 3 2 1 Marker Search Settings Access Overview gt Analysis gt Marker gt Search 6 3 2 2 Working with Markers in the R amp S FSW Analog Demodulation application or Marker gt Search Markers are commonly used to determine peak values i e maximum or minimum val ues in the measured signal Configuration settings allow you to influence the peak search results Search Mode for Next Peak ii cceccceccecececeeesceenececceesaeeeeceeeessauaeeeeeeeenaueaeseeeeeaeneeeees 146 Peak EXCUISIORN 4 22 ode teer ee reete eb tele fuco eate ee tec ee v dec te te ee cue inu adea dies 146 Search Mode for Next Peak Selects the search mode for the next peak search Left Determines the next maximum minimum to the left of the current peak Absolute Determines the next maximum minimum to either side of the current peak Right Determines the next maximum minimum to the right of the current peak Remote command chapter 11 8 1 5 Positioning the Marker on page 331 Peak Excursion Defines the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it will be identified as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions Entries from 0 dB to 80 dB are allowed the resolution is 0 1 dB The default setting for the peak excursion is 6 dB Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCursion on page 330 Positioning Functions Access MKR
405. ot start data capturing it merely has an effect on trace averaging over multiple sequences In this case no trace averaging is performed Furthermore the RUN SINGLE key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN SINGLE starts the Sequencer in single mode If the Sequencer is off only the evaluation for the currently displayed measurement channel is updated Data Acquisition For details on the Sequencer see the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command INITiate lt n gt IMMediate on page 292 Continue Single Sweep After triggering repeats the number of sweeps set in Sweep Count without deleting the trace of the last measurement While the measurement is running the Continue Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 291 Refresh MSRA MSRT only This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated and only for MSRA MSRT applications The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only The results for any other applications remain unchanged This is useful for example after evaluation changes have been made or if a new sweep was performed from another application in this case only that application is updated automatically after data acquisition Note To update all active applications at once use
406. out extension in which the table is stored This setting is mandatory The ACL extension is automatically appended during storage Note When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 special conversion loss tables are required These tables are stored with the file exten sion 52g Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 201 Comment An optional comment that describes the conversion loss table The comment can be freely defined by the user Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL COMMent on page 199 Band The waveguide or user defined band for which the table is to be applied This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 11 2 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BAND on page 198 Harmonic Order The harmonic order of the range for which the table is to be applied This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL HARMonic on page 200 Input and Frontend Settings Bias The bias current which is required to set the mixer to its optimum operating point It corresponds to the short circuit current The bias current can range from 10 mA to 10 mA The actual bias current is lower because of the forward voltage of the mixer diode s Tip You can
407. own conversion loss tables Imported tables are checked for compatibility with the current settings before being assigned Conversion loss tables are configured and managed in the Conver sion Loss Table tab For details on conversion loss tables see the External Mixer descrip tion in the R amp S FSW User Manual For details on importing tables see Import Table on page 62 Remote command Average for range 1 SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW on page 197 Table for range 1 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW on page 197 Average for range 2 SENSe MIXer LOSS HIGH on page 196 Table for range 2 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe HIGH on page 196 Basic Settings Access Overview Input Frontend Input Source External Mixer Basic Settings or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Basic Settings The basic settings concern general use of an external mixer They are only available if the External Mixer State is On Frequency Basic Settings Mixer Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer Bias Settings Range 1 Signal ID Bias Settings Range 2 Auto ID DCSURITES 10 0 dB Bias Value Input and Frontend Settings Pca MD Threshold alec er eet eate di lana e coe adhe vd dee eae one dee ved een 60 BaS SONNO ce M M M 61 L write to lt CVL table name tenementa 61 LO Level Defines the LO leve
408. p S FSW Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example OUTP ADEM ON Manual operation See Online Demodulation Output State on page 130 Configuring the Measurement OUTPut ADEMod ONLine SOURce lt WindowName gt This command selects the result display whose results are output Only active time domain results can be selected Parameters lt WindowName gt lt string gt String containing the name of the window By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query FOCus Dynamically switches to the currently selected window If a win dow is selected that does not contain a time domain result dis play the selection is ignored and the previous setting is main tained Example OUTP ADEM ONL SOUR AnalogDemod OR DISP WIND1 SEL OUTP ADEM SOUR FOC Manual operation See Output Selection on page 130 OUTPut ADEMod ONLine AF CFRequency lt Frequency gt This command defines the cutoff frequency for the AC highpass filter for AC coupling only see SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF COUPling on page 265 Parameters lt Frequency gt numeric value Range 10 Hz to DemodBW 10 300 kHz for active demodulation output RST 100 Hz Example OUTP ADEM ONL AF CFR 100Hz Manual operation See AC Cutoff Frequency on page 130 OUTPut ADEMod ONLine PHONes State In addition to sending the outpu
409. pere reir Cp d 255 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDofF 1 itr rre rr eram t the rro err naeh 255 TRIGger SEQuerice IFPower FIYS Teresis uicit nana te epi ere ue ee pee p ANE ERAN rore ETE EENE 256 TRIGger SEQuericeELEVel AM REELaltive tnt naa nre tp nece ene e v 258 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel AM ABSolute 52 111 otn tro rettet rer thanh eer rii 258 TRIGger SEQuence HEVELBBROWGR vsiccacsersscinecncspcemaassnccoscenee eroe E POI hoa eee EX PESE HER ENEE RENEE 256 TRIGger SEQuerice LL EVel FM eripe rtt rrr terr tpe rne tr t rre er en er en nas 258 TRIG St SEQuUGHCeRLEV GliIR POWE T veirar trt aee Peppe pie qp Pe exc Een ap Led puru EE YER pue TRIGger SEQuence LEVel l QPower a TRIGger SEQuemce LEVe PM ersin ote er eer tnr re ri e rer b E ee FC Y ERU TRIGger SEQueticelEEVOEREPONWOL cuan coco tee rotat een rptu ert EHE po SPUR ERU RR RE E EREEREER TEMERE TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernalsport 5 ptt rtr trn nr rennes 256 TRIGger SEQuence OSCilloscope COUPling oti ntur trt teen thin cn 207 TRIGger SEQuence OSCilloscope COUPling eese nnne ennemi 257 TRIGger SEQuerice SLOBe ott teret e erint i n ded er e ee e TERR EXER 259 TRIGger SEQuence SOURCe i rto tre t Re ere ba e a ehe ree re Erbe ross 259 TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerval eese nennen nnne nennen enne nee trennen nennen 262 UNITAS ANGLO A
410. played in more detail SENSe ADEMod n ZOOM LENGHR ieeeetetete ttt ttt ttt tette ttti 267 SENSe ADEMod n ZOOM LENGIh MODE cecert ettet tette teta 267 SENSe JADEMod n ZOOM STARt ccectttte tette tette tette ttt tots 267 SENSe ADEMod n ZOOME STATe centre tentent 268 SENSe ADEMod n ZOOM LENGth Length The command allows you to define the length of the time domain zoom area for the analog demodulated measurement data in the specified window manually If the length is defined manually using this command the zoom mode is also set to manual Parameters Length RST sweep time Length of the zoom area in seconds Example ADEM ZOOM LENG 2s Zoom mode is set to manual and the zoom length to 2 seconds Manual operation See Length on page 113 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM LENGth MODE Mode The command defines whether the length of the zoom area for the analog demodula ted measurement data is defined automatically or manually in the specified window Parameters Mode AUTO MAN AUTO Default The number of sweep points is used as the zoom length MAN The zoom length is defined manually using SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM LENGth RST AUTO Example ADEM ZOOM LENG MODE MAN Zoom function uses the length defined manually Manual operation See Length on page 113 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM STARt Time The comman
411. r Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 264 Data Acquisition How data is to be acquired and then demodulated is configured in the Data Acquisi tion dialog box MSRA MSRT operating mode In MSRA MSRT operating mode only the MSRA MSRT Master channel actually cap tures data from the input signal The data acquisition settings for the Analog Demodu lation application in MSRA MSRT mode define the analysis interval For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Real Time Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual e Bandwidth Sette 2 19 Iececec eiat eco e tia 1e inlet heidi 105 SWCD SEIMO ea tex rx Rete edi nex E a REEF RRa parla dai tu Eri eia DUREE A dA NRUR 107 Bandwidth Settings The bandwidth settings define which parts of the input signal are acquired and then demodulated They are configured via the BW key or in the Bandwidth tab of the Data Acquisition
412. r Source on page 98 See Free Run on page 98 See External Trigger 1 2 3 on page 98 See External CH3 on page 99 See Q Power on page 99 See IF Power on page 99 See Baseband Power on page 100 See Digital I O on page 100 See FM AM PM RF Offline on page 101 See Time on page 101 See RF Power on page 101 See Power Sensor on page 101 TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerval Interval This command defines the repetition interval for the time trigger Parameters Interval Example 2 0 ms to 5000 Range 2ms to 5000s RST 1 0s TRIG SOUR TIME Selects the time trigger input for triggering TRIG TIME RINT 50 The sweep starts every 50 s Configuring the Measurement 11 4 7 2 Configuring the Trigger Output The following commands are required to send the trigger signal to one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S FSW OUTPUut TRIGgersport DI Rection 2 2 rara rette razor aee rete ee d sve dave deg 263 OUTPuETRIGSersport LBVel eese ere eee on tr e imn cea sn hane nt ne yx E RCR ee XY seu denen eset 263 OU TPut bRIGSersport OT Yes quee cdd edat ebd be oat reete eerte b etit 264 OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe MMediate 5 51 2 ett oorr reta oro resa e eae dad ando 264 OUTPubE TRIGSgersport PUESeEENGH tor pee d ep eo ee tit ne rnt etae 264 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection Direction This command selects the trigg
413. r all sweep points directly after calibration SENS CORR STAT ON TRAC DATA TRACE1 11 4 3 Configuring the Measurement fissasaosesssees Changing the display of the calibration results Shift the reference line so the 5 dB level is displayed in the center DISP TRAC Y SCAL RVAL 5DB DISP TRAC Y SCAL RPOS 50PCT Configuring the Output 0 Configuring trigger input output is described in chapter 11 4 7 2 Configuring the Trig ger Output on page 263 DiAGnos c SERVICE NSOUIQe 1 ect tont rebate te EEEE cetera devo bacio vu dus 238 OUTPut ADEMod ONLine S TATe ciue recorte teneri e vane atu aane aa nein ena 238 OUTPut ADEMod ONLine SOURGCE cccee cece cee ee eee ae ae ee eee eee ceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaea 239 OUTPUut ADEMeg ONLIneEAFBGER6equency 222 tat ctc eet enint nec 239 OUTPut ADEMod ONLine PHONES sirasini iani etie tee esca 239 SYS Tem SP Eaker VOLUN eerte te Eee a reu Cu rro eden edu dee guy RU XR EFE EEEE 240 DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce State This command turns the 28 V supply of the BNC connector labeled NOISE SOURCE CONTROL on the R amp S FSW on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example DIAG SERV NSO ON Manual operation See Noise Source on page 127 OUTPut ADEMod ONLine STATe lt State gt This command enables or disables online demodulation output to the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector on the rear panel of the R am
414. r lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker vertically to the highest level for the current fre quency The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the marker If the marker hasn t been active yet the command looks for the peak level in the whole spectrogram Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum ABOVe CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum ABOVe This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes only frames above the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum BELow CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum BELow This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next minimum level for the cur rent frequency The search includes only frames below the current marker position It does not change the horizontal position of the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SGRam Y MINimum NEXT CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt SPECtrogram Y MINimum NEXT This command moves a delta marker vertically to the next minimum level for the cur rent frequency User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 329 Analyzing Results The search includes all frames It does not change the horizontal position of the
415. r oer nk deere 210 INPut IQ BALanced STATe State This command defines whether the input is provided as a differential signal via all 4 Analog Baseband connectors or as a plain I Q signal via 2 single ended lines Parameters State ON Differential OFF Single ended RST ON Example INP IQ BAL OFF Configuring the Measurement Manual operation See Input Configuration on page 70 INPut IQ FULLscale AUTO State This command defines whether the full scale level i e the maximum input power on the Baseband Input connector is defined automatically according to the reference level or manually Parameters State ON Automatic definition OFF Manual definition according to INPut 10 FULLscale LEVel on page 209 RST ON Example INP IQ FULL AUTO OFF Manual operation See Full Scale Level Mode Value on page 95 INPut IQ FULLscale LEVel lt PeakVoltage gt This command defines the peak voltage at the Baseband Input connector if the full scale level is set to manual mode see INPut 10 FULLscale AUTO on page 209 Parameters lt PeakVoltage gt 0 25V 0 5V 1V 2V Peak voltage level at the connector For probes the possible full scale values are adapted according to the probe s attenuation and maximum allowed power RST 1V Example INP IQ FULL 0 5V Manual operation See Full Scale Level Mode Value on page 95 INPut IQ TYPE lt DataType gt This command defines the form
416. r of the screen The end point x 100 y 100 is in the upper right cor ner of the screen See figure 11 1 The direction in which the splitter is moved depends on the screen layout If the windows are positioned horizontally the splitter also moves horizontally If the windows are positioned vertically the splitter also moves vertically Range 0 to 100 Example LAY SPL 1 3 50 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Table to the center 50 of the screen i e in the fig ure above to the left User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 301 Configuring the Result Display Example LAY SPL 1 4 70 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Peak List towards the top 70 of the screen The following commands have the exact same effect as any combination of windows above and below the splitter moves the splitter vertically AY SPL 3 2 70 AY SPL 4 1 70 AY SPL 2 1 70 LAY out WINDow lt n gt ADD lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt This command adds a measurement window to the display Note that with this com mand the suffix n determines the existing window next to which the new window is added as opposed to LAYout ADD WINDow for which the existing window is defined by a parameter To replace an existing window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace command This command is always used as a query so that you immediately ob
417. r sensor in use RST 50 MHz Example PMET2 FREQ 1GHZ Sets the frequency of the power sensor to 1 GHz Manual operation See Frequency Manual on page 85 SENSe PMETer lt p gt FREQuency LINK lt Coupling gt This command selects the frequency coupling for power sensor measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Coupling gt CENTer Couples the frequency to the center frequency of the analyzer MARKer1 Couples the frequency to the position of marker 1 OFF Switches the frequency coupling off RST CENTer Example PMET2 FREQ LINK CENT Couples the frequency to the center frequency of the analyzer Manual operation See Frequency Coupling on page 86 SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe lt Duration gt This command selects the duration of power sensor measurements Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt Duration gt SHORt NORMal LONG RST NORMal Example PMET2 MTIM SHOR Sets a short measurement duration for measurements of station ary high power signals for the selected power sensor Manual operation See Meas Time Average on page 86 SENSe PMETer lt p gt MTIMe AVERage COUNt lt NumberReadings gt This command sets the number of power readings included in the averaging process of power sensor measurements Extended averaging yields more stable results for power sensor measurements espe cially for measurements on
418. ram If you shift the reference line the normalized trace is shifted as well Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 248 Reference Value Defines the reference value to be displayed at the specified Result Frequency Start This setting can be used to shift the reference line and thus the normalized trace simi lar to the Shifting the Display Offset defined in the Amplitude settings shifts the ref erence level in the display Shifting the normalized trace is useful for example to reflect an attenuation or gain caused by the measured DUT If you then zoom into the diagram around the normal ized trace the measured trace still remains fully visible Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue on page 233 R amp S9 FSW K7 Configuration 5 3 1 7 Settings for 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 Access INPUT OUTPUT gt B2000 Config The R amp S FSW Analog Demodulation application supports the optional 2 GHz band width extension R amp S FSW B2000 if installed The following settings are available for the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 General SCUMUAGS ua caiieeececdased encetasete cede ciate eetecdagen cuss tagetecestuvaneseteenatanecsttieacneetiaaeee 80 NEU eL eta ess cee bs chet teed Meee A E E EE 81 General Settings Access INPUT OUTPUT gt B2000 Config gt Settings Mulliview Spectrum IQAnalyzer
419. ration and programming Online help is available using the icon on the toolbar of the R amp S FSW Web Help The web help provides online access to the complete information on operating the R amp S FSW and all available options without downloading The content of the web help corresponds to the user manuals for the latest product version The web help is availa ble from the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html Downloads Web Help Getting Started This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the DVD It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instru ment Basic operations and handling are described Safety information is also included The Getting Started manual in various languages is also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html User Manuals User manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional firmware application The user manuals are available in PDF format in printable form on the Documenta tion DVD delivered with the instrument In the user manuals all instrument functions are described in detail Furthermore they provide a complete description of the remote control commands with programming examples The user manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R amp S FSW in genera
420. reen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row Remote command FORMat DEXPort TRACes on page 308 Include Instrument Measurement Settings Includes additional instrument and measurement settings in the header of the export file for result data Working with Markers in the R amp S FSW Analog Demodulation application See chapter 11 7 5 Reference ASCII File Export Format on page 312 for details Remote command FORMat DEXPort HEADer on page 307 Trace to Export Defines an individual trace that will be exported to a file This setting is not available if Export all Traces and all Table Results is selected Decimal Separator Defines the decimal separator for floating point numerals for the data export files Eval uation programs require different separators in different languages Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 307 Export Trace to ASCII File Opens a file selection dialog box and saves the selected trace in ASCII format dat to the specified file and directory The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row For details on the file format see chapter 11 7 5 Reference ASCII File Export For mat on page 312 Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB T
421. rence Value Defines the reference value to be used for relative demodulation results and recalcu lates the results If necessary the detector is activated Note A reference value 0 would provide infinite results and is thus automatically cor rected to 0 7 Remote command CONFigure ADEMod RESults AM DETector lt det gt REFerence on page 277 CONFigure ADEMod RESults FM DETector lt det gt REFerence on page 277 CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector lt det gt REFerence on page 277 Meas gt Reference Sets the Reference Value to be used for relative demodulation results to the currently measured value for all relative detectors Note A reference value 0 would provide infinite results and is thus automatically cor rected to 0 1 If necessary the detectors are activated Remote command CONFigure ADEMod RESults AM DETector det REFerence MEAStoref on page 279 CONFigure ADEMod RESults FM DETector det REFerence MEAStoref on page 279 CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector det REFerence MEAStoref on page 279 Output Settings 5 8 Output Settings AER CUTOUTS STU INS eas EEUU 127 e Analog Demodulation Output Settings 129 5 8 1 Output Settings Access INPUT OUTPUT gt Output The R amp S FSW can provide output to special connectors for other devices For details on connectors refer to the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Front Rear Panel View chapters How to provide trigger
422. rerit re rr den 157 Compatibility 4 22 2 orte rit ens 155 COPYING 156 Creating x erem er erem t er xs 156 Data pointe eiie ere airean 158 IJeactlValihg rr roter trt otra 156 Deleting D leting valies ertet reinen 159 price 156 sonno pe 156 Inserting values erret rn pns 159 MANAGING itio teer recent t 154 MAP QIN 158 MEI M 157 Remote control entretenir teneas 344 ELM T 159 SCISCUIG ET 155 SS FMUPLING E PTEE HS 159 Thiteshold citet io rnnt 157 Mc A EE 155 WIGW TITER 2er teer er i eem rre Ros 155 MISII oiii rete roro rct eter ernie res PEET EN X Offset Y axis Peor m t Lines Config latiOri sseni 153 Limit see Limit lines reete 153 Linking Markers de tart eet LO Level External Mixer remote control Level External Mixer Us EO feedthrough ertt tee ene Loading Settings THES rer rettet ette ens 50 Low pass filter AF FIROS eo 118 Lower Level Hysteresis rr 133 LVL External Generator rrr 44 M Margins Limit lifigS surse isois eerte 158 Marker functions Deactlvalinig m terere neret tena 153 Remote Control 2 ettet eren 334 Marker peak list see Peakllist nsis ttt ettet tenere 151 Marker table Evaluation method reete 22
423. rigger Holdoff to improve the trigger stabil ity can be defined for the RF trigger but no Hysteresis This trigger source is not available for input from the optional Digital Baseband Inter face or the optional Analog Baseband Interface If the trigger source RF Power is selected and digital I Q or analog baseband input is activated the trigger source is automatically switched to Free Run Remote command TRIG SOUR RFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 259 Power Sensor Trigger Source Uses an external power sensor as a trigger source This option is only available if a power sensor is connected and configured Note For R amp S power sensors the Gate Mode Lvl is not supported The signal sent by these sensors merely reflects the instant the level is first exceeded rather than a time period However only time periods can be used for gating in level mode Thus Trigger Configuration the trigger impulse from the sensors is not long enough for a fully gated measurement the measurement cannot be completed Remote command TRIG SOUR PSE see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 259 Trigger Level Defines the trigger level for the specified trigger source For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower on page 257 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower on page 257 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port on page 256 For analog baseband or dig
424. rkersime Y en seo rt rrr Rent eren ebrei ege th ero OY E Eo tie Ren 320 CALCulatesn DEL Tamarkersme STATE us iecore eram nere rro E PER So exe Y 1a Fee E SE Prius 319 CALCulate lt n gt FEED T GAL Gulatesn LIMitsks AGTIVeT icn ineat er eet tr reor nr rer rrr EP rera a Re OR EYE E IRR a 352 CALCulatesn LIMitsk CEEar IMMediate rero era ae perenniter tmo senex nsa epe euentus 354 GALGulate n LIMitsks COMMAnt ooo n te de n p Rode e E np GALCulate n LIMit k CONTTOI DOMBlin 22 12 aint ntn entr nen ennt rn ri enne CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol MODE GALCGulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CON Trol OFF Set rtp tn et tren n treno en rn t redes GALCulate n LIMitsk CONTTOI SHIEt itte rrr tnt tn nne rt enn ea CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol SPACing CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt CONTrol DATA CAL Culatesm gt ud creo geereemesatte CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt DELete CAL Culate n bIMitsko FA ic o torret ied crean tee rie Era eet te ee eie nece eastern omen 354 CALOCulate n LIMit k L OWer MARGin eessessessssssssseseseeee ienas siint s stint osasia 347 CALGCulate n LIMitsks EOWSE MODE trt tme tergo ce Pertenece etg eret ge 347 CAL Culatesr bIMitsks E OWet OF ESOl 2 rtr a T EATEN AEAEE EEAS EGERN 347 CAL Culatesn EIMit k LOWer SHEllt iia con
425. robe head By pressing this button you can perform an action on the instrument directly from the probe Select the action that you want to start from the probe Run single Starts one data acquisition No action Prevents unwanted actions due to unintended usage of the microbut ton Remote command SENSe PROBe p SETup MODE on page 215 5 3 1 6 External Generator Control Settings The External Generator settings are available in the Input dialog box if the R amp S FSW External Generator Control option is installed For each measurement chan nel one external generator can be configured To switch between different configura tions define multiple measurement channels To display this dialog box press the INPUT OUPUT key and then select External Generator Config For more information on external generator control see chapter 4 7 4 Basics on Exter nal Generator Control on page 32 e interface Configuration Settings iced cete cree cad es 72 e Measurement Settings eene nnne nhe nennen tnn rennes 74 e Source Calibration FUMOS coco certet creta cnt cnra cce ttd cn t 77 Interface Configuration Settings The interface settings for the connection to the external generator are defined in the Interface Configuration subtab of the External Generator tab Input and Frontend Settings PRW Input Source Power Sensor External Generator Probes Interface Settings Source Capabilities Measurement
426. rom the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html gt Downloads gt Firmware Application Notes Application notes application cards white papers and educational notes are further publications that provide more comprehensive descriptions and background informa tion The latest versions are available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz web site at www rohde schwarz com appnote 1 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation 1 3 1 Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as ments dialog boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics 1 3 2 1 3 3 Conventions Used in the Documentation Convention Description Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota tion marks Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the instrument several alternative methods may
427. rs lt Trace gt Number of the trace to be stored This parameter is ignored if the option Export all Traces and all Table Results is activated in the Export configuration settings see FORMat DEXPort TRACes on page 308 lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR1 TRAC 3 C TEST ASC Stores trace 3 from window 1 in the file TEST ASC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Export Trace to ASCII File on page 140 FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command selects the decimal separator for data exported in ASCII format Parameters lt Separator gt COMMa Uses a comma as decimal separator e g 4 05 POINt Uses a point as decimal separator e g 4 05 RST RST has no effect on the decimal separator Default is POINt Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator Manual operation See Decimal Separator on page 140 See Exporting the Peak List on page 152 FORMat DEXPort HEADer lt State gt If enabled additional instrument and measurement settings are included in the header of the export file for result data If disabled only the pure result data from the selected traces and tables is exported See chapter 11 7 5 Reference ASCII File Export Format on page 312 for details Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Include Instrument Measurement Sett
428. rs lt CouplingType gt SPAN Couples the step size to the span Available for measurements in the frequency domain for RF spectrum result display RBW Couples the step size to the resolution bandwidth Available for measurements in the time domain for all result displays except RF spectrum OFF Decouples the step size RST SPAN Example FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 96 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor Factor This command defines a step size factor if the center frequency step size is coupled to the span or the resolution bandwidth 11 4 5 11 4 5 1 Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt Factor gt 1 to 100 PCT RST 10 Example FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 20PCT Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 96 Configuring the Vertical Axis Amplitude Scaling The following commands are required to configure the amplitude and vertical axis set tings in a remote environment Amplitude SOUMINGS 2 c pccecceetasecdeseetccdecedbecseceeetpsadedeceppassedectpesusdeedersadedeospieuees 242 e Gohfiguring The ABSriatloros cc e e rhe t t ees ere den ERE RES 243 e Configuring a Preamplifler cic ori rre Eee ore esae d HR rete H eeet eren 246 e Scalo tlg Y SAXIS rer ene RE RN E SRSRE RUN REREFE RES REN XNERRSEEE SEMEN AK EREEK ERR SEMEN FANS QUERES 247 Amplitude Settings Useful commands for amp
429. rtr dehet 175 SINAD sath AID sis dese oi eh ec e e tae TTL handshake see TTL synchronization eesessesssssss 73 TTL synchronization AUX control external generator sss 33 External generator issii 33 43 73 le Power sensor Reference level ssssssssssssess Updating Result display arescit en Ur eer lor di eet eden pais Result display remote da Upper Level Hysteresis ccccecsceeseseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeee User manuals errare e aano macie odes 6 V View filter Limit lihes 1 i rta noon meni erai chen 155 Visible Limit lines 1 arn etiaro ede renta seen 155 Volume Remote control caret tci etri 240 Ww Weighting filter AP TINGRS a erre eb ree piece detur Window title bar information Windows Adding remote e retro e etes 298 Closing remote 2 c reges 300 303 GOMAQUIING PE Layout remote n Maximizing remote ree ttes 297 Querying remote siei 1 ceret 299 Replacing remote 300 Splitting remote 297 Types remote 298 X X axis Limit lilieS sares trenes 158 X Offset Limit liie suite rrr rer tn nns 155 X value UE CC M 142 Y Y axis LEMME SS sci 158 feror 123 Y Offset E ndn easieaet a vaensns cxndv Tne E OERE aE 156 YIG preselector Activating Deactivating s 55 Activating Deactiv
430. s Query only FORMat DATA Format This command selects the data format that is used for transmission of trace data from the R amp S FSW to the controlling computer Note that the command has no effect for data that you send to the R amp S FSW The R amp S FSW automatically recognizes the data it receives regardless of the format Parameters Format ASCii ASCii format separated by commas This format is almost always suitable regardless of the actual data format However the data is not as compact as other for mats may be REAL 32 32 bit IEEE 754 floating point numbers in the definite length block format In the Spectrum application the format setting REAL is used for the binary transmission of trace data For I Q data 8 bytes per sample are returned for this format set ting RST ASCII 11 7 2 Retrieving Results Example FORM REAL 32 Usage SCPI confirmed TRACe lt n gt DATA This command queries current trace data and measurement results The data format depends on FORMat DATA Query parameters lt ResultType gt Selects the type of result to be returned TRACE1 TRACE6 Returns the trace data for the corresponding trace Return values lt TraceData gt The trace data consists of a list of power levels that have been measured The number of power levels in the list depends on the currently selected number of sweep points The unit depends on t
431. s Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Note For offline AF or RF triggers no output signal is provided Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 263 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection on page 263 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 For details see the description of the STATus OPERation register in the R amp S FSW User Manual and the description of the AUX port in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 264 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 263 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger port PULSe LENGth on page 264 5 8 2 Output Settings Send Trigger Output Type
432. s on page 52 2 Trigger See chapter 5 4 Trigger Configuration on page 97 3 Data Acquisition See chapter 5 5 Data Acquisition on page 105 4 Demod Display See chapter 5 6 Demodulation Display on page 110 5 Demodulation Settings See chapter 5 7 Demodulation on page 110 6 Analysis See chapter 6 Analysis on page 135 7 Optionally Outputs See chapter 5 8 1 Output Settings on page 127 To configure settings gt Select any button in the Overview to open the corresponding dialog box Select a setting in the channel bar at the top of the measurement channel tab to change a specific setting 5 3 5 3 1 Input and Frontend Settings Preset Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lefthand corner of the Overview to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values Note that the PRESET key restores the entire instrument to its default values and thus closes all measurement channels on the R amp S FSW except for the default Spectrum application channel Remote command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 185 Setup Standard Opens a file selection dialog box to select a predefined setup file See Setup Stand ard on page 49 Specifics for The measurement channel may contain several windows for different results Thus the settings indicated in the Overview and configured in the dialog boxes vary depending on the s
433. s function is only available for evaluations in the time domain Tip In addition to the Time Domain Zoom a graphical zoom is available for all dia gram evaluations However the graphical zoom is useful only if more measured values than trace points are available The time span represented by each measurement point remains the same For details see chapter 6 5 Zoom Functions on page 159 State Time Domain Zoom Activates or deactivates the time domain zoom mode ON Activates the time domain zoom Demodulation OFF Deactivates the time domain zoom and restores the original display If more measured values than measurement points are available sev eral measured values are combined in one measurement point according to the method of the selected trace detector Remote command SENSe ADEMod n Z0OM STATe on page 268 Start Time Domain Zoom Defines the start time for the time domain zoom area For spectrum evaluations the start time is always 0 Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM STARt on page 267 Length Time Domain Zoom Defines the length of the time domain zoom area Enter the length as a time value manually or use the Auto setting to set the length to the current number of sweep points automatically Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM LENGth on page 267 SENSe ADEMod n ZOOM LENGth MODE on page 267 Time per Division Time Domain Zoom Enable
434. s original unit Logarithmic For logarithmic scaling the values are averaged in dBm For linear scaling the behavior is the same as with linear averaging Power Trace Settings Activates linear power averaging The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to averag ing After the averaging the data is converted back into its original unit Use this mode to average power values in Volts or Amperes cor rectly Remote command SENSe AVERage lt n gt TYP Average Count E on page 289 Determines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures If the trace modes Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set In continuous sweep mode if sweep count 0 default averaging is performed over 10 sweeps For sweep count 1 no averaging maxhold or minhold operations are per formed Remote command SENSe AVERage lt n gt COUNt on page 288 Predefined Trace Settings Quick Config Commonly required trace settings have been predefined and can be applied very quickly by selecting the appropriate button Function Trace Settings Preset All Traces Trace 1 Clear Write Traces 2 6 Blank Set Trace Mode Trace 1 Max Hold Max Avg Min Trace 2 Average Trace 3 Min Hold Traces 4 6 Blank Set Trace Mode Trace 1 Max Hold Mee Onis Min Trace 2 Clear Write Trace 3 Min Hold Traces 4 6 Blank Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys Display
435. s the Time Domain Zoom function and defines the zoom area length in one step The width of the zoom display is divided into 10 divisions thus by entering the time that is displayed in each division you indirectly define the zoom area length Time per Division 10 The starting point of the zoom area is determined automati cally To specify the starting point manually use the Start setting The Time per Division softkey is available from the main Analog Demodulation menu Zero Phase Reference Position PM Time Domain only Defines the position at which the phase of the PM demodulated signal is set to O rad The entry is made with respect to time In the default setting the first measured value is set to O rad This setting is only available for PM time domain displays with DC coupling Remote command SENSe ADEMod n PM RPOint X on page 265 Phase Wrap On Off PM Time Domain only Activates deactivates the phase wrap On The phase is displayed in the range 180 M For example if the phase exceeds 180 360 is subtracted from the phase value with the display thus showing gt 180 Off The phase is not wrapped This setting is only available for PM time domain displays with DC coupling Demodulation 5 7 2 Demodulation Spectrum 5 7 2 1 Access Overview gt Demod Settings gt Spectrum or Meas Setup gt Demod gt Spectrum tab The demodulation spectrum d
436. s the Traces settings and focuses the Mode list for the selected trace Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 286 Trace Data Export Configuration 6 2 Trace Data Export Configuration LT Access Save gt Export gt Trace Export Config or TRACE gt Trace Config Trace Data Export The standard data management functions e g saving or loading instrument settings that are available for all R amp S FSW applications are not described here See the R amp S FSW User Manual for a description of the standard functions Traces 15111 Transient Analysis Traces Trace Data Export Export all Traces and Marker Table Results Indude Instrument Measurement Settings Decimal Separator Pont Export to ASCII File Export all Traces and all Table Results sseeeee 139 Include Instrument Measurement SettingS cccccceesceccceeeeseeceeceeeseeneeeseeeeeeeneeeees 139 mace TO EXIM M D 140 Decimal Separat airean aeara Enee EE peace NEEE Veiuwad Re Rod Ud tenia 140 Export Tracs wA SOFE eei E oap creed 140 Export all Traces and all Table Results Selects all displayed traces and result tables e g Result Summary marker table etc in the current application for export to an ASCII file Alternatively you can select one specific trace only for export see Trace to Export The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the sc
437. s the date and time of the creation of the file Its type is xs dateTime see RsIqTar xsd Q Data File Format iq tar Element Samples Description Contains the number of samples of the I Q data For multi channel signals all chan nels have the same number of samples One sample can be e A complex number represented as a pair of and Q values e A complex number represented as a pair of magnitude and phase values Areal number represented as a single real value See also Format element Clock Contains the clock frequency in Hz i e the sample rate of the I Q data A signal gen erator typically outputs the I Q data at a rate that equals the clock frequency If the Q data was captured with a signal analyzer the signal analyzer used the clock fre quency as the sample rate The attribute unit must be set to Hz Format Specifies how the binary data is saved in the I Q data binary file see DataFilename element Every sample must be in the same format The format can be one of the following complex Complex number in cartesian format i e and Q values interleaved and Q are unitless real Real number unitless polar Complex number in polar format i e magnitude unitless and phase rad values interleaved Requires DataType float32 or f1oat64 DataType Specifies the binary format used for samples in the I Q data binary file see DataFilename element and chapter A 2 2 I Q Data
438. seeeseeceeeeeees 318 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MODE 0ccccceccceceececesssceceecccesseeseseseeseneceeseseeeeaeees 318 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MREFP cccccescccesescecscececesceesseseeceaeceseageeesseseeeageeees 319 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m STATe sesssssssssessssssseseeeenenen nennen tenerent 319 CAL Culatesn gt DEL Tamarkersmo TRAG 2 2 adeeel cornua docena us Ode xe tira aee eeu 319 CAL Gulate lt n amp DELETatviarket moX 2i ii romeo eere qe er Iano ELO F RE DINER E NI Pa PII PPSPNO Ide 320 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELAtive ccccccsescceesececeescceseeeseeseeeseaceesseeeeeenees 320 CAL Culateshi DEL Tamai Ket MA Y 2 uiae tuned eae a iaa aa a EEA ia 320 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command turns all markers off Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event Analyzing Results Manual operation See All Markers Off on page 143 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt lt State gt This command links normal marker lt m1 gt to any active normal marker lt m2 gt If you change the horizontal position of marker lt m2 gt marker lt m1 gt changes its hori zontal position to the same value Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK4 LINK TO MARK2 ON Links marker 4 to marker 2 Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page
439. settings are described in chap ter 11 4 5 Configuring the Vertical Axis Amplitude Scaling on page 242 Amplitude Reference Level Input Settings p c Value 0 0 dBm Preamplifier Offset 0 0 dB Input Coupling Unit P Impedance Mechanical Attenuation Electronic Attenuation State Mode Mode Value Using Electronic Attenuation 0 cc ccccececteeescccetenneiceectiedeceereeateeeedipetinceectieunenecteeeuet 91 gerer gor m 92 L Preamplifier seen tette 92 L Aput COUPING aiiin iernii siada i anoaiiaeaii aaa dai iaa aaaea 92 TEE e MENT 92 Reference Level Defines the expected maximum reference level Signal levels above this value may not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IF OVLD status display OVLD for analog baseband or digitial baseband input The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis Since the hardware of the R amp S FSW is adapted according to this value it is recom mended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Note that for input from the External Mixer R amp S FSW B21 the maximum reference level also depends on the conversion loss see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual for details Remote c
440. sfully Example SYST COMM RDEV 0SC ALIG STEP Result 1 Configuring the Measurement Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment DATE Returns the date of alignment of the IF OUT 2 GHZ to the oscilloscope for the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 Return values Date Returns the date of alignment Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC DATE Result 2014 02 28 Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope IDN Returns the identification string of the oscilloscope connected to the R amp S FSW Return values lt IDString gt Example SYST COMM RDEV 0SC IDN Result Rohde amp Schwarz RTO 1316 1000k14 200153 2 45 1 1 Usage Query only Manual operation See TCPIP Address or Computer name on page 81 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope LEDState Returns the state of the LAN connection to the oscilloscope for the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 Return values Color GREEN Connection to the instrument has been established successfully GREY Configuration state unknown for example if you have not yet started transmission RED Connection to the instrument could not be established Check the connection between the R amp S FSW and the oscillo Scope and make sure the IP address of the oscilloscope has been defined see SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope TCPip on page 207 Example SYST COMM
441. so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements Usage Event INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer MODE lt Mode gt This command selects the way the R amp S FSW application performs measurements sequentially Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 295 A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Note In order to synchronize to the end of a sequential measurement using OPC OPC or WAI you must use SING1e Sequence mode For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Suffix n irrelevant Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps Parameters lt Mode gt SINGIe Each measurement is performed once regardless of the chan nel s sweep mode considering each channels sweep count until all measurements in all active channels have been per formed CONTinuous The measurements in each active channel are performed one after the other repeatedly regardless of the channel s sweep mode in the same order until the Sequencer is stopped CDEFined First a single sequence is performed Then only those channels in continuous sweep mode INIT CONT ON are repeated RST CONTinuous Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement wil
442. sp ID SRNUIDGE euer trn vk ettet E se ewe va EY key n Fees k ee Hg nta page tex ERS ANESSE 215 SENSe PROBe sp SETU p CMOPFTset ere oer tret rr tr etd ten Ek ne a REX Deng 214 SENSe PROBesp SETUp MODB reet ta terroir ta kh ree rre EE e ree oO PER FER ERES 215 SENSE PROB lt p SETUDpINAME S eren iecore tapete eter xu sE ee SERE EDO XE E EE OTE ATE EEEE 216 SENSe PROBesp SETUp S lAT6 rrr rnt erem eere op n e Ri rre ee RATE Raga 216 SENS amp PROBesp SETup zT YBPE i inttr tror rtr rnb e I re Roca ra EH E e TY ER ERR RUE 216 SENSEI RIMS CAP TUVS ORFS Gt T cine 362 SENSe SWEep COUNt CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed RPOint MAXimum PEAK CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X essssssssssseeese eene 335 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOintY esses 335 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y OFFSet sss 335 CALCulate n DELTamarker m FUNCtion FIXed STATe essere 336 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarkersm gt LINK vsicsch veces rito e ea ctr rccte pt tpe gos nates 318 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum LEFT Tressie a CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXiMUM NEXT cece cece eee eens eceee sirrinin uNa aaa iNe CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum RIGH
443. specially with FM For help on determining the adequate demodulation bandwidth see Determining the demodulation bandwidth on page 175 A practical example is described in chapter 9 Measurement Example Demodulating an FM Signal on page 169 R amp S FSW K7 Measurement Basics 4 3 Sample Rate and Demodulation Bandwidth The maximum demodulation bandwidths that can be obtained during the measure ment depending on the sample rate are listed in the tables below for different demod ulation filter types The allowed value range of the measurement time and trigger offset depends on the selected demodulation bandwidth and demodulation filter If the AF fil ter or the AF trigger are not active the measurement time increases by 20 A maximum of 24 million samples can be captured assuming sufficient memory is available thus the maximum measurement time can be determined according to the following formula Meas time 4 Sample counts sample rate The minimum trigger offset is Meas time max Table 4 1 Available demodulation bandwidths and corresponding sample rates Demodulation BW Sample Rate Flat Top Sample Rate Gaussian Top 100 Hz 122 0703125 Hz 400 Hz 200 Hz 244 140625 Hz 800 Hz 400 Hz 488 28125 Hz 1 6 kHz 800 Hz 976 5625 Hz 3 2 kHz 1 6 kHz 1 953125 kHz 6 4 kHz 3 2 kHz 3 90625 kHz 12 8 kHz 6 4 kHz 7 8125 kHz 25 6 kHz 12 5 kHz 15 625 kHz 50 kHz 25
444. ss filter type for the specified evaluation For details on the low pass filter refer to Low Pass on page 118 Parameters lt FilterType gt 5PCT 10PCT 25PCT RST 25PCT Example FILT LPAS FREQ REL 25PCT Selects the low pass filter as 25 of the demodulation band width Manual operation See Low Pass on page 118 SENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs STATe State This command activates deactivates the selected low pass filter for the specified evalu ation For details on the low pass filter refer to Low Pass on page 118 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT LPAS ON Activates the selected low pass filter Manual operation See Low Pass on page 118 Defining the Scaling and Units The scaling parameters define the range of the demodulated data to be displayed Scaling for AF Evaluation These settings are only available for AF evaluations Useful commands described elsewhere SENSe ADJust SCALe Y AUTO CONTinuous on page 283 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF COUPling on page 265 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition on page 248 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 248 Configuring the Measurement Specific commands DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue cesses enne 276 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue Value This command defines the reference value assigned
445. support which interfaces see the documenta tion of the corresponding signal generator Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator INTerface on page 232 TTL Handshake If available for the specified generator type this option activates TTL synchronization via handshake for GPIB connections Input and Frontend Settings Using the TTL interface allows for considerably higher measurement rates than pure GPIB control because the frequency stepping of the R amp S FSW is directly coupled with the frequency stepping of the generator For more information on TTL synchronization see TTL synchronization on page 43 For an overview of which generators support TTL synchronization see chapter 4 7 4 2 Overview of Supported Generators on page 36 Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator LINK on page 232 GPIB Address TCP IP Address For LAN connections TCP IP address of the signal generator For GPIB connections GPIB address of the signal generator Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB RDEVice GENerator ADDRess on page 232 SYSTem COMMunicate TCPip RDEVice GENerator ADDRess on page 233 Reference Selects the internal R amp S FSW or an external frequency reference to synchronize the R amp S FSW with the generator default internal Remote command SOURce EXTernal ROSCillator SOURce on page 231 Edit Generator Setup File Displays the setup file for the currently selected Generator Type in read on
446. t SELect Source This command selects the signal source for measurements i e it defines which con nector is used to input data to the R amp S FSW If no additional input options are installed only RF input is supported Parameters Source RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector DIQ Digital IQ data only available with optional Digital Baseband Interface For details on I Q input see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer User Manual AIQ Analog Baseband signal only available with optional Analog Baseband Interface R amp S FSW B71 For details on Analog Baseband input see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer User Manual RST RF 11 4 2 2 Configuring the Measurement Manual operation See Radio Frequency State on page 54 See Digital I Q Input State on page 67 See Analog Baseband Input State on page 69 Using External Mixers The commands required to work with external mixers in a remote environment are described here Note that these commands require the R amp S FSW B21 option to be installed and an external mixer to be connected to the front panel of the R amp S FSW In MSRA MSRT mode external mixers are not supported For details on working with external mixers see the R amp S FSW User Manual ec uuo 191 Mixer Setti S eU 193 e Conversion Loss Table Settings cetera 198 e Programming Example Working with an External Mixer ssssss 202 Basic Settings The bas
447. t TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 10 dBm Example TRIG LEV IFP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 102 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the magnitude the I Q data must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV IQP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 102 TRIGger SEQuence OSCilloscope COUPling lt CoupType gt Configures the coupling of the external trigger to the oscilloscope Parameters lt CoupType gt Coupling type DC Direct connection with 50 O termination passes both DC and AC components of the trigger signal CDLimit Direct connection with 1 MO termination passes both DC and AC components of the trigger signal AC Connection through capacitor removes unwanted DC and very low frequency components RST DC Manual operation See Coupling on page 103 Configuring the Measurement TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level the RF input must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered
448. t WindowName gt This command queries the index of a particular display window in the active measure ment channel Note to query the name of a particular window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify query Query parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window Return values Windowlndex Index number of the window Configuring the Result Display Example LAY WIND IDEN 2 Queries the index of the result display named 2 Response 2 Usage Query only LAYout REMove WINDow lt WindowName gt This command removes a window from the display in the active measurement channel Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Example LAY REM 2 Removes the result display in the window named 2 Usage Event LAYout REPLace WINDow lt WindowName gt lt WindowType gt This command replaces the window type for example from Diagram to Result Sum mary of an already existing window in the active measurement channel while keeping its position index and window name To add a new window use the LAYout ADD WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows in the active measurement channel use the LAYout CATalog WINDow qu
449. t at sample rate 8 MHz record length 32000 trigger source EXTernal trigger slope POSitive offset samples 500 500 samples before trigger occurred of meas 30 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SPECtrum BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution Bandwidth Defines the resolution bandwidth for data acquisition From the specified RBW and the demodulation span set by SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SPECtrum SPAN MAXimum on page 270 or SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 252 the required measurement time is calculated If the available measurement time is not sufficient for the given bandwidth the measurement time is set to its maximum and the resolution bandwidth is increased to the resulting band width This command is identical to SENS BAND RES see the R amp S FSW User Manual lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Bandwidth gt Example refer to data sheet RST 61 2 kHz ADEM SPEC BAND 61 2kHz Sets the resolution bandwidth to 61 2 kHz Configuring the Measurement SENSe JADEMod lt n gt SRATe This command returns the sample rate set up for the current analog demodulation measurement lt n gt is irrelevant Example ADEM SRAT Returns the current sample rate Usage Query only SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod Bandwidth This command sets the bandwidth for analog demodulation Depending on the selected demodulation bandwidth the instrument selec
450. t det gt MODE Mode CONFigure ADEMod RESults FM DETector det MODE Mode CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector lt det gt MODE Mode Defines the mode with which the demodulation result is determined Suffix det 1 Positive peak 2 Negative peak 3 Average of positive and negative peaks PK 2 4 RMS Detector function used for relative demodulation Parameters Mode WRITe Overwrite mode the detector value is overwritten by each Sweep This is the default setting AVERage The average result is determined over all sweeps MAXHold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FSW saves each result only if the new value is greater than the previous one RST WRITe Example See CONFigure ADEMod RESults PM DETector det STATe on page 278 Manual operation See Mode on page 125 CONFigure ADEMod RESults UNIT Unit This command selects the unit for relative demodulation results Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt Unit gt PCT DB RST PCT Example CONF ADEM RES AM DET2 STAT ON Activates relative demodulation for the negative peak detector CONF ADEM RES AM DET2 MODE AVER Sets the negative peak detector to average mode CONF ADEM RES UNIT PCT Defines the unit for relative values as percent CONF ADEM RES AM DET2 REF 1 415 Sets the reference value for relative results to 1 415 96
451. t to the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW it can also be output to headphones connected on the front panel PHONES connector CAUTION To protect your hearing make sure that the volume setting is not too high before putting on the headphones If you do not hear output on the connected headphones despite having enabled both general online demod output OUTPut ADEMod ONLine STATe on page 238 and this command adjust the volume setting Using SYSTem SPEaker VOLume on page 240 11 4 4 Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example OUTP ADEM PHON ON Manual operation See Phones Output on page 131 SYSTem SPEaker VOLume Volume This command defines the volume of the built in loudspeaker for demodulated signals The command is available in the time domain in Spectrum mode and in Analog Demodulation mode Parameters Volume Range 0 to 1 RST 0 5 Example SYST SPE VOL 0 Switches the loudspeaker to mute Manual operation See Online Demodulation Output State on page 130 Frequency Settings SENSeTPREGUSDGU CENT Gi ideis eene daga petat tate E eoe tede a nete t xot eed bat urea 240 SENSe FREQuency CENTO STEP ercran iri iiaia aaria beii eee a Ea e vesting 241 SENSE FREQuency CENTSESTEP LINK eir te oreet pen neutra reram inus 241 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor essere 241 SENSe FREQuency
452. ta Definite Length Block Data according to IEEE 488 2 each measurement value being formatted in 32 Bit IEEE 754 Floating Point Format The schema of the result string is as follows 41024 lt valuel gt lt value2 gt lt value n with 4 number of digits 4 in the example of the following number of data bytes 1024 number of following data bytes 1024 in the example lt Value gt 4 byte floating point value Reading out data in binary format is quicker than in ASCII format Thus binary format is recommended for large amounts of data 11 7 5 Reference ASCII File Export Format Trace data can be exported to a file in ASCII format for further evaluation in other applications This reference describes in detail the format of the export files for result data The file consists of the header containing important scaling parameters and a data sec tion containing the trace data Optionally the header can be excluded from the file see Include Instrument Measurement Settings on page 139 R amp S9FSW K7 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements YJn ee Rr aes The data of the file header consist of three columns each separated by a semicolon parameter name numeric value basic unit The data section starts with the keyword Trace lt n gt n number of stored trace followed by the measured data in one or severa
453. tain the name of the new window as a result Parameters Direction LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to add See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 298 for a list of availa ble window types Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY WIND1 ADD LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify This command queries the name of a particular display window indicated by the lt n gt suffix in the active measurement channel Note to query the index of a particular window use the LAYout IDENtify WINDow command Return values lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window In the default state the name of the window is its index Retrieving Results Example LAY WIND2 IDEN Queries the name of the result display in window 2 Response 2 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow n REMove This command removes the window specified by the suffix n from the display in the active measurement channel The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REMove WINDow command Example LAY WIND2 REM Removes the result display in window 2 Usage Event LAY out WINDow lt n gt REPLace lt WindowType gt This command cha
454. tc If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is presumed Example Element order for real data 1 channel I 0 Real sample 0 I 1 Real sample 1 I 2 Real sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel I 0 Q 0 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 0 I 1 Q 1 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 1 I 2 21 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex polar data 1 channel Mag 0 Phi 0 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 0 Mag 1 Phi l Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 1 Mag 2 Phi 2 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 2 Q Data File Format iq tar Example Element order for complex cartesian data 3 channels Complex data I channel no time index Q channel no time index 01 0 Otol 0 Channel 0 Complex sample 0 1 0 Q 1 0 Channel 1 Complex sample 0 2 01 Q 2 0 Channel 2 Complex sample 0 O 1 Q 0 1 Channel 0 Complex sample 1 TY gir Channel 1 Complex sample 1 2 1 O 2111 Channel 2 Complex sample 1 01 2 1 Q 01 21 Channel 0 Complex sample 2 11 21 QI 11 2 Channel 1 Complex sample 2 2 215 OQI2112 Channel 2 Complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel This example demonstrates how to store complex cartesian data in float32 format usin
455. ternal power triggers The hysteresis in dB is the value the input signal must stay below the IF power trigger level in order to allow a trigger to start the measurement Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range 3dB to 50 dB Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB Example PMET2 TRIG HYST 10 Sets the hysteresis of the trigger to 10 dB Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 88 Configuring the Measurement SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger LEVel Level This command defines the trigger level for external power triggers This command requires the use of an R amp S NRP Z81 power sensor Suffix lt p gt 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Level gt 20 to 20 dBm Range 20 dBm to 20 dBm RST 10 dBm Example PMET2 TRIG LEV 10 dBm Sets the level of the trigger Manual operation See External Trigger Level on page 87 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger SLOPe Edge This command selects the trigger condition for external power triggers Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters lt Edge gt POSitive The measurement starts in case the trigger signal shows a posi tive edge NEGative The measurement starts in case the trigger signal shows a neg ative edge RST POSitive Example PMET2 TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Slope on page 88 SENSe PMETer lt p gt TRIGger STATe lt State gt This command turns the external power trigger on an
456. ternatively a Peak Search can be performed to set the current maximum value of the trace assigned to marker 1 as the fixed reference marker Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed STATe on page 336 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y on page 335 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X on page 335 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint MAXimum PEAK on page 335 T T Link Time Marker Links the markers in all time domain diagrams Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK on page 322 Link AF Spectrum Marker Links the markers in all AF spectrum displays Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK on page 322 6 3 2 Marker Search Settings and Positioning Functions Access Overview gt Analysis gt Marker gt Search or Marker gt Search Several functions are available to set the marker to a specific position very quickly and easily or to use the current marker position to define another characteristic value In order to determine the required marker position searches may be performed The search results can be influenced by special settings The remote commands required to define these settings are described in chap ter 11 8 1 Working with Markers Remotely on page 315 s Marker Search Sells ue eret reta eain etti ev etd epo Lada n bg 145 e P
457. tet Ene a Reino RR an ERR a A aa iE 222 SENSe PMETer lt p gt FRE Quency LINK cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee cess eee ee eee nennen nemen rennen 222 SENS PME Term p M FIM cca cnet ta eter rtt re tad extet Potosi cene 222 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe AVERage COUNt sessssssssssssseseseneenene nennen nennen rena 223 SENSe PMETer p MTIMe AVERage STATe sse 223 SENSe PMETer p ROFFset STATe eessssssssssseesen enne ener rere rrr nnns 224 SENS amp PMETer p S TA Te eret eene nr e a eed eee aote uvas edad a 224 SENSeJPMETerspsUPDaltel STAT itt rehenes tu tpe Cu en Re uaa teer bare eeu Ro Cea nes 224 UNIT lt n gt PMETer lt p gt POWED ccccccceeeceeee cece eee ee eee ae ae nennen ennt en renes eres n anandi kai iada aiaa 225 BNIT RnPMETSFSEEPONWSOIERATIGs ida na eruit repeat chatear haerere taxed 225 CALibration PMETer lt p gt ZERO AUTO ONCE This commands starts to zero the power sensor Note that you have to disconnect the signals from the power sensor input before you start to zero the power sensor Otherwise results are invalid Suffix p 1 4 Power sensor index Parameters ONCE Example CAL PMET2 ZERO AUTO ONCE WAI Starts zeroing the power sensor 2 and delays the execution of further commands until zeroing is concluded Usage Event Manual operation See Zeroing Power Sensor on page 85 CALCulate
458. the Analysis dialog box switch to the Trace Export tab b Select Export Trace to ASCII File c Define a file name and storage location and select OK 9 Measurement Example Demodulating an FM Signal A practical example for a basic Analog Demodulation measurement is provided here It demonstrates how operating and measurement errors can be avoided using correct configuration settings The measurement is performed using the following devices e An R amp S FSW with application firmware R amp S FSW K7 Analog Demodulation e A vector signal generator e g R amp S SMW Fig 9 1 Test setup Signal generator settings e g R amp S SMW Frequency 500 MHz Level 10 dBm Modulation FM Modulation frequency 10 kHz Frequency deviation 50 kHz Procedure 1 Preset the R amp S FSW 2 Set the center frequency to 500 MHz 3 Set the reference level to 0 dBm 4 Select the MODE key and then the Analog Demod button By default the FM Time Domain result display and a Result Summary are shown R amp S FSW K7 Measurement Example Demodulating an FM Signal MultiView Spectrum Analog Demod Ref Level 0 00 dBm Att OdB AQT 62 5us DBW 5MHz Freq 500 0 MHz CF 500 0 MHz 4 Result Summary Carrier Power 10 32 dBm Carrier Offset 38 03 kHz Peak Peak Epl RMS Mod Freq SINAD FM 51 433 kHz 38 157 kHz 44 795 kHz 33 595 kHz Fig 9 2 Default Analog Demodulation measurement result
459. the Refresh all function in the Sequencer menu Remote command INITiate lt n gt REFResh on page 293 Measurement Time AQT Defines how long data is acquired for demodulatation Remote command SENSe ADEMod n MTIMe on page 249 Sweep Points Defines the number of measured values to be collected during one sweep All values from 101 to 100001 can be set The default value is 1001 sweep points Remote command SENSe SWEep POINts on page 253 Sweep Average Count Defines the number of sweeps to be performed in the single sweep mode Values from 0 to 200000 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one sweep is performed The sweep count is applied to all the traces in all diagrams If the trace modes Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set this value also deter mines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures 5 6 5 7 5 7 1 Demodulation Display In continuous sweep mode if sweep count 0 default averaging is performed over 10 sweeps For sweep count 1 no averaging maxhold or minhold operations are per formed Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 253 SENSe AVERage lt n gt COUNt on page 288 Demodulation Display The demodulated signal can be displayed using various evaluation methods All evalu ation methods available for the Analog Demodulation application are displayed in the evaluation bar in SmartGrid mode when you do one of the following Select t
460. the delta marker and positions a reference marker to the peak power Parameters lt Position gt Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis The position is relative to the reference marker To select an absolute position you have to change the delta marker mode with CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MODE on page 318 A query returns the absolute position of the delta marker Range The value range and unit depend on the measure ment and scale of the x axis Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute x value of delta marker 1 Manual operation See Marker Position X value on page 142 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweep mode See also I
461. the optional R amp S FSW VSA application R amp S FSW K70 some sample iq tar files are provided in the C R_S Instr user vsa DemoSignals directory on the R amp S FSW Contained files An ig tar file must contain the following files e Q parameter XML file e g xyz xm1 Contains meta information about the I Q data e g sample rate The filename can be defined freely but there must be only one single I Q parameter XML file inside an ig tar file e J Q data binary file e g xyz complex float32 Contains the binary I Q data of all channels There must be only one single I Q data binary file inside an iq tar file Optionally an iq tar file can contain the following file e Q preview XSLT file e g open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt Contains a stylesheet to display the I Q parameter XML file and a preview of the l Q data in a web browser A sample stylesheet is available at http www rohde schwarz com file open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt Q Data File Format iq tar A 2 1 I Q Parameter XML File Specification The content of the I Q parameter XML file must comply with the XML schema RsIqTar xsd available at http www rohde schwarz com file RslqTar xsd In particular the order of the XML elements must be respected i e iq tar uses an ordered XML schema For your own implementation of the iq tar file format make sure to validate your XML file against the given schema The following example shows an I
462. the output data block is defined by the FORMat command see FORMat DATA on page 305 The trace results are configured for a specific evaluation n is irrelevant The follow ing table indicates which command syntax refers to which evaluation method as well as the output unit of the results Command syntax Evaluation method Output unit AM ABSolute TDOMain RF time domain dBm AM RELative TDOMain AM time domain AM RELative AFSPectrum AM spectrum FM TDOMain FM time domain kHz FM AFSPectrum FM spectrum kHz PM TDOMain PM time domain rad or Retrieving Results Command syntax PM AFSPectrum Evaluation method Output unit PM spectrum rad or SPECtrum RF spectrum dBm logarithmic display or V linear display Query parameters lt TraceMode gt Example Usage WRITe AVERage MAXHold MINHold VIEW The specified trace mode must be one of those configured by SENS ADEM lt Evaluation gt TYPE see SENSe ADEMod lt n gt SPECtrum TYPE on page 287 Otherwise a query error is generated ADEM AM AVER MAXH MINH Sets up RF time domain results to be measured INIT WAI Starts measurement and waits for sync FORM ASC Selects output format ADEM AM RES AVER Reads RF time domain average results ADEM AM RES MAXH Reads RF time domain max hold results ADEM AM RES MINH Reads RF time domain min hold result
463. the reference trace and the current instrument settings are taken into account automatically If the span is reduced a linear interpola tion of the intermediate values is applied If the span increases the values at the left or User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 39 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output right border of the reference dataset are extrapolated to the current start or stop fre quency i e the reference dataset is extended by constant values Thus the instrument settings can be changed in a wide area without giving up normali zation This reduces the necessity to carry out a new normalization to a minimum If approximation becomes too poor however normalization is aborted and an error message is displayed see chapter 4 7 4 8 Displayed Information and Errors on page 44 The normalized trace in the display The normalized reference trace is also displayed in the spectrum diagram by default at the top of the diagram 100 of the window height It is indicated by a red line labeled NOR followed by the current reference value However it can be shifted ver tically to reflect an attenuation or gain caused by the measured DUT see also Shifting the reference line and normalized trace on page 41 Restoring the calibration settings If the measurement settings no longer match the instrument settings with which the calibration was performed indicated by the APX or no label next to Ext TG in the chan
464. the y axis for AF measurements RF power and RF spectrum measurements are not affected by the auto scaling Remote command SENSe ADJust SCALe Y AUTO CONTinuous on page 283 Trace Settings 6 Analysis General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers lines etc can be config ured via the Analysis button in the Overview They are identical to the analysis func tions in the base unit except for the special marker functions The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 11 Remote Commands for Analog Demodulation Measurements on page 176 6 1 Trace Settings ccs scecsxsteecs cacecsvsceechsteccescncevccecessechecsencsesesecedudevs ceteevessnessacuecv see 135 6 2 Trace Data Export Configuration cccccccccessceeeeeeeeseeesneeeeeeessesseeeeeeeeeesseneeeeeeness 139 6 3 Working with Markers in the R amp S FSW Analog Demodulation application 140 6 3 1 Market Settings ier ert dae Redde edu dba ebd aed ea su anes 141 6 3 2 Marker Search Settings and Positioning Functions sssssssssss 145 6 3 3 Measuring Phase Noise ssssssseseeee enne nennen ener 148 6 3 4 Marker Function Configuration sssssssssssseeeeenee eene enne 148 6 4 Limit Line Settings and FUNCTtIONS ccccccssseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseseeeeseeeeeeseeensseeeeeeenes 153 6 4 1 Limit Line Management sssssssseene nennen nrneen enne nnns 1
465. tion Defines if only even only odd or even and odd harmonics can be used for conversion Depending on this selection the order of harmonic to be used for conversion changes see Harmonic Order on page 58 Which harmonics are supported depends on the mixer type Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic TYPE on page 196 Harmonic Order Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines which order of the harmonic of the LO frequencies is used to cover the fre quency range By default the lowest order of the specified harmonic type is selected that allows con version of input signals in the whole band If due to the LO frequency the conversion is not possible using one harmonic the band is split For the band USER the order of harmonic is defined by the user The order of har monic can be between 2 and 61 the lowest usable frequency being 26 5 GHz Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic LOW on page 196 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALue on page 195 Input and Frontend Settings Conversion loss Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines how the conversion loss is handled The following methods are available Average Defines the average conversion loss for the entire range in dB Table Defines the conversion loss via the table selected from the list Pre defined conversion loss tables are often provided with the external mixer and can be imported to the R amp S FSW Alternatively you can define your
466. to the reference position in the specified window Separate reference values are maintained for the various displays Suffix lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt RST AM time domain 0 PCT FM time domain 0 Hz PM time domain 0 rad AM spectrum 100 PCT FM spectrum 250 kHz PM spectrum 10 rad Example DISP TRAC Y RVAL 0 Sets the value assigned to the reference position to 0 Hz Manual operation See Reference Value on page 121 11 4 8 7 Scaling for RF Evaluation These commands are required for RF evaluations and the result summary DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 248 DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SPACing on page 248 DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe on page 247 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE on page 247 11 4 8 8 Units The units define how the demodulated data is displayed UNI Si AING LG En 276 Ol Trece aD aer RE P MR E 277 UNIT lt n gt ANGLe lt Unit gt This command selects the unit for angles for PM display lt n gt is irrelevant This command is identical to CALC UNIT ANGL Parameters lt Unit gt DEG RAD RST RAD Example UNIT ANGL DEG Manual operation See Phase Unit Rad Deg on page 124 11 4 8 9 Configuring the Measurement UNIT lt n gt THD lt Mode gt Selects the unit for THD measurements lt n gt is irrelevant This command is identical to CALC UNIT THD
467. tor This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 230 Configuring the Measurement Parameters REFLection Selects reflection measurements TRANsmission Selects transmission measurements RST TRANsmission Example CORR METH TRAN Sets the type of measurement to transmission Manual operation See Calibrate Transmission on page 78 See Calibrate Reflection Short on page 78 See Calibrate Reflection Open on page 78 SENSe CORRection RECall This command restores the measurement configuration used for calibration This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 230 Example CORR REC Usage Event Manual operation See Recall on page 78 SENSe CORRection STATe State This command turns correction of measurement results normalization on and off The command is available after you have created a reference trace for the selected measurement type with SENSe CORRection COLLect ACQuire on page 234 This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 230 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CORR ON Activates normalization Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Source Calibration Normalize on page 78 Configuring the Measurement SENSe CORRection TRANsducer GENerator Name Th
468. tput to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is provided D Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual 4 8 Analog Demodulation in MSRA MSRT Operating Mode The Analog Demodulation application can also be used to analyze data in MSRA or MSRT operating mode The main difference between the two modes is that in MSRA mode an I Q analyzer performs data acquisition while in MSRT mode a real time measurement is performed to capture data In MSRA MSRT operating mode only the MSRA MSRT Master actually captures data the data acquisition settings for an Analog Demodulation application channel in MSRA MSRT mode configure the analysis interval not an actual data capture from the input signal In addition a capture offset can be defined i e an offset from the start of the captured data to the start of the analysis interval for Analog Demodulation The currently used analysis interval in seconds related to measurement start is indi cated in the window header for each result display User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 46 R amp S FSW K7 Measurement Basics SSS SSS OSB aM IMM aM eS eS PH Analysis line A frequent question when analyzing multi standard signals is how each data channel is correlated in time to others Thus an analysis line has been introduced The analysis line is a common time marker for all MSRA applications It can be positioned in a
469. trace Retrieving Results Note that this value is only calculated if an AF Spectrum window is displayed lt m gt is irrelevant Parameters lt SINAD gt The signal to noise and distortion ratio in dB Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ADEMod THD RESult lt t gt This command queries the result of the total harmonic distortion THD measurement in the specified window Note that this value is only calculated if an AF Spectrum window is displayed lt m gt is irrelevant Parameters lt THD gt Total harmonic distortion of the demodulated signal in dB Usage Query only SENSe ADEMod lt n gt FM OFFSet lt ResultType gt This command calculates the FM carrier offset from the currently available measure ment data set If averaging has been activated before acquiring the data set using SENSe ADEMod n FM TDOMain RESult on page 304 the averaged FM offset over several measurements can also be obtained by setting ResultType AVERage The offset thus determined differs from the one calculated by the CALCulate lt n gt MARKer m FUNCtion ADEMod FERRor RESult t on page 310 command since for determination of the frequency deviation the modulation is removed by means of low pass filtering producing results that are different from those obtained by averaging lt n gt is irrelevant Query parameters lt ResultType gt IMMediate AVERage
470. ts the required sample rate For details on the correlation between demodulation bandwidth and sample rate refer to chapter 4 3 Sample Rate and Demodulation Bandwidth on page 27 This command is identical to SENS ADEM BAND DEM Parameters Bandwidth RST 5 MHz Example BAND DEM 1MHz Sets demodulation bandwidth to 1 MHz Manual operation See Demodulation Bandwidth on page 106 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod TYPE FilterType This command defines the type of demodulation filter to be used This command is identical to SENS ADEM BAND DEM TYPE Parameters lt FilterType gt FLAT Standard flat demodulation filter GAUSs Gaussian filter for optimized settling behaviour RST FLAT Manual operation See Demodulation Filter on page 106 SENSe BANDwidth RESolution Bandwidth This command defines the resolution bandwidth and decouples the resolution band width from the span For statistics measurements this command defines the demodulation bandwidth Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt Bandwidth gt refer to data sheet RST RBW AUTO is set to ON DBW 3MHz Example BAND 1 MHz Sets the resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Resolution Bandwidth on page 107 SENSe SWEep COUNt lt SweepCount gt This command defines the number of sweeps that the application uses to average traces In case of contin
471. ual operation See Hold on page 137 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt SELect This command selects the trace specified by the index lt t gt in the window specified by the index lt n gt Only traces that are active in the specified result display can be selected The selected trace is used to determine the Result Summary for the corre sponding result display see Result Summary on page 21 The query returns the number of the currently selected trace in the window specified by the index lt n gt trace index is ignored Traces can only be queried for graphical result displays not Result Summary Marker Table or Peak Marker List Return values lt TraceNo gt Number of the currently selected trace Example DISP TRAC3 SEL Usage SCPI confirmed DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe State This command turns a trace on and off The measurement continues in the background Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 for TRACe1 0 for TRACe 2 to 6 Example DISP TRAC3 ON Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 on page 136 See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Softkeys on page 138 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AM ABSolute TDOMain TYPE SENSe ADEMod n AM RELative TDOMain TYPE SENSe ADEMod n AM RELative AFSPectrum TYPE SENSe ADEMod lt n gt FM TDOMain TYPE SENSe ADEMod lt n gt FM AFSPectrum TYPE Configuring the
472. uertere nre ote nete E O tB Pian EIE 347 CALCulatesn LIMitsks EOWetr SPAGCIDQ lecto rt tutae ep pare ee ccu abet etr ger EY etaed 348 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer STATe CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer THREShOIG cccceccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeseeaeeeseaaeeeseaneeeteaeeeeseaeees 348 CALCulatesn LIMitsks bOWerEDA TA orto ttn ru chen repe epu exe rte tpe genet reine 346 CAL Culatesm gt IMitsk gt NAME rei aT Bad aulinin Ever Ete bd ag EVER ENRE 349 CAL Culatesm gt ud Sp Up M m 353 CALCulate lt n gt LIMitsk gt TRACE 4 gt CHEGRK crc rtt erepti ce ert tpe eee ree 353 GAL Culatesn bIMitSKO IU INIT eic nee ii cec to rer E A Ere iei te m dvs Re o RE CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer MARGin CAL Culate lt n gt LIMitek gt UPPer MODE reprae pie igre aetna dp eu e nu e Cdp ut CAL GCulate sns bIMitsks PPer OEFSOl eei eh c re Eee ager trice conte eec Drain naga jer en rap Ed olii CALCulatesn LIMitsks UPPer SPAGIRg coco itte erede evanescent te ed ipe xd eau 351 CAL Culatesns bIMitsk s PPoer STA 6 5 cce oua bcr coppa ater eei Encre tr eee Ex ERES inns 351 CALCulate n LIMit k UPPer THReshold essssssssesssessseeee seen nnn nennen eni Enginen 351 CALCulate n LIMitsks PPer DATA 22 oec A avant annua 349 CAL Culatesn MARKersme AOFF iini terii eoe aru de esit bea c
473. ulate n MARKer m FUNCtion PNOise STATe seen 343 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise RESUIt ccccccssseeeceseecceeseeeaseseeeaneees 343 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise STATe lt State gt This command turns the phase noise measurement at the marker position on and off in the Analog Demodulation application Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK2 FUNC PNO ON Switches on the phase noise measurement for the marker 2 Manual operation See Phase Noise Measurement State on page 150 See Switching All Phase Noise Measurements Off on page 151 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise RESult This command queries the result of a phase noise measurement in the Analog Demod ulation application If necessary the command activates the measurement first Return values lt PhaseNoise gt numeric value The difference between the measured carrier power and the noise power at the position of the specified normal marker Example CALC MARK2 FUNC PNO RES Outputs the result of phase noise measurement of the marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Phase Noise Measurement State on page 150 Analyzing Results 11 8 2 Defining Limit Checks 11 8 2 1 Note that in remote control upper and lower limit lines are configured using separate commands Thus you must decide in advance which you want to configure The
474. ult Gauss Optimizes the settling behaviour of the filter Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod TYPE on page 252 Measurement Time AQT Defines how long data is acquired for demodulatation Remote command SENSe ADEMod n MTIMe on page 249 Se ae aa User Manual qa 73 9240 02 21 106 5 5 2 Data Acquisition Capture Offset This setting is only available for applications in MSRA MSRT operating mode It has a similar effect as the trigger offset in other measurements it defines the time offset between the capture buffer start and the start of the extracted application data In MSRA mode the offset must be a positive value as the capture buffer starts at the trigger time 0 In MSRT mode the offset may be negative if a pretrigger time is defined For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Real Time Spectrum Application and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual Remote command SENSe MSRA CAPTure OFFSet on page 360 MSRT mode SENSe RTMS CAPTure OFFSet on page 362 Resolution Bandwidth Defines the resolution bandwidth for data acquisition The available range is specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe BANDwidth RESolution on page 252 Sweep Settings The sweep settings define how often data from the input signal is acquired and then demodulated They are configured via the
475. und of the screen behind the measurement channel tabs indicates that you are in MSRA MSRT operating mode For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Realtime Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual Channel bar information In the Analog Demodulation application the R amp S FSW shows the following settings Table 2 1 Information displayed in the channel bar in the Analog Demodulation application Ref Level Reference level m tel Att Mechanical and electronic RF attenuation Offset Reference level offset AQT Measurement time for data acquisition RBW Resolution bandwidth DBW Demodulation bandwidth Freq Center frequency for the RF signal User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 11 Understanding the Display Information Window title bar information For each diagram the header provides the following information 1 FM Time Domain 1AP Clrw Ref 0 00 Hz DC Demod Out 1 2 345 6 7 8 9 Fig 2 1 Window title bar information in the Analog Demodulation application 1 Window number 2 Modulation type 3 Trace color 4 Trace number 5 Detector 6 Trace mode 7 Reference value at the defined reference position 8 AF coupling AC DC only in AF time domains if applicable 9 Results are selected for demodulation output Diagram footer information The diagram footer beneath t
476. uous sweep mode the application calculates the moving average over the average count In case of single sweep mode the application stops the measurement and calculates the average after the average count has been reached Parameters lt SweepCount gt When you set a sweep count of 0 or 1 the R amp S FSW performs one single sweep in single sweep mode In continuous sweep mode if the sweep count is set to 0 a moving average over 10 sweeps is performed Range 0 to 200000 RST 0 Example SWE COUN 64 Sets the number of sweeps to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Sweep Average Count on page 109 SENSe SWEep POINts lt SweepPoints gt This command defines the number of sweep points to analyze after a sweep Parameters lt SweepPoints gt Range 101 to 100001 RST 1001 Example SWE POIN 251 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Sweep Points on page 109 Configuring the Measurement 11 4 7 Triggering The following remote commands are required to configure a triggered measurement in a remote environment More details are described for manual operation in chapter 5 4 Trigger Configuration on page 97 OPC should be used after requesting data This will hold off any subsequent changes to the selected trigger source until after the sweep is completed and the data is returned e Confi
477. ur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available Analyzing Results To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the pathname and extension of the target file Example MMEM STOR PEAK test dat Saves the current marker peak list in the file test dat Usage Event Manual operation See Exporting the Peak List on page 152 n dB Down Marker The following commands control the n dB down markers CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDOWn eeeeee nennen niente nn nnne nns 340 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuenoy eeseseesseene 340 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown QFACtO ccccssscccesseeceeseeeseeseeeeneeees 341 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown RESult ccccssscceeseeeceescesseeseeeanees 341 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDOWn STATE scccescccceescecceeseceeeseeceseeeaees 342 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown TIME c ccccccseseeesececeesceeaeseeseaeeees 342 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown lt Distance gt This command defines the distance of the n dB down markers to the reference marker lt n gt lt m gt
478. urement Basics zation is activated the offsets in the reference trace are removed from the current measurement results to compensate for the inherent distortions Reference line The reference line is defined by the Reference Value and Reference Position in the External Generator gt Source Calibration settings It is similar to the Reference Level defined in the Amplitude settings However as opposed to the reference level this reference ine only affects the y axis scaling in the diagram it has no effect on the expected input power level or the hardware settings The reference line determines the range and the scaling of the y axis just as the refer ence level does The normalized reference trace 0 dB directly after calibration is displayed on this ref erence line indicated by a red line in the diagram By default the reference line is dis played at the top of the diagram If you shift the reference line the normalized trace is shifted as well Shifting the reference line and normalized trace You can shift the reference line and thus the normalized trace in the result display by changing the Reference Position or the Reference Value MultiView Spectrum Ref Level RBW 2 MHz SWI 3ms VBW 2 MHz m 100 0 MHz 1001 pts 20 0 MHz 300 0 MHz Fig 4 8 Shifted reference line If the DUT inserts a gain or an attenuation in the measurement this effect can be reflected in the result display on the R amp S FSW T
479. used Frequency switching can then be performed per TTL handshake which results in considerable speed advantages This command is only available if external generator control is active see SOURce EXTernal STATe on page 230 Parameters Type GPIB TTL GPIB GPIB connection without TTL synchronization for all generators of other manufacturers and some Rohde amp Schwarz devices TTL GPIB connection with TTL synchronization if available for most Rohde amp Schwarz devices RST GPIB Example SYST COMM RDEV GEN LINK TTL Selects GPIB TTL interface for generator operation Configuring the Measurement Manual operation See TTL Handshake on page 73 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice GENerator TYPE lt Type gt This command selects the type of external generator For a list of the available generator types see the External Generator Control Basics section in the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters lt Name gt lt Generator name as string value gt RST SMUO02 Example SYST COMM RDEV GEN TYPE SMWO6 Selects SMWO6 as an external generator Manual operation See Generator Type on page 73 SYSTem COMMunicate TCPip RDEVice GENerator ADDRess Address Configures the TCP IP address for the external generator Parameters Address TCP IP address between 0 0 0 0 and 0 255 255 255 RST 0 0 0 0 Example SYST COMM TCP RDEV GEN ADDR 130 094 122 195 Manual operation See GP
480. valuation sssessssseesesseeeeen ener 275 Scaling for RF EValu amp tion rnnt teret ettet n e get av c s 276 LEE M 276 e Relative Demodulation Fesulls termes 277 Basic Demodulation Settings The basic demodulation measurement parameters define how the measurement is performed Useful commands described elsewhere chapter 11 4 8 2 Time Domain Zoom Settings on page 267 Basic demodulation commands SENSeTADEModgens AF OOUPII Leia re dd tbt ext tlc ntt heran 265 SENSeTADEMedsrn PM RPOIRIEX e noatra nt kuke nt ttes racc at eit dera EAE 265 SENSe JADEMod lt n gt SQUelch STATe esesesesesssessssesee ettet eene nennen nennt 266 SENSeJADEModen SQUelochibEVel aactor odere rete terat rant ctt otra 266 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF COUPling Coupling This command selects the coupling of the AF path of the analyzer in the specified win dow Parameters Coupling AC DC RST AC PM DC FM Example ADEM AF COUP DC Switches on DC coupling Manual operation See AF Coupling on page 112 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt PM RPOint X Time This command determines the position where the phase of the PM demodulated signal is set to 0 rad The maximum possible value depends on the measurement time selected in the instrument this value is output in response to the query ADEM PM RPO X MAX Configuring the
481. variable RST Fixed Reference OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 10dBm Sets the reference point level for delta markers to 10 dBm Manual operation See Defining a Fixed Reference on page 144 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed RPOint Y OFFSet Offset This command defines a level offset for the fixed delta marker reference point Analyzing Results Parameters lt Offset gt Numeric value RST 0 Default unit dB CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed STATe State This command activates or deactivates a marker that defines a fixed reference point for relative marker analysis If necessary the command activates a marker and positions it on the peak power Subsequently you can change the coordinates of the fixed reference independent of the marker The fixed reference is independent of the trace and is applied to all active delta markers Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX ON Switches on the measurement with fixed reference value for all delta markers CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHZ Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 30 DBM Sets the reference level to 30 dBm Manual operation See Defining a Fixed Reference on page 144 Marker Peak Lists Useful commands for peak lists described elsewhere CALCulate n MARKer m PEXCursion on page 330
482. vel are adjusted so the sig nal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression and clipping are minimized To determine the required reference level a level measurement is performed on the R amp S FSW If necessary you can optimize the reference level further by manually decreasing the attenuation level to the lowest possible value before an overload occurs then decreas ing the reference level in the same way When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 the level measurement is performed on the connected oscilloscope Y axis scaling on the oscil loscope is limited to a minimum of 5mV per division You can change the measurement time for the level measurement if necessary see Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 133 Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 283 Full Scale Level Mode Value The full scale level defines the maximum power you can input at the Baseband Input connector without clipping the signal The full scale level can be defined automatically according to the reference level or manually For manual input the following values can be selected e 025V e 05V e 1V e 2V If probes are connected the possible full scale values are adapted according to the probe s attenuation and maximum allowed power For details on probes see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and 1 Q Input User Manual Remote command INPut IQ FULLscale AUTO on page 209 INPut
483. viewData in XML lt PreviewData gt lt ArrayOfChannel length 1 gt lt Channel gt PowerVs1 Min lt Arra SEX fl l ime yOfFloat length 256 gt oat 134 float oat 142 float efl oat 140 float ArrayOfFloat Min Max lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 float 70 float float 71 float float 69 float ArrayOfFloat Max PowerVsTime Spectrum Min ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt float 133 float float 111 float A 2 2 Q Data File Format iq tar lt float gt 111 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Min gt lt Max gt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 67 lt float gt lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt float gt 70 lt float gt lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Max gt lt Spectrum gt IQ lt Histogram width 64 height 64 gt 0123456789 0 lt Histogram gt IQ lt Channel gt lt ArrayOfChannel gt lt PreviewData gt I Q Data Binary File The I Q data is saved in binary format according to the format and data type specified in the XML file see Format element and DataType element To allow reading and writing of streamed I Q data all data is interleaved i e complex values are interleaved pairs of and Q values and multi channel signals contain interleaved complex sam ples for channel 0 channel 1 channel 2 e
484. weep mode is changed for a measurement channel while the Sequencer is active see INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate on page 294 the mode is only considered the next time the measurement in that channel is activated by the Sequencer Suffix n irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 Continuous sweep OFF 0 Single sweep RST 1 Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the sweep mode to single sweep INIT CONT ON Switches the sweep mode to continuous sweep Manual operation See Continuous Sweep RUN CONT on page 108 INITiate lt n gt IMMediate This command starts a single new measurement Capturing Data and Performing Sweeps With sweep count or average count gt 0 this means a restart of the corresponding number of measurements With trace mode MAXHold MINHold and AVERage the previous results are reset on restarting the measurement You can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Suffix n irrelevant Usage Event Manual operation See Single Sweep RUN SINGLE on page 108 INITiate lt n gt REFResh This function is only available if the Sequencer is deactivated SySTem SEQuencer SYST SEQ OFF and only for applications in MSRA MSRT mode not the MSRA MSRT Master The data in the capture buffer is re evaluated by the currently active application only
485. width extension R amp S FSW B2000 with an IF power trigger only rising slopes can be detected For details see the R amp S FSW I Q Analyzer and I Q Input User Manual Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe on page 259 Trigger Holdoff Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 255 Trigger Configuration 5 4 2 Trigger Input and Output Settings The trigger input and output settings are configured in the Trigger In Out tab of the Trigger dialog box or in the Outputs configuration dialog box via the INPUT OUTPUT key TAGGET E E 104 BER MI C RETE 104 uc HR 105 L Pulse PE NE m T 105 BE o Hiro ERR 105 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW Trigger input parameters are available in the Trigger dialog box Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected
486. ws conventions for file names The limit line data is stored under this name with a LIN extension Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt NAME on page 349 Comment Defines an optional comment for the limit line The text may contain up to 40 charac ters Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt COMMent on page 344 Threshold Defines an absolute threshold value only for relative scaling of the y axis Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer THReshold on page 348 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer THReshold on page 351 Limit Line Settings and Functions Margin Defines a margin for the limit line The default setting is 0 dB i e no margin Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer MARGin on page 347 CALCulate n LIMit k UPPer MARGin on page 349 X Axis Describes the horizontal axis on which the data points of the limit line are defined Includes the following settings Domain Hz for frequency domain s for time domain e Scaling mode absolute or relative Hz s 96 values For relative values the frequencies are referred to the currently set center fre quency In the zero span mode the left boundary of the diagram is used as the ref erence e Scaling linear or logarithmic Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt LOWer SPACing on page 348 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt UPPer SPACing on page 351 CALCulate n L
487. xample ADJ ALL Usage Event Configuring the Measurement Manual operation See Adjusting all Determinable Settings Automatically Auto All on page 132 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation Duration In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S FSW performs a measurement on the current input data This command defines the length of the measurement if SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE is set to MANual Parameters Duration Numeric value in seconds Range 0 001 to 16000 0 RST 0 001 Default unit s Example ADJ CONF DUR MODE MAN Selects manual definition of the measurement length ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5ms Length of the measurement is 5 ms Manual operation See Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual on page 133 SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation MODE Mode In order to determine the ideal reference level the R amp S FSW performs a measurement on the current input data This command selects the way the R amp S FSW determines the length of the measurement Parameters Mode AUTO The R amp S FSW determines the measurement length automati cally according to the current input data MANual The R amp S FSW uses the measurement length defined by SENSe ADJust CONFigure DURation on page 281 RST AUTO Manual operation See Resetting the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Auto on page 133 See Changing the Automatic Measurement Time Meastime Manual o
488. y 12 Since the AF Auto Scale function is enabled the FM Spectrum diagram is scaled according to the current measurement automatically Each diagram is scaled individually so that the reference values at the top of the two diagrams can differ 100 kHz in the FM Time Domain versus 50 kHz in the FM Spectrum However you can adjust the values manually a Select the FM Spectrum window to set the focus in it b Press the AMPT key and select the Scale Config softkey c Disable the AF Auto Scale function d Define the new reference value at 100 top of the diagram as 100 kHz rq MENU UNT ANN NC USUS User Manual 1173 9240 02 21 173 R amp S FSW K7 Measurement Example Demodulating an FM Signal ES EE EEE SSE SEE EE EE SE EE EE eS EES MultiView Spectrum Analog Demod Ref Level 0 00 dBm z Att 10dB AQT 10 ms Freq 500 0 MHz 1 FM Time Domain w Ref 0 00 Hz DC CF 500 0 MHz 100tpts 5 FM Spectrum AF Span 100 0 kHz AF CF 50 0 kHz 100 pts 4 Result Summary Carrier Power 10 37 dBm Carrier Offset 649 07 Hz Peak Peak Peak RMS Mod Freq SINAD THD FM 50 143 kHz 48 844 kHz 49 494 kHz 34 959 kHz 10 000 kHz 65 026 dB 66 413 dB Note that while the reference values at the top of both y axes are now identical the reference values indicated in the window title bars are not This is due to the fact that by default in AF time domain displays the reference value is defined at the reference position 50
489. y INSTrument SELect lt ChannelType gt Selects the channel type for the current channel See also INSTrument CREate NEW on page 182 For a list of available channel types see table 11 1 Parameters lt ChannelType gt ADEMod Analog Demodulation application R amp S FSW K7 SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute This command restores the default instrument settings in the current channel Use INST SEL to select the channel Example INST Spectrum2 Selects the channel for Spectrum2 SYST PRES CHAN EXEC Restores the factory default settings to the Spectrum2 channel Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Channel on page 52 Configuring the Measurement 11 4 Configuring the Measurement 11 4 1 The following remote commands are required to configure an Analog Demodulation measurement Specific commands Managing Standard Settings ret EEA 186 e Configuring te Ippl sssrinin ienai ani prre rete redi tees 187 e Configuring this OUEDUE ctor t rt rrt ial ace Ret cte t i vetns 238 e Frequency Settlhgs cocer ee ete ore eec en v e Pda 240 e Configuring the Vertical Axis Amplitude Scaling seseesssssss 242 e Configuring Data Acquisition nnne 249 LAM NURSE Su 254 ConfiguriDg Damodilallofi crt Ies rrt een eset rra 265 e Adjusting Settings Automatically nennen 280 6 Contiguring Standard tates decer ie ceo ete d ce oes 284 Managing
490. y selected band This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 191 Parameters Band KA QJUJVI EJW F D GJ JY J USER Standard waveguide band or user defined band Manual operation See Band on page 57 Configuring the Measurement Table 11 2 Frequency ranges for pre defined bands Band Frequency start GHz Frequency stop GHz KA A 26 5 40 0 Q 33 0 50 0 U 40 0 60 0 V 50 0 75 0 E 60 0 90 0 Ww 75 0 110 0 F 90 0 140 0 D 110 0 170 0 G 140 0 220 0 J 220 0 325 0 Y 325 0 500 0 USER 32 18 68 22 default default The band formerly referred to as A is now named KA SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH STATe State This command specifies whether a second high harmonic is to be used to cover the band s frequency range Parameters State Example Manual operation ON OFF RST OFF MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON See Range 1 2 on page 58 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALue lt HarmOrder gt This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the high Second range Parameters HarmOrder Example Manual operation numeric value 2 to 61 USER band for other bands see band definition Range MIX HARM HIGH 2 See Harmonic Order on page 58 Configuring the Measurement SENSe MIXer HARMonic TYPE lt OddEven gt This command specifies whether the h
491. y which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command MMEMory STORe cn IQ STATe on page 363 MMEMory STORexcn IQ COMMent on page 363 How to Export and Import I Q Data l Q data can only be exported in applications that process I Q data such as the I Q Analyzer or optional applications Capturing and exporting I Q data 1 Press the PRESET key 2 Press the MODE key and select the R amp S FSW Analog Demodulation application or any other application that supports I Q data Configure the data acquisition Press the RUN SINGLE key to perform a single sweep measurement Select the E Save icon in the toolbar Select the I Q Export softkey In the file selection dialog box select a storage location and enter a file name on o0 5 o Select Save The captured data is stored to a file with the extension iq tar Importing I Q data 1 Press the MODE key and select the IQ Analyzer or any other application that supports I Q data 2 If necessary switch to single sweep mode by pressing the RUN SINGLE key How to Export and Import I Q Data Select the FJ Open icon in the toolbar S
492. y the parameters LINear and LOGarithmic are permit ted 11 4 6 Configuring the Measurement Parameters lt ScalingType gt LOGarithmic Logarithmic scaling LiNear Linear scaling in LDB Linear scaling in the specified unit PERCent Linear scaling in RST LOGarithmic Example DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN Selects linear scaling in 96 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Deviation on page 122 See Scaling on page 123 Configuring Data Acquisition The following remote commands are required to configure which data is to be acquired and then demodulated in a remote environment MSRA MSRT operating mode In MSRA MSRT operating mode only the MSRA MSRT Master channel actually cap tures data from the input signal The data acquisition commands for the Analog Demodulation application in MSRA MSRT mode define the analysis interval For details on the MSRA operating mode see the R amp S FSW MSRA User Manual For details on the MSRT operating mode see the R amp S FSW Realtime Spectrum Applica tion and MSRT Operating Mode User Manual ISENSeJADEMod n gt MTIM6 saccades tiere a ie thc ka UNS AXE RE RERO a 249 SENSe JADEMod n RLENGth eee tette teet te tenta 250 I SENS amp e IADEModsnesiSET 2 1 12 A eise ba oer PRAE Ta SE Te LEE RES RR DER ES aE 250 SENSe JADEMod n SPECtrum BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution sess 251 SENSe JADEMod lt n gt SRAT cc
493. you move it with the rotary knob It therefore takes effect in manual operation only Parameters lt StepSize gt Example Manual operation Analyzing Results STANdard the marker moves from one pixel to the next POINts the marker moves from one sweep point to the next RST POINts CALC MARK X SSIZ STAN Sets the marker step size to one pixel See Marker Stepsize on page 144 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK lt DisplayType gt Links the specified marker in all displays of the specified type Parameters lt DisplayType gt Manual operation TIME SPECtrum BOTH NONE TIME Links the markers in all time domain diagrams SPECtrum Links the markers in all AF Spectrum displays BOTH Links the markers both in the time domain diagrams and in the AF Spectrum displays NONE Markers are not linked RST NONE See Link Time Marker on page 145 See Link AF Spectrum Marker on page 145 DISPlay MTABle lt DisplayMode gt This command turns the marker table on and off Parameters lt DisplayMode gt Example Manual operation ON Turns the marker table on OFF Turns the marker table off AUTO Turns the marker table on if 3 or more markers are active RST AUTO DISP MTAB ON Activates the marker table See Marker Table Display on page 144 Analyzing Results 11 8 1 3 Marker Search Spectrograms The following commands automatically define the marker and delta mar
494. zs LAYOUEAD DIEWINDOW c 298 EAYout GATalogE WINDOW retta rentes eve er xvni repr Pee re Py e Ye YE Ve Sex UP ed 299 EAYOoutIDENUNVDEWINDONW tree yer echter erac erret ee err rcr EO Ree ent 299 LEAY out SEMOVelWINBOWW aieo cart creto tape eet E ee been er conn ep ep uec on E PORE Ae EDO HER XO SUE Ox EE LAYout REPLace WINDow m LAY OUES PIMC m C AY OUCVVINDOWSM gt ADD 302 LAYU WINDOW N gt IDENUfTy itor pete TER ra reo PY ete rer vp ety pepe rne ee eee ver ven 302 LAYout WINDow lt n gt REMove LAY out WINDow lt n gt REPLace MMEMory EOAD IQ S TATO6 rao ttn i reni re ere ee enr t lorc dre en Fx RAE en eade MMEMory STOResn IQ COMMBnt treo rere erisera EET SE r ri ATENT NATES ENa 363 MMEMOrY STORG n SIG STAT Oense eiaei a iE sa AEEA SEENE ATES NETESE 363 MMEMory STOResn dIST aon tton a teet ren pe re ei Re t e c andi 339 MMEMBOFY STORES A gt PEAK snme eerte cipere erae x erben iD punt cos sev Ee EE EE E AEE EET 339 MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe 306 OUTPut ADEMod ONLine AF CFRequency 2 cootra rre ttn 239 OUTPUEADEMod ONEime EPEIONGS ora oes cintas retreat tne RE EAA a tae aen aeo trus de 239 OUTPU tADEModq ONLime SOUNRTCe eire ttp ee nien eee eod yn etna rds 239 OUTPut ADEMod ONLime S TAT6 siiis o co aa cene et

R&S FSW-K7 Analog Demodulation User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S FSW-K7 Analog Demodulation User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S FSW-K7 Analog Demodulation User Manual